WO2012114568A1 - Moving-body communication device, terminal device, base station apparatus, transmission control method, and communication control method - Google Patents
Moving-body communication device, terminal device, base station apparatus, transmission control method, and communication control method Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2012114568A1 WO2012114568A1 PCT/JP2011/070703 JP2011070703W WO2012114568A1 WO 2012114568 A1 WO2012114568 A1 WO 2012114568A1 JP 2011070703 W JP2011070703 W JP 2011070703W WO 2012114568 A1 WO2012114568 A1 WO 2012114568A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- communication
- unit
- vehicle
- information
- mobile
- Prior art date
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G08—SIGNALLING
- G08G—TRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
- G08G1/00—Traffic control systems for road vehicles
- G08G1/16—Anti-collision systems
- G08G1/164—Centralised systems, e.g. external to vehicles
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W4/00—Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
- H04W4/30—Services specially adapted for particular environments, situations or purposes
- H04W4/40—Services specially adapted for particular environments, situations or purposes for vehicles, e.g. vehicle-to-pedestrians [V2P]
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G08—SIGNALLING
- G08G—TRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
- G08G1/00—Traffic control systems for road vehicles
- G08G1/09—Arrangements for giving variable traffic instructions
- G08G1/0962—Arrangements for giving variable traffic instructions having an indicator mounted inside the vehicle, e.g. giving voice messages
- G08G1/0967—Systems involving transmission of highway information, e.g. weather, speed limits
- G08G1/096766—Systems involving transmission of highway information, e.g. weather, speed limits where the system is characterised by the origin of the information transmission
- G08G1/096783—Systems involving transmission of highway information, e.g. weather, speed limits where the system is characterised by the origin of the information transmission where the origin of the information is a roadside individual element
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L67/00—Network arrangements or protocols for supporting network services or applications
- H04L67/01—Protocols
- H04L67/12—Protocols specially adapted for proprietary or special-purpose networking environments, e.g. medical networks, sensor networks, networks in vehicles or remote metering networks
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W4/00—Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
- H04W4/02—Services making use of location information
- H04W4/023—Services making use of location information using mutual or relative location information between multiple location based services [LBS] targets or of distance thresholds
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a communication technology, and relates to a mobile communication device, a terminal device, and a base station device (hereinafter referred to as “mobile communication device”, “terminal device”, “ Any one of the “base station devices” may be referred to as “communication device”, and the three may be collectively referred to as “communication device”.), A transmission control method, and a communication control method.
- Intelligent traffic communication systems Intelligent Traffic communication systems (Intelligent Transport Systems, hereinafter referred to as “ITS”) for the purpose of solving road traffic problems such as traffic accidents and traffic jams by networking people, roads and vehicles with information using information communication technology. )
- ITS Intelligent traffic communication systems
- the form of wireless communication for automobiles in the field dealing with the safe driving support system in ITS can be broadly divided into road-to-vehicle communication and vehicle-to-vehicle (walking) communication.
- the roadside machine and the vehicle communicate information
- vehicle-to-vehicle (walk) communication the vehicle and the vehicle (or pedestrian) directly communicate information.
- the information transmitted from the roadside unit to the vehicle by road-to-vehicle communication includes intersection information, traffic signal information, movement types of moving bodies existing in the observation area, and information indicating the number of movement types (details will be described later).
- intersection information identification information for identifying an intersection
- traffic signal information identification information for identifying a traffic signal
- current signal display information information indicating the display color of the traffic signal
- next signal display information Information such as information indicating the time until the signal display is changed is included.
- the information transmitted from the vehicle to the vehicle by the inter-vehicle communication includes information indicating the current position of the vehicle, the moving speed, the traveling direction, etc.
- the information transmitted from the pedestrian to the vehicle by the inter-vehicle communication includes the walking Information indicating the current position, movement speed, traveling direction, etc. of the person or the like is included (the same applies to inter-vehicle communication and inter-walk communication).
- the mobile communication device includes information (information indicating a current position, a traveling direction, a moving speed, etc.) of a mobile body (own vehicle) provided with (owned by) the mobile communication device, and ITS communication. Based on information (information indicating the current position, traveling direction, moving speed, etc.) of other moving bodies (other vehicles, pedestrians, etc.) provided with (possessed by) the other communication devices received from other communication devices If a traffic jam is detected and it is determined that there is a traffic jam, a traffic jam avoidance route is searched, or a traffic accident judgment is performed and a traffic accident is likely to occur. It contributes to the solution of the road traffic problem (for example, see the mobile communication device disclosed in Patent Document 1).
- road-to-vehicle communication requires the installation of roadside equipment, which increases labor and cost.
- a vehicle vehicle equipment
- installation of a roadside machine becomes unnecessary.
- the current position information of the vehicle is detected in real time by GPS (Global Positioning System), etc., and the position information is exchanged between the vehicles (on-vehicle devices), so that the own vehicle and the other vehicle cross each other. It is possible to determine which road to enter the road (see, for example, Patent Document 2), thereby preventing a collision accident at the intersection.
- each communication device capable of ITS communication transmits information including predetermined information, but depending on the situation, it may be desired not to transmit information related to the own communication device.
- the portable terminal device determines whether or not the portable terminal device (the user (pedestrian) who owns the portable terminal device) is present in the vehicle. A determination unit is provided, and only when the current position of the vehicle and the current position of the pedestrian are the same, the portable terminal is determined to be present in the vehicle, and the transmission of the pedestrian's mobile body information is stopped. I am going to do that.
- ITS communication In ITS communication, if all ITS communication devices (vehicle communication devices such as navigation devices, mobile communication devices such as mobile phones possessed by pedestrians, roadside devices, etc.) transmit information regularly or irregularly, May get crowded.
- the frequency band for wireless communication in ITS is only the frequency band of 700 MHz band, and communication is performed using only one channel. Therefore, in a place where many ITS communication devices exist, the influence of line congestion is present. (Communication impossible, communication delay, communication collision, etc.) are likely to appear prominently.
- An object of the present invention is to provide a body communication device, a terminal device, a base station device, a transmission control method, and a communication control method.
- a terminal device of the present invention includes a first communication unit that notifies a packet signal through first wireless communication, and second wireless communication in which a communicable area is narrower than that of the first wireless communication. And a second communication unit that communicates predetermined information, and a control unit that controls the operation of the first communication unit and the operation of the second communication unit. The control unit stops the operation of the first communication unit until a predetermined period elapses after the communication by the second communication unit is completed.
- This apparatus includes a generation unit that generates a packet signal and a notification unit that notifies the packet signal generated in the generation unit.
- the generation unit includes, in the packet signal, information related to the transmission prohibition period for the first type terminal device and the transmission prohibition period for which the second type terminal device is excluded from the target.
- Still another aspect of the present invention is a terminal device.
- This device is a terminal device mounted in a vehicle, and receives a packet signal from a base station device, and transmits a packet signal based on information contained in the packet signal received by the receiving unit.
- a determination unit that determines the possible period; and an informing unit that notifies the packet signal in the transmittable period determined by the determination unit.
- the determination unit ignores the information and determines the transmission period of the packet signal. .
- a mobile communication device of the present invention is provided in a mobile body, and is detected by a communication section that receives information including information indicating the current position of another mobile body, and a current position detection section. Obtaining the current position of the mobile object and transmitting the mobile object information via the communication unit based on the current position of the mobile object and the current position of the other mobile object received by the communication unit And a control unit that determines whether to perform in a normal control state or a special control state.
- the control unit has a current position of another mobile body received by the communication unit within a predetermined range from a current position of the mobile body detected by the current position detection unit. In some cases, it is desirable to determine that transmission of the mobile body information is performed in a special control state.
- the control unit has a current position of another mobile body received by the communication unit within a predetermined range from a current position of the mobile body detected by the current position detection unit.
- control unit further includes the mobile unit information when the current position of the mobile unit is not ahead of the current direction of the other mobile unit. It is desirable to decide to perform transmission in a special control state.
- the information indicating the current position of the other mobile object is information indicating an observation area
- the communication unit is information indicating the presence or absence of another mobile object in the observation area.
- the special control state is at least one of not transmitting the mobile body information, delaying a transmission cycle, or reducing information transmitted as the mobile body information. It is desirable to include one.
- a transmission control method of the present invention includes a step of acquiring a current position of the mobile body, a step of acquiring information including information indicating a current position of another mobile body, Determining whether transmission of mobile body information is performed in a normal control state or a special control state based on a comparison result between the current position and the current position of the other mobile body Yes.
- the mobile communication device of the present invention transmits mobile information via the second communication unit when the first communication unit and another communication device are performing near field communication.
- a control unit that performs control for performing transmission of mobile body information by the other communication device in a special control state is provided.
- transmission of mobile body information via the second communication unit and transmission of mobile body information by the other communication device have a wider wireless communication range than the short-range wireless communication. It is desirable to be performed by a wide range wireless communication system.
- the control unit determines whether or not the other communication device can transmit mobile information using the wide-range wireless communication method, and the other communication device When it is possible to transmit mobile body information by the wide-range wireless communication system, special control state for mobile body information transmission via the second communication unit or mobile body information transmission by the other communication device It is desirable to perform control for performing the above.
- control unit is configured to transmit mobile information via the second communication unit when short-range wireless communication between the first communication unit and the other communication device is disconnected. It is desirable to perform control for performing transmission in a normal control state regarding transmission of mobile information by the mobile communication terminal.
- the mobile communication device is provided in a vehicle, and the other communication device is a mobile communication terminal.
- the mobile communication device is carried by a pedestrian and the other communication device is an in-vehicle communication device.
- the communication control method of the present invention includes a step in which a first communication unit and another communication device perform near field communication, and a first communication unit and another communication device perform near field communication. Performing a control for performing the transmission of mobile body information via the second communication unit or the transmission of mobile body information by the other communication device in a special control state when performing the communication. It is said.
- the communication function can be automatically stopped in a certain area. Furthermore, according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent congestion of the line in ITS communication without disturbing safe driving support (congestion determination or traffic accident determination). In addition, according to the present invention, when performing short-range wireless communication, wide-range wireless communication (transmission of mobile object information) is restricted (performed in a special control state), so that other communication devices Does not interfere with safe driving support.
- FIG. 3A is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a frame defined in the communication system 100
- FIG. 3B is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a frame generated by the first base station apparatus 10a
- 3 (c) is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a frame generated by the second base station device 10b
- FIG. 3 (d) is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a frame generated by the third base station device 10c
- 4A is a diagram illustrating a subframe in which a road-vehicle transmission period is set
- FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an arrangement of packet signals in the road-vehicle transmission period.
- 5A is a diagram showing a format of a MAC frame stored in a packet signal defined in the communication system of FIG. 1
- FIG. 5B is a message header generated by the generation unit 46.
- FIG. These are figures which show the structure of the terminal device carried by the pedestrian of FIG. These are the sequence diagrams which show the communication procedure in the communication system of FIG. These are the sequence diagrams which show another communication procedure in the communication system of FIG. These are figures which show the structure of the communication system which concerns on the modification of this invention. These are figures which show the structure of the communication system which concerns on another modification of this invention. These are figures which show the structure of the terminal device of FIG. FIG.
- FIG. 11 is a sequence diagram showing a communication procedure in the communication system of FIG. 10.
- FIG. 11 is a sequence diagram showing another communication procedure in the communication system of FIG. 10.
- These are the flowcharts which show the setting procedure of the terminal device which concerns on another modification of this invention.
- These are block diagrams which show the structure of the navigation apparatus of this invention.
- 1st flowcharts which show the flow of the process which the control part of the navigation apparatus of this invention performs.
- 2nd flowcharts which show the flow of the process which the control part of the navigation apparatus of this invention performs.
- 3rd flowcharts which show the flow of the process which the control part of the navigation apparatus of this invention performs.
- FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a list indicating ITS addresses associated with Bluetooth addresses. These are block diagrams which show the structure of the mobile telephone which is another example of this invention. These are 1st flowcharts which show the flow of the process which the control part of the mobile telephone which is another example of this invention performs. These are 2nd flowcharts which show the flow of the process which the control part of the mobile telephone which is another example of this invention performs.
- CSMA / CA Carrier Sense Multiple Access Avididance
- ITS Intelligent Transport Systems
- the terminal device is carried by a pedestrian in addition to being mounted on the vehicle.
- the terminal device carried by the pedestrian notifies the in-vehicle terminal device of the existing position.
- the amount of processing is required to be reduced as compared with an in-vehicle terminal device. For example, the approach of another vehicle is not notified to the pedestrian.
- the communication function of the terminal device carried by such a pedestrian is stopped in a certain area. For example, in facilities such as schools and in transportation such as trains. In consideration of the convenience of pedestrians, it is desirable that the communication function is automatically stopped or resumed.
- the first embodiment of the present invention has been made in view of such a situation, and an object thereof is to provide a technique for automatically stopping a communication function in a certain area.
- an object thereof is to provide a technique for automatically stopping a communication function in a certain area.
- Embodiments of the present invention relate to a communication system that performs vehicle-to-vehicle communication between terminal devices mounted on a vehicle, and also executes road-to-vehicle communication from a base station device installed at an intersection or the like to a terminal device.
- the terminal device broadcasts and transmits a packet signal storing information such as the speed and position of the vehicle (hereinafter referred to as “data”).
- the other terminal device receives the packet signal and recognizes the approach of the vehicle based on the data. The driver is alerted by notifying the driver of the approach of the vehicle.
- the base station apparatus In order to reduce interference between vehicle-to-vehicle communication and road-to-vehicle communication, the base station apparatus repeatedly defines a frame including a plurality of subframes.
- the base station apparatus selects any of a plurality of subframes for road-to-vehicle communication, and broadcasts a packet signal in which control information and the like are stored during the period of the head portion of the selected subframe.
- the control information includes information related to a period for the base station apparatus to broadcast the packet signal (hereinafter referred to as “road vehicle transmission period”).
- the terminal device specifies a road and vehicle transmission period based on the control information, and transmits a packet signal in a period other than the road and vehicle transmission period.
- the inter-vehicle communication is performed by the CSMA method in a period for performing inter-vehicle communication other than the road-vehicle transmission period (hereinafter referred to as “vehicle transmission period”).
- vehicle transmission period Such a terminal device is also carried by a pedestrian.
- a terminal device carried by a pedestrian is battery-driven and requires low power consumption.
- the terminal device carried by the pedestrian only broadcasts a packet signal storing data, and does not notify the pedestrian of the approach of the vehicle.
- the communication system according to the present embodiment executes the following processing. In the following, even terminal devices carried by pedestrians are referred to as inter-vehicle communication and road-to-vehicle communication.
- the terminal device also has a short-range wireless communication function.
- the terminal device transmits information to the reader / writer by short-range wireless communication.
- the information is the ID of the terminal device or pedestrian information.
- the reader / writer is connected to the base station apparatus and outputs the received information to the base station apparatus.
- the base station apparatus determines a change schedule of each lighting color of the traffic light.
- the base station apparatus determines a change schedule so as to change this to blue early and change the signal on the roadway side to red.
- the base station apparatus notifies the packet signal including the change schedule through road-to-vehicle communication. Since the vehicle-mounted terminal device that has received the packet signal notifies the driver that the color of the traffic light changes to red, it can notify the driver that the pedestrian enters the pedestrian crossing. In addition, after transmitting information to the reader / writer, the terminal device stops reporting the packet signal for a certain period. Thereby, power consumption is reduced.
- FIG. 1 shows a configuration of a communication system 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention. This corresponds to a case where one intersection is viewed from above.
- the communication system 100 includes a base station device 10, a first vehicle 12a, a second vehicle 12b, a third vehicle 12c, a fourth vehicle 12d, a fifth vehicle 12e, a sixth vehicle 12f, and a seventh vehicle 12g, collectively referred to as a vehicle 12.
- An eighth vehicle 12h a traffic light 16, a first reader / writer 18a, a second reader / writer 18b, which are collectively referred to as a reader / writer 18, and a network 202.
- Each vehicle 12 is equipped with a terminal device (not shown).
- the area 212 is formed around the base station apparatus 10, and the outside area 214 is formed outside the area 212.
- the road that goes in the horizontal direction of the drawing that is, the left and right direction
- intersects the vertical direction of the drawing that is, the road that goes in the up and down direction, at the central portion.
- the upper side of the drawing corresponds to the direction “north”
- the left side corresponds to the direction “west”
- the lower side corresponds to the direction “south”
- the right side corresponds to the direction “east”.
- the intersection of the two roads is an “intersection”.
- the first vehicle 12a and the second vehicle 12b are traveling from left to right
- the third vehicle 12c and the fourth vehicle 12d are traveling from right to left
- the fifth vehicle 12e and the sixth vehicle 12f are traveling from the top to the bottom
- the seventh vehicle 12g and the eighth vehicle 12h are traveling from the bottom to the top.
- a traffic light 16 is installed at the intersection. Actually, a traffic light 16 is installed in each direction of the road that intersects at the intersection, but only one traffic light 16 is shown here for the sake of clarity.
- a base station device 10 is also installed at the intersection. The base station device 10 controls communication between terminal devices. The base station device 10 repeatedly generates a frame including a plurality of subframes based on a signal received from a GPS satellite (not shown) and a frame formed by another base station device 10 (not shown). Here, the road vehicle transmission period can be set at the head of each subframe. The base station apparatus 10 selects a subframe in which the road and vehicle transmission period is not set by another base station apparatus 10 from among the plurality of subframes. The base station apparatus 10 sets a road and vehicle transmission period at the beginning of the selected subframe. The base station apparatus 10 notifies the packet signal in the set road and vehicle transmission period.
- the base station apparatus 10 is installed in the vicinity of the traffic light 16 and is connected to the first reader / writer 18a, the second reader / writer 18b, and the traffic light 16.
- the reader / writer 18 performs short-range wireless communication with a terminal device (not shown).
- the terminal device capable of communicating with the reader / writer 18 is not a terminal device mounted on the vehicle 12 but a terminal device carried by a pedestrian.
- the short-range wireless communication is, for example, NFC (Near Field Communication), which is communication having a narrower communication range than the above-described road-to-vehicle communication or vehicle-to-vehicle communication.
- NFC Near Field Communication
- the reader / writer 18 is assumed to be the first reader / writer 18a.
- the first reader / writer 18a communicates with the terminal device, and outputs information related to the terminal device acquired by communication to the base station device 10.
- the base station apparatus 10 recognizes that the pedestrian is about to enter the pedestrian crossing by receiving information from the first reader / writer 18a.
- the base station apparatus 10 determines a schedule for lighting each lighting color in the traffic light 16 based on the received information. This schedule corresponds to the aforementioned change schedule. For example, when the current lighting color on the roadway side is blue and the lighting color on the pedestrian crossing side is red, the change schedule is determined so that the lighting color on the pedestrian crossing side changes quickly from blue to red.
- the Such a change schedule makes it possible to notify that a pedestrian is about to cross a pedestrian crossing.
- the base station apparatus 10 notifies the change schedule by including it in the packet signal. Data different from the change schedule can be stored in the packet signal. One is control information and the other is traffic jam information.
- the portable terminal is held over a reader / writer 18 different from the reader / writer 18 holding the terminal device, for example, the second reader / writer 18b.
- the second reader / writer 18b communicates with the terminal device, and outputs information related to the terminal device acquired by communication to the base station device 10.
- the base station device 10 recognizes that the pedestrian is leaving the pedestrian crossing by receiving information from the second reader / writer 18b. Based on the received information, the base station apparatus 10 again determines a schedule for lighting each lighting color in the traffic light 16.
- the base station apparatus 10 broadcasts a packet signal in which a new change schedule is stored.
- the vehicle 12 is driven by an engine and is equipped with a terminal device.
- the terminal device generates a frame based on the control information included in the received packet signal.
- the frame generated in each of the plurality of terminal devices is synchronized with the frame generated in the base station device 10.
- reports a packet signal by performing CSMA / CA in a vehicle transmission period.
- the terminal device stores information on the location in the packet signal.
- the terminal device also stores control information in the packet signal. That is, the control information transmitted from the base station device 10 is transferred by the terminal device.
- a terminal device that cannot receive a packet signal from the base station device 10, that is, a terminal device existing outside the area 214 broadcasts the packet signal by executing CSMA / CA regardless of the frame configuration.
- the terminal device notifies the driver of the approach of the vehicle on which the other terminal device is mounted by receiving a packet signal from the other terminal device.
- the terminal device also acquires a change schedule included in the packet signal from the base station device 10 and notifies the driver of a change in the lighting color of the traffic light 16.
- the driver knows that the pedestrian can cross the pedestrian crossing by recognizing the change in the lighting color to red.
- the terminal device is also carried by a pedestrian.
- Such a terminal device is different from the terminal device mounted on the vehicle 12 in the following points. One is that it has a short-range wireless communication function, and the other is that it does not have a function for notifying the contents of a received packet signal.
- FIG. 2 shows the configuration of the base station apparatus 10.
- the base station apparatus 10 includes an antenna 20, an RF unit 22, a modem unit 24, a processing unit 26, a control unit 30, and a network communication unit 36.
- the processing unit 26 includes an acquisition unit 32, a re-acquisition unit 34, a determination unit 38, a traffic signal IF unit 48, a frame definition unit 40, a selection unit 42, and a generation unit 46.
- the RF unit 22 receives a packet signal from a terminal device (not shown) or another base station device 10 by the antenna 20 as a reception process.
- the RF unit 22 performs frequency conversion on the received radio frequency packet signal to generate a baseband packet signal. Further, the RF unit 22 outputs a baseband packet signal to the modem unit 24.
- baseband packet signals are formed by in-phase and quadrature components, so two signal lines should be shown, but here only one signal line is shown for clarity. Shall be shown.
- the RF unit 22 also includes an LNA (Low Noise Amplifier), a mixer, an AGC, and an A / D conversion unit.
- LNA Low Noise Amplifier
- the RF unit 22 performs frequency conversion on the baseband packet signal input from the modem unit 24 as a transmission process, and generates a radio frequency packet signal. Further, the RF unit 22 transmits a radio frequency packet signal from the antenna 20 during the road-vehicle transmission period.
- the RF unit 22 also includes a PA (Power Amplifier), a mixer, and a D / A conversion unit.
- PA Power Amplifier
- the modem unit 24 demodulates the baseband packet signal from the RF unit 22 as a reception process. Further, the modem unit 24 outputs the demodulated result to the processing unit 26. The modem unit 24 also modulates the data from the processing unit 26 as a transmission process. Further, the modem unit 24 outputs the modulated result to the RF unit 22 as a baseband packet signal.
- the modem unit 24 since the communication system 100 corresponds to the OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) modulation method, the modem unit 24 also executes FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) as reception processing and IFFT (Inverse TransFastFast) as transmission processing. Also execute.
- the frame defining unit 40 receives a signal from a GPS satellite (not shown), and acquires time information based on the received signal.
- the frame defining unit 40 generates a plurality of frames based on the time information. For example, the frame defining unit 40 generates 10 frames of “100 msec” by dividing the period of “1 sec” into 10 on the basis of the timing indicated by the time information. By repeating such processing, the frame is defined to be repeated.
- the frame defining unit 40 may detect the control information from the demodulation result and generate a frame based on the detected control information.
- FIGS. 3A to 3D show frame formats defined in the communication system 100.
- FIG. FIG. 3A shows the structure of the frame.
- the frame is formed of N subframes indicated as the first subframe to the Nth subframe. For example, when the frame length is 100 msec and N is 8, a subframe having a length of 12.5 msec is defined.
- the description of FIGS. 3B to 3D will be described later, and returns to FIG.
- the selection unit 42 selects a subframe in which a road and vehicle transmission period is to be set from among a plurality of subframes included in the frame. More specifically, the selection unit 42 receives a frame defined by the frame defining unit 40. The selection unit 42 inputs a demodulation result from another base station device 10 or a terminal device (not shown) via the RF unit 22 and the modem unit 24. The selection unit 42 extracts a demodulation result from another base station apparatus 10 from the input demodulation results. The selection unit 42 identifies the subframe that has not received the demodulation result by specifying the subframe that has received the demodulation result.
- the selection unit 42 selects one subframe at random.
- the selection unit 42 acquires reception power corresponding to the demodulation result, and gives priority to subframes with low reception power.
- FIG. 3B shows a configuration of a frame generated by the first base station apparatus 10a.
- the first base station apparatus 10a sets a road and vehicle transmission period at the beginning of the first subframe.
- the 1st base station apparatus 10a sets a vehicle transmission period following the road and vehicle transmission period in a 1st sub-frame.
- the vehicle transmission period is a period during which the terminal device can notify the packet signal. That is, in the road and vehicle transmission period which is the head period of the first subframe, the first base station apparatus 10a can notify the packet signal, and in the frame, the terminal apparatus transmits in the vehicle and vehicle transmission period other than the road and vehicle transmission period. It is defined that the packet signal can be broadcast.
- the first base station apparatus 10a sets only the vehicle transmission period from the second subframe to the Nth subframe.
- FIG. 3C shows a configuration of a frame generated by the second base station apparatus 10b.
- the second base station apparatus 10b sets a road and vehicle transmission period at the beginning of the second subframe.
- the second base station apparatus 10b sets the vehicle transmission period from the first stage of the road and vehicle transmission period in the second subframe, from the first subframe and the third subframe to the Nth subframe.
- FIG. 3D shows a configuration of a frame generated by the third base station apparatus 10c.
- the third base station apparatus 10c sets a road and vehicle transmission period at the beginning of the third subframe.
- the third base station apparatus 10c sets the vehicle transmission period from the first stage of the road and vehicle transmission period in the third subframe, the first subframe, the second subframe, and the fourth subframe to the Nth subframe.
- the plurality of base station apparatuses 10 select different subframes, and set the road and vehicle transmission period at the head portion of the selected subframe.
- the selection unit 42 outputs the selected subframe number to the generation unit 46.
- the generation unit 46 sets a road and vehicle transmission period in the subframe of the subframe number received from the selection unit 42, and generates an RSU packet signal to be notified during the road and vehicle transmission period.
- the RSU packet signal and the packet signal are used without distinction.
- FIGS. 4A to 4B show subframe configurations.
- FIG. 4A shows a subframe in which a road and vehicle transmission period is set. As illustrated, one subframe is configured in the order of a road and vehicle transmission period and a vehicle and vehicle transmission period.
- FIG. 4B shows the arrangement of packet signals during the road and vehicle transmission period.
- a plurality of RSU packet signals are arranged in the road and vehicle transmission period.
- the front and rear packet signals are separated by SIFS (Short Interframe Space).
- FIG. 5A and 5B show the format of a MAC frame stored in a packet signal defined in the communication system 100.
- FIG. FIG. 5A shows the format of the MAC frame.
- “MAC header”, “LLC header”, “message header”, “data payload”, and “FCS” are arranged in order from the top. Information included in the data payload will be described later.
- FIG. 5B is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a message header generated by the generation unit 46.
- the message header includes a basic part.
- the basic part includes “protocol version”, “transmission node type”, “number of reuses”, “TSF timer”, and “RSU transmission period length”.
- the protocol version indicates the version of the corresponding protocol.
- the transmission node type indicates the transmission source of the packet signal including the MAC frame. For example, “0” indicates a terminal device, and “1” indicates the base station device 10.
- the selection unit 42 uses the value of the transmission node type.
- the reuse count indicates an index of validity when the message header is transferred by the terminal device, and the TSF timer indicates the transmission time.
- the RSU transmission period length indicates the length of the road and vehicle transmission period, and can be said to be information relating to the road and vehicle transmission period.
- the network communication unit 36 is connected to a network 202 (not shown).
- the network communication unit 36 receives traffic jam information from the network 202.
- the generation unit 46 acquires the traffic jam information from the network communication unit 36 and stores it in the data payload, thereby generating the RSU packet signal described above.
- the acquisition unit 32 is connected to a reader / writer 18 (not shown). As described above, the reader / writer 18 communicates with a terminal device carried by a pedestrian by short-range wireless communication.
- the acquisition unit 32 acquires information related to the terminal device from the terminal device having a short-range wireless communication function via the reader / writer 18.
- An example of the information regarding the terminal device is the ID of the terminal device or pedestrian information, and the pedestrian information includes information that can specify the age of the pedestrian, such as the date of birth.
- the acquisition unit 32 outputs the acquired information to the determination unit 38 and the re-acquisition unit 34.
- the signal IF unit 48 is connected to a signal 16 (not shown).
- a plurality of traffic lights 16 may be provided.
- the traffic light IF unit 48 receives a schedule for lighting each lighting color from the traffic light 16. This is the above-described change schedule, and the traffic light 16 is lit while changing the lighting color in accordance with the change schedule.
- the change schedule shows the correspondence between the time and the lighting color.
- the schedule for a plurality of traffic lights 16 installed at one intersection may be collected in the change schedule.
- the change schedule may include a schedule for a plurality of traffic lights 16 to be operated in conjunction with each other, not limited to one intersection.
- the determination unit 38 receives the change schedule from the traffic signal IF unit 48 and also receives information related to the terminal device from the acquisition unit 32.
- the determination unit 38 determines a new change schedule based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit 32 so as to change the accepted change schedule. For example, a new change schedule is determined so as to extend the red lighting period of the traffic light 16 for the roadway where the pedestrian crosses the pedestrian crossing scheduled to cross.
- the determination part 38 may determine a change schedule so that the lighting interval by each lighting color of a traffic light may change according to the content of the acquired information. For example, if the age of the pedestrian is older than 70, the red lighting period of the traffic light 16 for the roadway that the pedestrian crosses the pedestrian crossing scheduled to cross is further increased.
- the determination unit 38 outputs the determined change schedule to the traffic signal IF unit 48 and also outputs it to the generation unit 46.
- the generating unit 46 receives the change schedule from the determining unit 38 and stores it in the data payload, thereby generating the RSU packet signal described above. Since such a packet signal is notified from the modem unit 24 and the RF unit 22, the driver is informed of the presence of a pedestrian according to the change schedule. Similar to the acquisition unit 32, the reacquisition unit 34 is connected to a reader / writer 18 (not shown). The reacquisition unit 34 receives information related to the terminal device from the acquisition unit 32. The reacquisition unit 34 outputs the information to the determination unit 38 when the information about the terminal device 14 is reacquired from the same terminal device 14 within a certain period after the acquisition unit 32 acquires the information. .
- the reader / writer 18 from which the acquisition unit 32 receives information and the reader / writer 18 from which the re-acquisition unit 34 receives information are different from each other.
- the acquisition unit 32 receives information from the first reader / writer 18a
- the re-acquisition unit 34 receives information from the second reader / writer 18b.
- the determination unit 38 receives a change schedule from the traffic signal IF unit 48 and also receives information related to the terminal device from the reacquisition unit 34. By receiving information about the same terminal device from the acquisition unit 32 and the re-acquisition unit 34, the determination unit 38 recognizes that the pedestrian has crossed the pedestrian crossing. Based on the information reacquired by the reacquisition unit 34, the determination unit 38 re-determines the lighting color change schedule of the traffic light 16. For example, a new change schedule is re-determined so as to shorten the red lighting period of the traffic light 16 for the roadway where the pedestrian crosses the pedestrian crossing scheduled to cross.
- the determination unit 38 determines the lighting color of the traffic light 16.
- the change schedule may be redetermined. This is when the terminal device is held over the first reader / writer 18a when the pedestrian enters the pedestrian crossing, but the terminal device is not held over the second reader / writer 18b when the pedestrian leaves the pedestrian crossing. Equivalent to.
- the determination unit 38 outputs the determined change schedule to the traffic signal IF unit 48 and also outputs it to the generation unit 46.
- the generation unit 46 receives the re-decided change schedule from the determination unit 38 and stores it in the data payload, thereby generating the RSU packet signal described above. Since such a packet signal is notified from the modem unit 24 and the RF unit 22, the driver is notified of the end of the pedestrian crossing according to the change schedule.
- the control unit 30 controls processing of the entire base station apparatus 10.
- This configuration can be realized in terms of hardware by a CPU, memory, or other LSI of any computer, and in terms of software, it can be realized by a program loaded in the memory, but here it is realized by their cooperation.
- Draw functional blocks Accordingly, those skilled in the art will understand that these functional blocks can be realized in various forms by hardware only, software only, or a combination thereof.
- FIG. 6 shows the configuration of the terminal device 14 carried by a pedestrian.
- the terminal device 14 includes a first wireless communication unit 80, a second wireless communication unit 82, and a control unit 84.
- the first wireless communication unit 80 includes an antenna 50, an RF unit 52, a modem unit 54, and a processing unit 56.
- the processing unit 56 includes a generation unit 64, a timing identification unit 60, a transfer determination unit 70, and an acquisition unit 72.
- the timing specifying unit 60 includes an extraction unit 66 and a carrier sense unit 68.
- the antenna 50, the RF unit 52, and the modem unit 54 execute the same processing as the antenna 20, the RF unit 22, and the modem unit 24 in FIG. Therefore, here, the difference will be mainly described.
- the second wireless communication unit 82 performs short-range wireless communication.
- Short-range wireless communication is communication in which the communicable area is narrower than vehicle-to-vehicle communication or road-to-vehicle communication, and a known technique may be used for this, and thus description thereof is omitted here.
- the second wireless communication unit 82 holds information related to the terminal device 14 described above, and transmits information related to the terminal device 14 to the reader / writer 18 (not shown) when short-range wireless communication is executed.
- the second wireless communication unit 82 performs communication between the reader / writer 18 (not shown) when a pedestrian enters the pedestrian crossing. Further, the second wireless communication unit 82 may execute communication between the reader / writer 18 (not shown) even when the pedestrian leaves the pedestrian crossing.
- the second wireless communication unit 82 outputs to the control unit 84 that the communication has been performed when the pedestrian enters the pedestrian crossing and that the communication has been performed when the pedestrian has left the pedestrian crossing.
- the modem unit 54 and the processing unit 56 receive packet signals from other terminal devices 14 and the base station device 10 (not shown). As described above, the modem unit 54 and the processing unit 56 receive the packet signal from the base station apparatus 10 during the road and vehicle transmission period. As described above, the modem unit 54 and the processing unit 56 receive packet signals from other terminal devices 14 during the vehicle transmission period. Note that the modem unit 54 and the processing unit 56 may stop reception during the vehicle transmission period in order to achieve low power consumption.
- the extraction unit 66 specifies the timing of the subframe in which the road-vehicle transmission period is arranged. At that time, the extraction unit 66 estimates that it exists in the area 212 of FIG. The extraction unit 66 generates a frame based on the timing of the subframe and the content of the message header of the packet signal, specifically, the content of the RSU transmission period length. Note that the generation of the frame only needs to be performed in the same manner as the frame defining unit 40 described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. As a result, the extraction unit 66 generates a frame synchronized with the frame formed in the base station apparatus 10.
- the extraction unit 66 estimates that the extraction unit 66 exists outside the area 214 in FIG. When it is estimated that the extraction unit 66 exists in the area 212, the extraction unit 66 selects the vehicle transmission period. When it is estimated that the extraction unit 66 exists outside the area 214, the extraction unit 66 selects a timing unrelated to the frame configuration. When the vehicle transmission period is selected, the extraction unit 66 outputs information on the frame and subframe timing and the vehicle transmission period to the carrier sense unit 68. When selecting the timing unrelated to the frame configuration, the extraction unit 66 instructs the carrier sense unit 68 to execute carrier sense.
- the carrier sense unit 68 receives information on the timing of frames and subframes and the vehicle transmission period from the extraction unit 66.
- the carrier sense unit 68 measures the interference power by performing carrier sense during the vehicle transmission period.
- the carrier sense part 68 determines the transmission timing in a vehicle transmission period based on interference power. More specifically, the carrier sense unit 68 stores a predetermined threshold value in advance, and compares the interference power with the threshold value. If the interference power is smaller than the threshold value, the carrier sense unit 68 determines the transmission timing.
- the carrier sense unit 68 determines the transmission timing by executing the CSMA without considering the frame configuration.
- the carrier sense unit 68 notifies the generation unit 64 of the determined transmission timing.
- the acquisition unit 72 includes a GPS receiver, a gyro sensor, a vehicle speed sensor, and the like (not shown), and based on data supplied from the GPS receiver, the presence position, the traveling direction, the moving speed, and the like (hereinafter, “position information”). Are collectively called).
- position information is indicated by latitude and longitude. Since a known technique may be used for these acquisitions, description thereof is omitted here.
- the acquisition unit 72 outputs the position information to the generation unit 64.
- the transfer determination unit 70 controls the transfer of the message header.
- the transfer determining unit 70 extracts a message header from the packet signal.
- the reuse count is set to “0”.
- the transfer determination unit 70 selects a message header to be transferred from the extracted message header.
- the transfer determination unit 70 may generate a new message header by combining the contents included in the plurality of message headers.
- the transfer determination unit 70 outputs the message header to be selected to the generation unit 64. At that time, the transfer determination unit 70 increases the number of reuses by “1”.
- the generation unit 64 receives position information from the acquisition unit 72 and receives a message header from the transfer determination unit 70.
- the generation unit 64 stores the position information in the data payload using the MAC frame shown in FIGS.
- the generation unit 64 generates a packet signal including a MAC frame, and broadcasts the generated packet signal via the modem unit 54, the RF unit 52, and the antenna 50 at the transmission timing determined by the carrier sense unit 68. Send. This corresponds to inter-vehicle communication.
- the transmission timing is included in the vehicle transmission period.
- the control unit 84 controls the operation of the first wireless communication unit 80 and the operation of the second wireless communication unit 82.
- the control unit 84 normally operates the first wireless communication unit 80.
- the control unit 84 stops the operation of the first wireless communication unit 80 until a predetermined period elapses after the communication by the second wireless communication unit 82 ends.
- the control unit 84 operates the first wireless communication unit 80 until a predetermined period elapses after the second wireless communication unit 82 communicates when entering the pedestrian crossing. Stop. This is equivalent to stopping the inter-vehicle communication while the pedestrian crosses the pedestrian crossing.
- the predetermined period is a period required for the pedestrian to cross the pedestrian crossing.
- the control unit 84 resumes the operation of the first wireless communication unit 80 even if a predetermined period has not elapsed. This is equivalent to restarting inter-vehicle communication when a pedestrian has crossed a pedestrian crossing.
- the terminal device 14 mounted on the vehicle 12 does not include the second wireless communication unit 82 and the control unit 84. Instead, the terminal device 14 mounted on the vehicle 12 includes a notification unit.
- the notification unit acquires a packet signal from the base station device 10 (not shown) during the road-vehicle transmission period, and acquires a packet signal from another terminal device 14 (not shown) during the vehicle-vehicle transmission period. As a process for the acquired packet signal, the notification unit notifies the driver of the approach of another vehicle 12 (not shown) or the like via a monitor or a speaker according to the content of the data stored in the packet signal.
- FIG. 7 is a sequence diagram showing a communication procedure in the communication system 100. This corresponds to a case where the pedestrian does not hold the terminal device 14 over the reader / writer 18 when leaving the pedestrian crossing.
- the terminal device 14 broadcasts the packet signal, and the base station device 10 receives the packet signal (S10).
- the terminal device 14 communicates with the first reader / writer 18a (S12).
- the first reader / writer 18a notifies the base station apparatus 10 of information acquired by communication (S14).
- the terminal device 14 stops road-to-vehicle communication and vehicle-to-vehicle communication (S16).
- the base station apparatus 10 determines the change schedule (S18) and broadcasts the packet signal storing the change schedule (S20).
- the terminal device 14 recognizes that a certain period has elapsed since the communication with the first reader / writer 18a (S22).
- the terminal device 14 broadcasts the packet signal, and the base station device 10 receives the packet signal (S24).
- FIG. 8 is a sequence diagram showing another communication procedure in the communication system 100.
- the terminal device 14 broadcasts the packet signal, and the base station device 10 receives the packet signal (S50).
- the terminal device 14 communicates with the first reader / writer 18a (S52).
- the first reader / writer 18a notifies the base station apparatus 10 of information acquired through communication (S54).
- the terminal device 14 stops road-to-vehicle communication and vehicle-to-vehicle communication (S56).
- the base station apparatus 10 determines the change schedule (S58) and broadcasts the packet signal storing the change schedule (S60).
- the terminal device 14 communicates with the second reader / writer 18b (S62).
- the second reader / writer 18b notifies the base station apparatus 10 of information acquired through communication (S64).
- the base station apparatus 10 determines a change schedule (S66) and broadcasts a packet signal storing the change schedule (S68).
- the terminal device 14 broadcasts the packet signal, and the base station device 10 receives the packet signal (S70).
- the modification of this invention is related with the communication system which also performs road-to-vehicle communication while performing vehicle-to-vehicle communication like an Example.
- the present invention relates to a terminal device that is carried by a pedestrian and has a short-range wireless communication function.
- the terminal device according to the embodiment stops the functions of vehicle-to-vehicle communication and road-to-vehicle communication over a period of crossing a pedestrian crossing. That is, when ITS transmission is unnecessary, notification of information necessary for ITS (hereinafter referred to as “ITS information”) is stopped. Similar to the embodiment, this modification also relates to stopping the notification of the ITS information when the ITS transmission is unnecessary.
- the communication system 100 is the same type as that in FIG. 1, the base station device 10 is the same type as that in FIG. 2, and the terminal device 14 is the same type as that in FIG. Note that the communication system 100 may not include the reader / writer 18, and the base station apparatus 10 does not include the acquisition unit 32, the reacquisition unit 34, the determination unit 38, and the traffic signal IF unit 48. Also good. Below, it demonstrates focusing on a difference.
- FIG. 9 shows a configuration of a communication system 110 according to a modification of the present invention.
- the communication system 110 includes a terminal device 14, a reader / writer 18, and a management device 150.
- the reader / writer 18 is installed at a company reception. As described above, the reader / writer 18 performs short-range wireless communication and is connected to the management device 150. When a pedestrian goes to work with the terminal device 14, the pedestrian holds the terminal device 14 over the reader / writer 18. Near field communication is performed between the terminal device 14 and the reader / writer 18, and information regarding the terminal device 14 is transmitted from the terminal device 14 to the management device 150 via the reader / writer 18. When the management device 150 receives information on the terminal device 14, the management device 150 registers the attendance of the pedestrian carrying the terminal device 14. The terminal device 14 stops road-to-vehicle communication and vehicle-to-vehicle communication.
- the pedestrian holds the terminal device 14 over the reader / writer 18 when leaving.
- short-range wireless communication is performed between the terminal device 14 and the reader / writer 18, and information regarding the terminal device 14 is transmitted from the terminal device 14 to the management device 150 via the reader / writer 18.
- the management device 150 receives information on the terminal device 14, the management device 150 registers the exit of the pedestrian carrying the terminal device 14.
- the terminal device 14 resumes road-to-vehicle communication and vehicle-to-vehicle communication.
- the management device 150 receives information related to the terminal device 14 by communicating with the terminal device 14 via the reader / writer 18.
- the management device 150 manages the attendance status of pedestrians who carry the terminal device 14 based on information regarding the terminal device 14.
- the management device 150 changes the pedestrian's state to work.
- the management device 150 receives information on the terminal device 14 when the pedestrian's state is going to work, the management device 150 changes the pedestrian's state to withdrawal.
- the reader / writer 18 may be installed in a school, a hospital, or a public facility instead of a company.
- the management device 150 manages information according to the place where the reader / writer 18 is installed. For example, attendance is going to school, reception, etc.
- Another modification of the present invention also relates to a communication system that executes vehicle-to-vehicle communication and road-to-vehicle communication as in the embodiment.
- the present invention relates to a terminal device that is carried by a pedestrian and has a short-range wireless communication function.
- the terminal device according to the embodiment stops the functions of vehicle-to-vehicle communication and road-to-vehicle communication over a period of crossing a pedestrian crossing.
- Another modification also relates to stopping reporting of ITS information when ITS transmission is unnecessary, as in the embodiment.
- transportation such as a train, a bus, and a taxi is used.
- the pedestrian executes a settlement process by short-range wireless communication, and the notification of the ITS information is stopped at that timing.
- the communication system 100 is the same type as that in FIG. 1, and the base station apparatus 10 is the same type as that in FIG. Note that the communication system 100 may not include the reader / writer 18, and the base station apparatus 10 does not include the acquisition unit 32, the reacquisition unit 34, the determination unit 38, and the traffic signal IF unit 48. Also good.
- FIG. 10 shows a configuration of a communication system 120 according to another modification of the present invention.
- the communication system 120 includes a terminal device 14, a ticket gate 152, a network 202, and a payment server 154, and the ticket gate 152 includes a reader / writer 18.
- the reader / writer 18 is installed in the ticket gate 152. As described above, the reader / writer 18 performs short-range wireless communication and is connected to the management device 150. A pedestrian holds the terminal device 14 over the reader / writer 18 when carrying the terminal device 14 and passing through the ticket gate 152 for boarding. By performing short-range wireless communication between the terminal device 14 and the reader / writer 18, the terminal device 14 and the payment server 154 execute a payment process via the network 202. Since a publicly known technique may be used for the settlement process, the description is omitted here. Thereafter, the terminal device 14 stops road-to-vehicle communication and vehicle-to-vehicle communication.
- the pedestrian holds the terminal device 14 over the reader / writer 18 when carrying the terminal device 14 and passing another ticket gate 152 for getting off.
- short-distance wireless communication is performed between the terminal device 14 and the reader / writer 18, whereby the terminal device 14 and the settlement server 154 perform settlement processing via the network 202.
- the terminal device 14 resumes road-to-vehicle communication and vehicle-to-vehicle communication.
- the settlement server 154 settles the fare with the terminal device 14 by communicating with the terminal device 14 via the reader / writer 18 and the network 202.
- the settlement server 154 confirms the pedestrian boarding station by executing a settlement process with the terminal device 14 when boarding.
- the settlement server 154 confirms the pedestrian exit station by executing a settlement process with the terminal device 14 when getting off.
- the settlement server 154 stores a fare table in advance, and derives the fare from the boarding station to the departure station based on the table.
- the settlement server 154 subtracts the amount corresponding to the derived fare from the pedestrian's electronic money.
- FIG. 11 shows the configuration of the terminal device 14.
- a settlement unit 86 is further added to the terminal device 14 of FIG.
- the settlement unit 86 performs a communication with the external settlement server 154 via the second wireless communication unit 82 to settle the service usage fee, that is, the fare.
- the second wireless communication unit 82 performs communication when entering the service providing area and when leaving the service providing area.
- the former means passing through the ticket gate 152 when getting on, and the latter corresponds to passing through the ticket gate 152 during the latter.
- the control unit 84 communicates with the second wireless communication unit 82 when passing the ticket gate 152 when boarding, and then communicates with the second wireless communication unit 82 when passing the ticket gate 152 with the latter. In the meantime, the operation of the first wireless communication unit 80 is stopped.
- FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing a communication procedure in the communication system 120. This corresponds to a processing procedure for boarding.
- the terminal device 14 notifies a packet signal for vehicle-to-vehicle communication (S100).
- the terminal device 14 and the reader / writer 18 execute communication (S102), and the terminal device 14 and the payment server 154 execute a payment process (S104).
- the terminal device 14 stops the notification for vehicle-to-vehicle communication (S106).
- FIG. 13 is a sequence diagram showing another communication procedure in the communication system 120. This corresponds to the processing procedure at the time of getting off, and is processing following FIG.
- the terminal device 14 stops the notification for vehicle-to-vehicle communication (S120).
- the terminal device 14 and the reader / writer 18 execute communication (S122), and the terminal device 14 and the payment server 154 execute a payment process (S124).
- the terminal device 14 notifies a packet signal for vehicle-to-vehicle communication (S126).
- Still another modified example of the present invention relates to a communication system that executes vehicle-to-vehicle communication and road-to-vehicle communication as in the embodiment.
- the present invention relates to a terminal device that is carried by a pedestrian and has a short-range wireless communication function.
- the terminal device according to the embodiment stops the functions of vehicle-to-vehicle communication and road-to-vehicle communication over a period of crossing a pedestrian crossing.
- Still another modified example relates to stopping reporting of ITS information when ITS transmission is unnecessary, as in the embodiment.
- FIG. 5B shows the structure of the message header.
- the “RSU transmission period length” is a period for which the terminal device 14 is prohibited from transmitting (hereinafter referred to as “transmission prohibited period”). It is shown.
- a simple base station apparatus 10 is installed in an area where ITS transmission is prohibited, such as in a car or a building, using this.
- the transmission power of the simple base station apparatus 10 is smaller than that of the normal base station apparatus 10 so that the inside of the vehicle or the building is a service area.
- the simple base station apparatus 10 broadcasts the RSU packet signal, and at that time, a transmission prohibition period is set for the entire period.
- the base station apparatus 10 may have antenna directivity that is limited to the inside of a vehicle or a building.
- the terminal device 14 sets a transmission prohibition period for the entire period. This corresponds to the terminal device 14 not notifying the packet signal while receiving the RSU packet signal.
- the RSU packet signal notified from the simple base station apparatus 10 may be received by the terminal apparatus 14 mounted on the vehicle 12. At that time, the terminal device 14 mounted on the vehicle 12 should continue notifying the packet signal without stopping the notification.
- the simple base station device 10 represents information for the terminal device 14 carried by the pedestrian (hereinafter referred to as “for pedestrian”) in the reserved area of the RSU packet signal. Include the identifier.
- the terminal device 14 carried by the pedestrian confirms the identifier
- the terminal device 14 sets a transmission prohibition period for the entire period.
- the terminal device 14 mounted on the vehicle 12 confirms the identifier
- the communication system 100 according to the modification of the present invention is the same type as that in FIG.
- the base station device 10 is the same type as that in FIG. 2, and the terminal device 14 is the same type as that in FIG. Note that the communication system 100 may not include the reader / writer 18, and the base station apparatus 10 does not include the acquisition unit 32, the reacquisition unit 34, the determination unit 38, and the traffic signal IF unit 48. Also good. The same applies to the simple base station apparatus 10.
- the generation unit 46 of the simple base station apparatus 10 generates a packet signal as described above.
- the generation unit 46 includes an identifier for representing information for pedestrians in the packet signal, and sets a transmission prohibition period for the entire period. This corresponds to setting a transmission prohibition period for the terminal device 14 carried by a pedestrian, and corresponds to setting a transmission prohibition period excluding the terminal device 14 mounted on the vehicle 12 from the target. To do.
- the modem unit 24 and the RF unit 22 broadcast the packet signal generated by the generation unit 46.
- the RF unit 52 and the modem unit 54 of the terminal device 14 mounted on the vehicle 12 receive the packet signal from the base station device 10.
- the timing specifying unit 60 determines a packet signal transmittable period based on information included in the packet signal. Specifically, the transmittable period is set in a period other than the transmission prohibited period. Note that CSMA is performed within the transmittable period.
- the timing specifying unit 60 ignores the transmission prohibition period included in the packet signal and transmits the packet signal. Determine the possible period.
- the modem unit 54 and the RF unit 52 broadcast the packet signal in the determined transmittable period.
- FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a setting procedure of the terminal device 14 according to still another modified example of the present invention.
- the RF unit 52 and the modem unit 54 receive the packet signal (S150).
- the timing specifying unit 60 extracts information related to the transmission prohibition period (S152). If the identifier for pedestrians is included in the packet signal (Y in S154), the timing specifying unit 60 reflects the transmission prohibition period (S156) and sets the transmittable period (S160). On the other hand, if the identifier for pedestrians is not included in the packet signal (N in S154), the timing specifying unit 60 discards the transmission prohibition period (S158) and sets the transmission possible period (S160).
- the change schedule is determined based on the information acquired from the terminal device, it is possible to determine the change schedule suitable for pedestrian crossing. Moreover, since the change schedule suitable for a pedestrian crossing is determined, the probability of a rear-end collision between a pedestrian and a vehicle can be reduced. Moreover, since the change schedule suitable for a pedestrian crossing is notified, it can notify correctly that a pedestrian approachs a pedestrian crossing.
- the change schedule is determined based on the information about the pedestrian so that the lighting interval of each lighting color changes, the change schedule suitable for the pedestrian can be determined. Moreover, since the change schedule suitable for a pedestrian is notified, safety can further be improved. Moreover, since the change schedule suitable for a pedestrian is notified, a traffic weak person can be protected.
- the power consumption can be reduced. Further, since the power consumption is reduced, the battery driving time can be extended. In addition, since inter-vehicle communication is stopped when entering a pedestrian crossing, power consumption during crossing of the pedestrian crossing can be reduced. Moreover, since vehicle-to-vehicle communication is resumed when leaving the pedestrian crossing, position information can be notified after the crossing is completed. Moreover, since vehicle-to-vehicle communication is resumed when a predetermined period has elapsed, the position information can be automatically notified.
- the attendance confirmation is executed by short-range wireless communication and the inter-vehicle communication is stopped, so both processes can be executed together. Further, since the vehicle-to-vehicle communication is stopped by short-range wireless communication when working at the company, the vehicle-to-vehicle communication in the company can be stopped. Moreover, since both processes are performed collectively, the convenience of a pedestrian can be improved. In addition, since reader / writers are installed in schools, hospitals, public facilities, etc., inter-vehicle communication can be stopped in various places.
- both processes can be executed together. Further, since the inter-vehicle communication is stopped when boarding, the inter-vehicle communication during boarding can be stopped. Moreover, since the settlement of the fare is executed at the time of getting off and the inter-vehicle communication is resumed, both processes can be executed together. Further, since the whole base period is set as the transmission prohibition period in the simple base station apparatus, the inter-vehicle communication can be stopped around the place where the simple base station apparatus is installed. Moreover, since the whole period is set as a transmission prohibition period and an identifier representing information for pedestrians is included in the packet signal, transmission can be stopped only for terminal devices carried by pedestrians. . Moreover, since transmission is stopped only for the terminal device carried by the pedestrian, the inter-vehicle communication can be continued by the terminal device mounted on the vehicle.
- the reader / writer 18 is provided in the ticket gate 152, and the settlement server 154 executes a fare settlement process.
- it is applied to transportation.
- the present invention is not limited to this.
- the present invention may be applied not to transportation facilities but to service providing facilities such as movies and theaters.
- the reader / writer 18 is provided for reception, and the settlement server 154 executes settlement processing for the entrance fee.
- the present invention can be applied to various services.
- ITS communication terminals in-vehicle communication devices such as navigation devices, mobile communication terminals such as mobile phones held by pedestrians, roadside devices, etc.
- ITS communication terminals transmit information regularly or irregularly, the line is congested There is a possibility that.
- the frequency band when performing wireless communication in ITS is only the 700 MHz band, and communication is performed using only one channel. Therefore, in a place where many ITS communication terminals exist, the influence of line congestion is present. (Communication impossible, communication delay, communication collision, etc.) are likely to appear prominently.
- the second to sixth embodiments of the present invention can prevent congestion of the line in ITS communication without disturbing safe driving support (congestion determination and traffic accident determination) in view of the above-described problems.
- An object of the present invention is to provide a mobile communication device and a transmission control method. Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described.
- FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the navigation apparatus of the present invention.
- the navigation apparatus 300 includes a control unit 301, a display unit 302, an operation unit 303, a current position detection unit 304, a speed detection unit 305, a map information storage unit 306, a battery 307, and a communication unit 308. Yes.
- the control unit 301 is a control unit that comprehensively controls the entire navigation apparatus 300.
- the control unit 301 includes a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM (all not shown).
- the ROM stores a program executed by the control unit 301 and parameters and data necessary for executing the program.
- the CPU executes various programs stored in the ROM.
- the RAM temporarily stores data obtained during various processes and data obtained as a result of various processes.
- These CPU, RAM, ROM and the like are connected via a bus. Note that the CPU, ROM, and RAM may be partially or fully integrated on one chip.
- the control unit 301 controls transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle to other communication devices performed via the communication unit 308 (details will be described later).
- the display unit 302 Based on an instruction from the control unit 301, the display unit 302 displays a map screen (route to the destination, vehicle equipped with the navigation device 300 (hereinafter, “vehicle equipped with the navigation device 300” is referred to as “own vehicle”). Display screen for displaying a map image including a mark indicating the current position) and a menu screen.
- the operation unit 303 is input operation means for the user to input a destination or operate a menu.
- various keys and buttons may be provided on the navigation device body, or a touch panel function may be added to the display unit 302.
- a remote controller for remotely operating the navigation device 300 main body as the operation unit 303 may be used as the operation unit 303.
- the current position detection unit 304 detects the current position of the host vehicle, and includes a GPS receiver, self-contained navigation means, a position calculation CPU, and the like.
- the self-contained navigation means includes a steering angle sensor, an acceleration sensor, a distance sensor, a direction sensor, and the like, detects the travel distance and the traveling direction of the own vehicle, and obtains the current position based on these values.
- the GPS receiver receives radio waves transmitted from a plurality of GPS satellites with a GPS antenna and performs a three-dimensional positioning process or a two-dimensional positioning process to calculate the absolute position and traveling direction of the own vehicle.
- the traveling direction is calculated based on the current vehicle position and the previous vehicle position.
- the detection method of the advancing direction is not specifically limited, For example, it is good also as detecting from the rotation direction of a tire, and you may detect using a direction sensor.
- a traveling direction detection unit may be provided separately from the current position detection unit 304 to detect the traveling direction of the host vehicle.
- Speed detector 305 detects the moving speed of the vehicle.
- the moving speed may be calculated from the output of the vehicle speed sensor or the acceleration sensor, or may be calculated from the difference between the travel distance between the GPS histories and the GPS reception time.
- the current position detection unit 304 may detect the moving speed of the host vehicle.
- the speed detection unit 305 can be omitted.
- the current position detection unit 304 includes the speed detection unit 305.
- the steering angle sensor, acceleration sensor, speed sensor, direction sensor, and the like may be included in the navigation device 300, or the vehicle (own vehicle) includes the various sensors.
- the navigation device 300 includes the various sensors. It is good also as a structure provided with the interface which acquires these outputs.
- the map information storage unit 306 stores map information that is referred to when performing route search or guidance to the destination.
- the map information includes network data (node data, link data).
- a NAND flash, an SD memory card, or the like can be suitably used.
- the map information storage unit 306 may be built in the navigation device 300, or may be configured to be detachable from the navigation device 300.
- the map information may include a map image, or the map image may be drawn on the display unit 302 based on network data (node data, link data) included in the map information.
- a communication unit 308, which will be described later receives map information from a roadside machine or the like, and the received map information is stored in the map information storage unit 306. Also good.
- the network data includes road node data and link data.
- the control unit 301 detects the current position of the vehicle detected by the current position detection unit 304 (the traveling direction and the moving speed may be added), map information, Can be specified by performing a map matching process.
- the map matching process may be performed by the control unit 301 or the current position detection unit 304. That is, based on the current position detected using the GPS receiver and / or the autonomous navigation means and the map information, the map matching process is performed, and the current position where the map matching process is performed is output to the control unit 301 as the current position. Also good. Or it is good also as the present position detection part 304 including the map matching process of the control part 301.
- FIG. 1 the present position detection part 304 including the map matching process of the control part 301.
- the battery 307 is a power supply means when the navigation device 300 is used in a portable manner, and a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery or a nickel metal hydride battery can be suitably used.
- a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery or a nickel metal hydride battery can be suitably used.
- a primary battery such as an alkaline manganese dry battery or a manganese dry battery may be used, or a fuel cell may be used.
- the communication unit 308 transmits information to other communication devices that can communicate with the navigation device 300 (hereinafter referred to as “other communication devices”) and information transmitted from the other communication devices.
- the communication method is preferably non-contact communication such as wireless communication or infrared communication.
- the other communication device may be an in-vehicle communication device such as a navigation device mounted on another vehicle (when a pedestrian is on another vehicle, a mobile communication terminal such as a mobile phone held by the pedestrian may be used. ), Mobile communication terminals such as mobile phones possessed by roadside devices, pedestrians, etc. (pedestrians, bicycle drivers, etc.).
- the information received by the communication unit 308 from the in-vehicle communication device such as a navigation device mounted on another vehicle includes the vehicle information of the other vehicle (information on the in-vehicle communication device (current position, moving speed, etc.). It can be rephrased as “moving body information of other vehicles”).
- vehicle information of the other vehicle information on the in-vehicle communication device (current position, moving speed, etc.). It can be rephrased as “moving body information of other vehicles”.
- other vehicles equipped with in-vehicle communication devices such as navigation devices
- other vehicles equipped with in-vehicle communication devices such as navigation devices
- other vehicles equipped with in-vehicle communication devices such as navigation devices
- Other vehicles Information indicating the current position, traveling direction, moving speed, and the like, and information indicating the movement type (that is, the vehicle) of another vehicle may be included.
- the information received by the communication unit 308 from a mobile communication terminal such as a mobile phone possessed by a pedestrian or the like includes mobile body information such as a pedestrian or the like.
- mobile information such as pedestrians
- pedestrians who have mobile communication terminals such as mobile phones are also referred to as “pedestrians”.
- Information indicating the current position, traveling direction, moving speed, and the like, and information indicating the type of movement such as a pedestrian (that is, a pedestrian or the like) may be included.
- the current position of other vehicles, pedestrians, etc. may be the current position after the map matching process, or the current position before the map matching process (current position measured by a GPS receiver or the like). Also good. If the current position is before the map matching process, the control unit 301 (current position detection unit 304) may perform the map matching process.
- the communication unit 308 receives the moving body information of another vehicle from another vehicle, but may receive it from a mobile communication terminal such as a roadside device or a mobile phone. The same applies to moving body information such as pedestrians.
- the mobile body information of other mobile bodies transmitted from other communication devices (such as in-vehicle communication devices and roadside machines), or the own vehicle transmitted via the communication unit 308
- the mobile object information will be described as being transmitted to the surroundings by broadcast.
- the navigation device 300 receives (acquires) moving body information of other moving bodies (other vehicles, pedestrians, etc.) via the communication unit 308, and the own vehicle via the communication unit 308.
- the moving body information (current position, etc.) is transmitted.
- the navigation apparatus 300 can specify the current position and moving speed of other moving bodies (other vehicles, pedestrians, etc.), and the specified current position and moving speed of the other moving bodies and the moving body information of the own vehicle. Based on (current position, moving speed, etc.), it becomes possible to perform safe driving support (congestion judgment and traffic accident judgment).
- ITS communication terminals transmit mobile body information including the same information (current position, moving speed, etc.) in the same transmission cycle. Then, the line may be congested.
- a or B Mobile body information may be transmitted from any one of the mobile communication terminals.
- the current position of the host vehicle for example, the current position of A
- the current position of the other moving body for example, the current position of B
- the communication unit 308 are within a predetermined range.
- it is determined that the transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle (the moving body information of A) performed through the communication unit is performed in a special control state (details will be described later, such as transmission stoppage).
- the fact that the current position (for example, the current position of B) of another moving body within the predetermined range from the current position of the own vehicle (for example, the current position of A) is received means that the surroundings of the other moving body (B)
- Other communication devices substantially the same as other communication devices existing around the current position of the vehicle (the current position of A)
- other mobile objects (B) B) is present (being broadcast).
- FIG. 16 is a first flowchart showing a flow of processing executed by the control unit 301 of the navigation device 300 of the present invention.
- step S01 the control unit 301 uses the current position of the host vehicle detected by the current position detection unit 304 and the current position detection unit 304 (or a traveling direction detection unit when the navigation device 300 includes a traveling direction detection unit). Information related to the host vehicle such as the traveling direction of the host vehicle detected and the moving speed of the host vehicle detected by the speed detector 305 is acquired.
- the control unit 301 acquires the moving body information of one or more other moving bodies (other vehicles, pedestrians, etc.) received by the communication unit 308.
- the mobile body information of each other mobile body includes at least information indicating the current position of the other mobile body (for example, the mobile body information of the other vehicle A includes at least other mobile body information).
- Information indicating the current position of the vehicle A is included.
- information indicating the traveling direction of the other vehicle A and information indicating the moving speed of the other vehicle A may be included.
- the moving body information of the vehicle A includes only information related to the other vehicle A (for example, information related to the other vehicle B is not included).
- the control unit 301 acquires information about the own vehicle in step S01, and acquires moving body information of one or more other moving bodies in step S02.
- the order in which the information is acquired may not be the order shown in the flowchart.
- the information may be acquired at the same time, or the moving body information of one or more other moving bodies may be acquired first. Also good.
- the timing at which the control unit 301 acquires information about the vehicle and the moving body information of one or more other moving bodies is the timing.
- the information may be acquired regularly or irregularly, and when information is acquired a plurality of times regularly or irregularly, the latest information among the acquired information may be used.
- step S03 the control unit 301 determines whether or not the current position of the other moving body is within a predetermined range from the current position of the own vehicle. If the current position of the other moving body is within the predetermined range from the current position of the own vehicle (Y in step S03), the process proceeds to step S04, and the current position of the other moving body must be within the predetermined range from the current position of the own vehicle. (N in step S03), the process proceeds to step S06.
- step S02. determination is performed for every moving body information of another moving body, when the moving body information of several other moving bodies is acquired in step S02. After determination is made for each piece of moving body information of all other moving bodies, if at least one of the current positions of a plurality of other moving bodies is within a predetermined range from the current position of the host vehicle, the process proceeds to step S04. Shall proceed.
- the predetermined range from the current position of the host vehicle may be an arbitrary range set as appropriate. For example, a circle having a predetermined radius (5 m) centered on the current position of the host vehicle (depending on the movement type) The radius may be changed.), Or a quadrangle formed of the road width of the road on which the vehicle is traveling and a predetermined distance (5 m) centered on the current position of the vehicle. .
- step S04 the control unit 301 determines whether or not the movement type of the own vehicle and the movement type of another moving body are the same.
- the other moving body is another moving body determined in step S03 as being within a predetermined range from the current position of the own vehicle, and is determined to be within the predetermined range from the current position of the own vehicle.
- the determination is made for each of the other mobile objects.
- step S04 If the movement type of the own vehicle and the movement type of the other moving body are the same (Y in step S04), the process proceeds to step S05, and the movement type of the own vehicle and the movement type of the other moving body are not the same ( N in step S04) The process proceeds to step S06.
- the first method for specifying the movement type of the host vehicle is that the user inputs the movement type using the operation unit 303, or the user uses the operation unit 303 to select the movement type from a plurality of movement types displayed on the display unit 302. It is a method of specifying by selecting.
- Information indicating the identified movement type is stored in a memory (for example, RAM). In this case, since the information indicating the movement type specified by the user is stored in the memory, it can be said that the control unit 301 acquires the information indicating the movement type of the own vehicle as information about the own vehicle in step S01.
- the second method of specifying the movement type of the own vehicle is a method in which the control unit 301 specifies based on the moving speed of the own vehicle. Specifically, for example, when the moving speed is 30 km / h or more, the moving type is “vehicle”, and when the moving speed is less than 30 km / h, the moving type is “pedestrians”. In addition, when specifying based on moving speed, it is preferable to determine by whether the average of moving speed is 30 km / h or more.
- the third method of specifying the movement type of the own vehicle is a method in which the control unit 301 specifies based on the type of power supply of the navigation device 300. Specifically, if the navigation apparatus 300 receives power supply (12V) from a battery mounted on the vehicle, the movement type is “vehicle”, and if the navigation apparatus 300 receives power supply from the battery 307 included in the navigation apparatus 300, the movement is performed. The type is “pedestrians”.
- the fourth method of specifying the movement type of the own vehicle is a method in which the control unit 301 specifies based on the output of a sensor or the like included in the vehicle (own vehicle). Specifically, for example, when the navigation device 300 includes an interface that acquires information indicating the lighting state of the headlight of the vehicle (own vehicle), information indicating whether the headlight is turned on or off is used as information about the own vehicle. If it is acquired, the movement type is “vehicle”, and if it is not acquired, the movement type is “pedestrian”.
- the movement type of the own vehicle can be specified from the current position. For example, based on the map information and the current position, the movement type may be “vehicle” if the current position is on a roadway, and the movement type may be “pedestrians” if the current position is on a sidewalk.
- the method for specifying the movement type of another mobile object is similar to the method for specifying the movement type of the own vehicle. If the received mobile object information of another mobile object includes information indicating the movement type, the movement type is determined. If the information indicating the type is specified and the information indicating the movement type is not included, the moving speed of the other moving body included in the received other moving body information or the other moving body is mounted. It can be specified based on the type of power source to which other communication devices are supplied with power, the presence or absence of information indicating the lighting state of headlights of other mobile units, and the like.
- step S05 the control unit 301 performs transmission of mobile body information of the host vehicle in a special control state (details will be described later).
- step S06 the control unit 301 performs normal control state (details of transmission of mobile body information of the host vehicle). (That is, it is determined whether transmission of moving body information of the vehicle is performed in a normal control state or a special control state).
- the transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle in the normal control state is generally the same as the moving body information of the vehicle transmitted from the in-vehicle device mounted on the vehicle to another communication device in the ITS communication.
- Information is transmitted via the communication unit 308.
- the mobile body information includes various information related to the vehicle (own vehicle), and what information is transmitted as the mobile body information in the normal control state is set in advance.
- information indicating the movement type of the own vehicle information indicating the ID of the own vehicle (terminal ID of the navigation device 300), information indicating the current position of the own vehicle, information indicating the traveling direction of the own vehicle, Examples include information indicating the moving speed of the own vehicle, information indicating the lighting state of the headlight, information indicating the operating state of the wiper, and the like.
- transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle in the special control state is control different from the normal control state, for example, control for changing information on the own vehicle transmitted as moving body information of the own vehicle, The control which changes the transmission cycle of this mobile body information, the control which stops transmission of the mobile body information of the own vehicle, the control which combines these, etc. can be considered.
- the information about the own vehicle described above (movement type, terminal ID, current position, traveling direction) , Movement speed, headlight lighting state, wiper operating state) is transmitted as the moving body information of the own vehicle, but in the special control state, only the information indicating the moving type of the own vehicle and the information indicating the current position of the own vehicle Is transmitted as moving body information of the own vehicle. That is, in the special control state, there is less information regarding the own vehicle transmitted as the moving body information of the own vehicle than in the normal control state.
- the moving body information of the own vehicle is transmitted every 100 ms in the normal control state, and the moving body information of the own vehicle is changed every 200 ms in the special control state.
- Information shall be transmitted.
- the transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle is stopped, the moving body information of the own vehicle is transmitted in the normal control state, and the moving body information of the own vehicle is not transmitted in the special control state. .
- transmission of own vehicle information in a special control state does not impose a burden on the communication line compared to “performs transmission of own vehicle information in a normal control state” ( Reducing information to be transmitted and / or reducing the number of times of transmission (not transmitting).
- the control unit 301 is in the special control state when another mobile body having the same movement type as the own vehicle exists within the predetermined range. Based on the number of other moving bodies present (the number of other moving bodies having the same movement type as that of the own vehicle may be used, or the number of other moving bodies regardless of the moving body type). The contents of the special control state may be changed. In other words, if the number of other mobile objects present in the vicinity of the own vehicle is small, it is unlikely that the line will be congested. Since there is a high possibility that this will occur, the content of the special control state is changed based on the number of other moving objects present around the host vehicle.
- the transmission cycle of the moving body information of the own vehicle in the normal control state is 100 ms
- the transmission cycle is set to 200 ms when one other moving body (one person, one person) exists around the own vehicle.
- the transmission cycle is set to 300 ms when two other mobile objects exist around the own vehicle, and the transmission is stopped when three other mobile objects exist around the own vehicle.
- the movement type of the own vehicle and the movement type of another moving body are the same, but it is not necessary to determine whether or not the movement type is the same.
- FIG. 17 is a second flowchart showing the flow of processing executed by the control unit 301 of the navigation device 300 of the present invention. Note that steps S11 to S14 and steps S16 to S17 of the present embodiment are the same as steps S01 to S04 and steps S05 to S06 of the second embodiment, respectively, and thus description thereof is omitted.
- step S15 the control unit 301 determines whether or not the traveling direction of the host vehicle is the same as the traveling direction of another moving body.
- the other moving body is another moving body (that is, another vehicle) determined to be the same as the moving type of the own vehicle in step S14, and is the same as the moving type of the own vehicle.
- the determination is performed for each of the other moving bodies (other vehicles).
- the traveling direction of the host vehicle is the traveling direction of the host vehicle detected by the current position detection unit 304
- the traveling direction of the other moving body is the traveling direction of another moving body (other vehicle) received by the communication unit 308.
- the communication unit 308 receives the information indicating the current position (latitude, longitude) of the own vehicle detected by the current position detection unit 304 and the traveling direction of the own vehicle and other moving objects. You may specify based on the information which shows the present position (latitude, longitude) of the other mobile body (other vehicle) to perform, and map information. That is, by identifying the lane in which the vehicle and other moving bodies (other vehicles) are traveling from the current positions of the own vehicle and other moving bodies (other vehicles), the traveling direction in the lane is identified. (The lane and the traveling direction in the lane are associated with each other).
- step S15 If the traveling direction of the own vehicle and the traveling direction of the other moving body (other vehicle) are the same (Y in step S15), the process proceeds to step S16, and the traveling direction of the own vehicle and the other moving body (other vehicle) If the traveling directions are not the same (N in step S15), the process proceeds to step S17. That is, if the traveling direction of the host vehicle and the traveling direction of another moving body (other vehicle) are not the same, the two may be in an oncoming vehicle relationship (that is, a vehicle traveling in an opposite lane). Transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle is performed in the normal control state for driving support.
- step S17 When there are a plurality of other moving bodies (other vehicles) that are determined to be the same as the movement type of the own vehicle, all of the other moving bodies (other vehicles) are traveling directions of the own vehicle. The process proceeds to step S17 only when it is not the same.
- the same effects as those of the second embodiment are obtained.
- transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle is performed in a normal control state, so that safe driving such as avoiding a collision accident between oncoming vehicles is performed.
- Support congestion judgment and traffic accident judgment
- the other mobile body in step 15 is another mobile body (namely, other vehicle) determined to be the same as the movement type of the own vehicle in step S14, In step 13, it may be another moving body (that is, another vehicle) determined that the current position of the other moving body is within a predetermined range from the current position of the own vehicle.
- FIG. 18 is a third flowchart showing the flow of processing executed by the control unit 301 of the navigation device 300 of the present invention. Note that Steps S21 to S25 and Steps S27 to S28 of the present embodiment are the same as Steps S11 to S15 and Steps S16 to S17 of the third embodiment, respectively, and thus description thereof is omitted.
- step S ⁇ b> 26 the control unit 301 determines that the current position of the other mobile body (other vehicle) is ahead of the current position of the host vehicle in the forward direction of the host vehicle (step S ⁇ b> 25 and the other mobile body (other Since the traveling direction of the other vehicle (the other vehicle) is determined to be the same, it may be determined whether the traveling direction is ahead of the other moving body (other vehicle)).
- the other moving body (other vehicle) is a forward vehicle (whether the current position of the other moving body (other vehicle) is ahead of the current position of the own vehicle or not) A)
- the lane in which the host vehicle and other moving bodies (other vehicles) are traveling and the traveling direction in the lane are identified, and By comparing the current position with the current position of another moving body (other vehicle), it can be determined whether or not the other moving body (other vehicle) is a forward vehicle. Further, the other vehicle (other vehicle) based on the current position of the own vehicle, the current position of the other vehicle (other vehicle) and the traveling direction of the vehicle of the own vehicle or other vehicle (other vehicle).
- the vehicle is a forward vehicle, that is, since the direction from the traveling direction is known, the current position of the host vehicle and other moving bodies (other By comparing the current position of the vehicle), it can be determined whether or not the other moving body (other vehicle) is a forward vehicle.
- step S26 If the current position of the other moving body (other vehicle) is ahead of the current position of the own vehicle (Y in step S26), the process proceeds to step S27, and the other moving body (other vehicle) If the current position is not ahead of the current position of the host vehicle (N in step S26), the process proceeds to step S28. That is, if the current position of another moving body (other vehicle) having the same traveling direction is not ahead of the traveling direction of the own vehicle from the current position of the own vehicle, the own vehicle is traveling at the head in the lane. Since there is a possibility that a traffic accident may occur between another vehicle (for example, a vehicle running on the opposite lane or a pedestrian crossing the road) with a different traveling direction and the own vehicle, Information transmission is performed in a normal control state.
- another vehicle for example, a vehicle running on the opposite lane or a pedestrian crossing the road
- the same effects as those of the second embodiment are obtained.
- the normal control is performed for transmitting the vehicle information of the vehicle. Since it is performed in a state, it does not interfere with safe driving support (congestion judgment or traffic accident judgment) such as avoiding collision accidents where encounters occur.
- step 24 is not necessarily performed. That is, it is determined whether or not the movement type of the own vehicle is the same as the movement type of another moving body, but it is not necessary to determine whether or not the movement type is the same.
- FIG. 19 is a fourth flowchart showing the flow of processing executed by the control unit 301 of the navigation device 300 of the present invention. Note that Steps S31 to S36 and Steps S38 to S39 of the present embodiment are the same as Steps S21 to S26 and Steps S27 to S28 of the fourth embodiment, respectively, and thus description thereof is omitted.
- step S37 the control unit 301 determines that the third moving body (the third moving body) determined to be behind the traveling direction of the own vehicle (the traveling direction of the other moving body (other vehicle)) from the current position of the own vehicle. It is determined whether or not a vehicle exists.
- a third moving body (third vehicle) that is determined to be behind the traveling direction of the own vehicle (the traveling direction of the other moving body (other vehicle)) from the current position of the own vehicle ( Y of step S37)
- the process proceeds to step S39, and the third moving body (the first moving body) determined to be behind the traveling direction of the own vehicle (the traveling direction of the other moving body (other vehicle)) from the current position of the own vehicle. If there is no vehicle (No. 3 vehicle) (N in step S37), the process proceeds to step S38.
- each determination is made for each moving body information of the other moving bodies. Accordingly, when it is determined in step S36 based on the moving body information of one other moving body, it is determined that the one other moving body is a front vehicle (the own vehicle is a rear vehicle) ( Even in step S36), as a result of determination based on the moving body information of another other moving body (third moving body), the other moving body (third moving body) is rearward.
- the vehicle When it is determined that the vehicle is a vehicle (the vehicle is a front vehicle), the vehicle is sandwiched between two vehicles, and another moving body (third Since there is a possibility that a ball hitting accident may occur when the moving body) collides with the own vehicle, in such a case, transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle is performed in the normal control state.
- the transmission of the mobile body information of the own vehicle may be performed in a special control state.
- the transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle may be performed in the normal control state. Good.
- step 34 is not necessarily performed. That is, it is determined whether or not the movement type of the host vehicle is the same as the movement type of another moving body (including the third moving body), but it is not determined whether or not the movement type is the same. May be.
- FIG. 20 is a fifth flowchart showing the flow of processing executed by the control unit 301 of the navigation device 300 of the present invention.
- the moving body information of another moving body transmitted from a roadside device or a communication device indicates an observation area. It is an embodiment in the case of comprising information and information indicating the movement type of other mobile objects existing in the observation area (in the observation area) and the number of each movement type (in the following description, the roadside unit is another type of movement) The case of transmitting the moving body information of the body will be described).
- the roadside device is installed near an intersection, for example, and transmits moving body information (information indicating an observation area, etc.) of another moving body based on the output of a sensor installed near the intersection.
- the senor installed in the vicinity of the intersection can distinguish at least the presence or absence of other moving bodies in the observation area, and various conventionally known sensors can be used.
- it may be a camera, a weight sensor embedded in a road, a receiver for receiving moving body information transmitted from a communication device (such as the navigation device 300), or a sensor used for a sensing signal device.
- the sensor is a sensor (for example, a camera that determines the type of movement and the number of movements by recognizing a captured image) that can know the type of movement of the other moving objects in the observation area and the number of each movement type.
- the movement types of other mobile bodies in the observation area and the number of each movement type will be described as an example.
- the navigation apparatus 300 (communication part 308) receives the moving body information of the other moving body transmitted from the roadside device, the received moving body information of the other moving body (the received other moving body includes If the vehicle is in one of the observation areas included (the vehicle may also be included) (the current position of the vehicle is within the observation area), one or more other movements in the observation area If the body exists, the necessity of transmitting the moving body information of the own vehicle is reduced.
- the presence of the vehicle is detected (observation area, movement type, etc.) by sensors installed near the intersection, and the presence of the vehicle (the vehicle is in a certain observation area) is transmitted to the surroundings by the roadside device. (Or even if the presence of the vehicle is not detected by the sensor, the presence of a moving body in the observation area including the current position of the vehicle is transmitted to the surroundings), so the communication unit 308 It is determined that transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle to be performed through the special control state.
- step S41 the control unit 301 detects the current position of the host vehicle detected by the current position detection unit 304 and the current position detection unit 304 (the navigation device 300 detects the traveling direction).
- the traveling direction detection unit may be used to acquire information related to the own vehicle such as the traveling direction of the own vehicle detected by the traveling direction detection unit and the moving speed of the own vehicle detected by the speed detection unit 305.
- the control unit 301 acquires the moving body information of one or more other moving bodies (other vehicles, pedestrians, etc.) received by the communication unit 308.
- the mobile body information of one or more other mobile bodies is a roadside device (for example, an in-vehicle communication device or the like provided in another vehicle that has received the information from the roadside device).
- the number of movement types “vehicles” and the number of movement types “pedestrians” exist in a certain observation area. That is, the “observation area” is “the current position of another mobile object existing on the observation area”, and the “information indicating the observation area” is “another mobile object existing on the observation area”. Is information indicating the current position of ".
- the moving body information of one or more other moving bodies received from the roadside machine includes the moving body information of the own vehicle, but the information received from the roadside machine includes the vehicle. If the information indicating the ID of the vehicle is not included, the control unit 301 cannot determine whether the moving body information of the own vehicle is included. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the subsequent determination is performed on the assumption that all the information received from the roadside device is moving body information of other moving bodies.
- the process does not proceed to the subsequent steps.
- the observation area is an individual area that is a unit when the roadside device observes the movement type of the other mobile object and the number of each movement type.
- the movement types of other moving objects existing in the observation area are specified, and the number of each movement type is measured.
- the observation area is specified by two nodes (road start / end nodes, sidewalk end / start nodes, crosswalk start / end nodes, etc.) and area width (road width, sidewalk width, crosswalk width, etc.) As shown in FIG.
- a vehicle standby area (area (A) to area (D)), a pedestrian standby area (area (E) to area) that is considered to be densely populated with moving objects such as vehicles and pedestrians.
- a pedestrian crossing area (area (I) to area (L)) is set as an observation area.
- step S43 the control unit 301 specifies the observation area to which the current position of the own vehicle belongs (the observation area where the current position of the own vehicle is in the observation area) based on the information indicating the observation area and the current position of the own vehicle. That is, as shown in FIG. 21, when there are a plurality of observation areas at the intersection, it is specified that the vehicle is in the observation area (A).
- step S44 the control unit 301 determines whether one or more other moving objects exist on the observation area (observation area (A)) to which the vehicle belongs.
- observation area (A) observation area
- the process proceeds to step S45.
- one or more other moving bodies do not exist in the observation area to which the vehicle belongs (N in step S44)
- the process proceeds to step S47, and transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle is performed in the normal control state.
- step S45 the control unit 301 determines whether or not the movement type of another moving body existing on the observation area to which the own vehicle belongs is the same as the movement type of the own vehicle (that is, whether the vehicle is a vehicle).
- step S45 If the movement type of the other moving body existing on the observation area to which the own vehicle belongs is the same as the moving type of the own vehicle (Y in step S45), the process proceeds to step S46 and special control is performed for transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle. If the movement type of the other moving body existing on the observation area to which the vehicle belongs is not the same as the movement type of the own vehicle (N in step S45), the roadside device does not transmit information about the own vehicle. Therefore, it progresses to step S47 and it performs in the normal control state about transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle.
- the special control state and the normal control state may be the same as the special control state and the normal control state in the second embodiment.
- in-vehicle communication devices such as navigation devices such as intersections and mobile communication terminals such as mobile phones are crowded and transmission of mobile body information of the vehicle is performed in a special control state in a place where the line is thought to be congested.
- Line congestion in ITS communication can be prevented without obstructing safe driving support (congestion judgment or traffic accident judgment).
- the mobile body information of other mobile bodies transmitted by the roadside device includes information indicating the observation area (information indicating the current position). Even without transmitting the information shown (information indicating the areas (A) to (L) in FIG. 21), the information indicating the observation area in which another mobile object exists on the observation area (only the vehicle in FIG. 21 exists). In this case, only the information indicating the area (A) may be transmitted.
- step S44 if the current position of the vehicle belongs to the observation area (if it is within the received observation area), since there is one or more moving bodies in the observation area, the determination in step S44 is unnecessary.
- step S47 when the current position of the own vehicle does not belong to the observation area (if it is outside the received observation area), it is preferable to proceed to step S47 and perform transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle in the normal control state.
- step 45 is not necessarily performed. That is, the movement type of the own vehicle is the same as any one of the movement types in which the number of the received movement types (the number of movement types associated with the observation area to which the current position of the own vehicle belongs) is 1 or more. It is not necessary to determine whether or not the movement types are the same.
- step S03 the movement type of the own vehicle and other moving bodies are determined.
- step S04 it is determined whether or not the current position of another moving body having the same movement type as the own vehicle is within a predetermined range from the current position of the own vehicle. You may do.
- pedestrians and the like include two-wheeled vehicles such as bicycles, but two-wheeled vehicles may be used as another type of movement. Further, in a motorcycle, a motorcycle (bike) and a bicycle may be handled as different types of movement.
- the navigation device 300 includes the current position detection unit 304 and the display unit 302 that detect the current position.
- the current position may be acquired by performing wireless or wired communication with a communication device including a current position detection unit 304 mounted on a vehicle on which the navigation device 300 is mounted.
- an image may be displayed on the display unit 302 by giving a display instruction via a wireless or wired communication with a communication device including the display unit 302.
- the communication unit 308 performs wireless communication (transmission / reception of mobile body information) with other communication devices (vehicle communication devices) provided in other mobile bodies (other vehicles) is described.
- the third communication device receives the moving body information of the other vehicle from the other communication device, and the communication unit 308 transmits the moving body information of the other vehicle from the third communication device via wireless or wired communication. May be received.
- the mobile unit information of the own vehicle is transmitted from the communication unit 308 to the third communication device via wireless or wired communication, and the mobile unit information of the own vehicle is transmitted from the third communication device to another communication device. May be sent.
- the control unit 301 determines whether to transmit the moving body information of the own vehicle in the normal control state or the special control state.
- the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the mobile body information of other mobile bodies received (mobile body information other than the mobile body information of the own vehicle) is transmitted to the surroundings, It is preferable to determine whether to perform in the normal control state or the special control state based on the current position of the transmission source) and the current position of the host vehicle.
- the third problem of the present invention will be described below.
- the detection accuracy of the current position of the vehicle or the current position of the pedestrian is assumed to temporarily decrease due to external factors (such as multipath in a building street), so even though the vehicle is not actually getting off. After getting off, it was decided that it was getting on and got off, so that when the accuracy of detection of the current position of the vehicle or the current position of the pedestrian becomes high, the boarding decision is made again. It can be considered that the determination is frequently performed.
- the seventh to tenth embodiments of the present invention perform other control by performing control for performing transmission of mobile object information in a special control state when performing short-range wireless communication. It is an object of the present invention to provide a mobile communication device and a communication control method that prevent hindering safe driving support of the communication device.
- embodiments of the present invention will be described.
- the mobile communication terminal and the in-vehicle communication device need to be close to each other. If the mobile communication terminal and the in-vehicle communication device are close to each other (and if pairing registration (described later) is performed), the mobile communication terminal is held in the vehicle in which the in-vehicle communication device is mounted. It can be determined that a pedestrian is on board.
- control for performing transmission of mobile body information by the in-vehicle communication device or the mobile communication terminal in a special control state is performed.
- Bluetooth which is an example of short-range wireless communication, has a hands-free function and a vehicle-mounted communication device such as a navigation device (which is a device compatible with Bluetooth communication) and a hands-free function (Bluetooth communication).
- a navigation device which is a device compatible with Bluetooth communication
- a hands-free function Bluetooth communication
- a description will be given using a mobile communication terminal such as a mobile phone (which is a compatible device).
- Bluetooth is mainly used to use functions such as hands-free calling.
- the side that calls a compatible Bluetooth communication compatible device with an address response request packet is called the master, and the side that is connected by responding to the address response request packet (in standby mode) is the slave. Call it. Then, when the slave side answers the response, it is in a connected state (communication is possible).
- the network formed between the master and the slave is called a piconet, and in this embodiment, the in-vehicle communication device is described as the master and the mobile communication terminal is the slave, but the mobile communication terminal is the master. Good.
- the identification information for example, Bluetooth device address (BD_ADDR)
- BD_ADDR Bluetooth device address
- a navigation device as an in-vehicle communication device which is an example of the mobile communication device of the present invention and an example of the mobile communication device in order to embody the technical idea of the present invention.
- a mobile phone is shown as a mobile communication terminal, and the present invention is not intended to be specific to this navigation device and mobile phone, and is equally applicable to the devices of other embodiments within the scope of the claims. It is possible. For example, a device that does not have a navigation function may be used.
- a navigation apparatus is attached to the motor vehicle which is an example of a mobile body is illustrated in the following description, a motorcycle etc. may be provided with the navigation apparatus.
- FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the navigation device 500 of the present invention.
- the navigation device 500 includes a control unit 501, a display unit 502, an operation unit 503, a current position detection unit 504, a speed detection unit 505, a map information storage unit 506, a battery 507, a first communication unit 508, A second communication unit 509 is provided.
- the control unit 501 is a control unit that comprehensively controls the entire navigation device 500.
- the control unit 501 includes a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM (all not shown).
- the ROM stores a program executed by the control unit 501 and parameters and data necessary for executing the program.
- the CPU executes various programs stored in the ROM.
- the RAM temporarily stores data obtained during various processes and data obtained as a result of various processes. These CPU, RAM, ROM and the like are connected via a bus. Note that the CPU, ROM, and RAM may be partially or fully integrated on one chip.
- the control unit 501 can realize a predetermined function corresponding to a profile by having a common profile when there is another communication device that performs Bluetooth connection with the navigation device 500.
- the navigation device 500 and the responded device (described later) have a common profile. That is, since the navigation device 500 and the responded device have a common profile, the control unit 501 can instruct the control unit of another communication device using Bluetooth communication to execute various functions of the other communication device. .
- the display unit 502 indicates the current position of the map screen (the route to the destination, the vehicle on which the navigation device 500 is mounted (hereinafter, “the vehicle on which the navigation device 500 is mounted” may be referred to as “the own vehicle”)).
- the operation unit 503 is an input operation means for the user to input a destination or operate a menu.
- various keys and buttons may be provided on the navigation device body, or a touch panel function may be added to the display unit 502.
- a remote controller for remotely operating the navigation device 500 main body as the operation unit 503 may be used as the operation unit 503.
- the current position detection unit 504 detects the current position of the host vehicle, and includes a GPS receiver, self-contained navigation means, a position calculation CPU, and the like.
- the self-contained navigation means includes a steering angle sensor, an acceleration sensor, a distance sensor, a direction sensor, and the like, detects the travel distance and the traveling direction of the own vehicle, and obtains the current position based on these values.
- the GPS receiver receives radio waves transmitted from a plurality of GPS satellites with a GPS antenna and performs a three-dimensional positioning process or a two-dimensional positioning process to calculate the absolute position and traveling direction of the own vehicle.
- the traveling direction is calculated based on the current vehicle position and the previous vehicle position.
- the detection method of the advancing direction is not specifically limited, For example, you may detect using a direction sensor, and it is good also as detecting from the rotation direction of a tire, if it is a vehicle. Further, a traveling direction detection unit may be provided separately from the current position detection unit 504 to detect the traveling direction of the host vehicle.
- Speed detector 505 detects the moving speed of the vehicle.
- the moving speed may be calculated from the output of the speed sensor or acceleration sensor, or may be calculated from the difference between the moving distance between GPS histories and the GPS reception time.
- the current position detection unit 504 may detect the moving speed of the own vehicle. If the current position detection unit 504 can detect the moving speed in addition to the current position of the host vehicle, the speed detection unit 505 can be omitted. In this case, the current position detection unit 504 includes a speed detection unit 505.
- the navigation device 500 may include the steering angle sensor, the acceleration sensor, the speed sensor, the azimuth sensor, and the vehicle (own vehicle) includes the various sensors.
- the navigation device 500 includes the various sensors. It is good also as a structure provided with the interface which acquires these outputs.
- the map information storage unit 506 stores map information that is referred to when performing route search or guidance to a destination, or that a specific point on the map information is a user's home position, company position, or the like. Has been.
- the map information includes network data (node data, link data).
- a NAND flash, an SD memory card, or the like can be suitably used.
- the map information storage unit 506 may be built in the navigation device 500, or may be configured to be detachable from the navigation device 500.
- the map information may include a map image, or a map image may be drawn on the display unit 502 based on network data (node data, link data) included in the map information.
- a second communication unit 509 described later receives map information from a roadside machine or the like, and the received map information is stored in the map information storage unit 506. May be.
- the map information includes network data
- the network data is composed of node data whose nodes are nodes such as roads at their inflection points and branch points, and link data whose links are links between the nodes. Is done.
- the node data includes node attributes such as node number, node position coordinates (latitude / longitude), road type, information indicating intersection information, intersection name, and the like, and the number of connection links and connection link number data. .
- link data includes the node numbers that are the start and end points of the link, the road type (general road, expressway), link cost including distance and / or required time, information indicating the width of the road, and the national road ⁇ Road name and travel direction data.
- link data includes data such as bridges, tunnels, railroad crossings, and tollgates as link attributes.
- the network data includes road node data and link data.
- the control unit 501 determines the map based on the current position of the host vehicle (which may include a traveling direction or a moving speed) detected by the current position detection unit 504 and map information. It can be specified by performing matching processing.
- the map matching process may be performed by the control unit 501 or may be performed by the current position detection unit 504. That is, based on the current position detected using a GPS receiver and / or autonomous navigation means and map information, map matching processing is performed, and the current position where map matching processing has been performed is output to the control unit 501 as the current position. Also good.
- the current position detection unit 504 including the map matching process of the control unit 501 may be used.
- the battery 507 is a power supply means when the navigation device 500 is used in a portable manner, and a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery or a nickel metal hydride battery can be suitably used.
- a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery or a nickel metal hydride battery can be suitably used.
- a primary battery such as an alkaline manganese battery or a manganese battery may be used, or a fuel cell may be used.
- the first communication unit 508 includes a transmission unit (not shown) that transmits information to another communication device (hereinafter, referred to as “another communication device”) that can communicate with the navigation device 500 by short-range wireless communication.
- a receiving unit (not shown) that receives information transmitted from the communication device.
- Bluetooth has been described below as an example of short-range wireless communication, it is not limited to this, and infrared communication or the like may be used.
- a Bluetooth connection when a Bluetooth connection is established between the navigation device 500 and a mobile phone, a call on the mobile phone can be performed hands-free by using a microphone, a speaker, etc. that are mounted on the vehicle and connected to the navigation device 500.
- a Bluetooth communication-compatible device registered in advance and a mobile communication terminal for example, a mobile phone
- a mobile communication terminal for example, a mobile phone
- the second communication unit 509 can communicate with the navigation device 500 by a wireless communication method (for example, communication by ITS) having a wider wireless communication range than the short-range wireless communication.
- a wireless communication method for example, communication by ITS
- a transmission unit (not shown) that transmits information to other communication devices hereinafter referred to as “other communication devices”
- other communication devices hereinafter referred to as “other communication devices”
- ITS is described as an example of the wide-range wireless communication method, but is not limited thereto, and WiMAX (registered trademark) or the like may be used.
- Examples of other communication devices in ITS include in-vehicle communication devices such as navigation devices mounted on other vehicles, roadside devices, and mobile communication terminals such as mobile phones possessed by pedestrians.
- the information received from the in-vehicle communication device such as a navigation device mounted on another vehicle by the second communication unit 509 includes the moving body information of the other vehicle, and the information received from the mobile communication terminal possessed by the pedestrian. Includes the pedestrian moving body information.
- the pedestrian moving body information received by the second communication unit 509 will be described.
- the pedestrian's moving body information includes the current position, traveling direction, and moving speed of the pedestrian who possesses the mobile communication terminal (hereinafter, “pedestrian who possesses the mobile communication terminal” may be referred to as “pedestrian”). Is included.
- the current position of the pedestrian may be the current position after the map matching process or the current position before the map matching process (current position measured by a GPS receiver or the like). If the current position is before the map matching process, the control unit 501 (current position detection unit 504) may perform the map matching process.
- the second communication unit 509 receives the moving body information of another vehicle from the in-vehicle communication device and receives the moving body information of the pedestrian from the mobile communication terminal. May be received from an in-vehicle communication device such as a navigation device mounted on another vehicle, a roadside device, or the like in addition to a mobile communication terminal such as a mobile phone. The same applies to the moving body information of other vehicles.
- the mobile body information of the vehicle (currently, regularly or irregularly via the second communication unit 509 included in the navigation device 500) Position, direction of travel, speed of movement, etc.).
- FIG. 27 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the mobile phone 700 of the present invention.
- the mobile phone 700 includes a control unit 701, a display unit 702, an operation unit 703, a current position detection unit 704, a speed detection unit 705, a map information storage unit 706, a battery 707, a first communication unit 708, A second communication unit 709 is provided. Since the control unit 701 to the battery 707 are common to the configuration of the navigation device 500 described above, description thereof is omitted. When the configuration of the navigation device 500 described above is applied to the configuration of the mobile phone 700, “navigation device” is changed to “mobile phone” and “own vehicle” is changed to “pedestrian” in the above description. And so on.
- the current position detection unit 704 of the mobile phone 700 may not include the self-contained navigation means, and the mobile phone 700 may not include the map information storage unit 706.
- the first communication unit 708 includes a transmission unit (not shown) that transmits information to another communication device that can communicate with the mobile phone 700 by short-range wireless communication (hereinafter referred to as “another communication device”).
- a receiving unit (not shown) that receives information transmitted from the communication device Examples of other communication devices in Bluetooth include Bluetooth communication-compatible devices registered in advance, and examples include in-vehicle communication devices such as a navigation device mounted on a vehicle.
- the second communication unit 709 can communicate with the mobile phone 700 by a wireless communication method (for example, communication by ITS) having a wider wireless communication range than the short-range wireless communication.
- another communication device a communication device that transmits information to another communication device
- a reception unit not shown
- Examples of other communication devices in ITS include in-vehicle communication devices such as navigation devices mounted on vehicles, roadside devices, and mobile communication terminals such as mobile phones possessed by other pedestrians.
- the information received from the in-vehicle communication device such as a navigation device mounted on the vehicle by the second communication unit 709 includes vehicle moving body information, and the information received from the mobile communication terminal possessed by another pedestrian The pedestrian's moving body information is included.
- the vehicle moving body information received by the second communication unit 709 will be described.
- vehicle moving body information the current position of a vehicle equipped with an in-vehicle communication device such as a navigation device (hereinafter, “a vehicle equipped with an in-vehicle communication device such as a navigation device” may be referred to as “vehicle”).
- vehicle a vehicle equipped with an in-vehicle communication device such as a navigation device
- Information indicating the traveling direction, moving speed, and the like are included.
- the current position of the vehicle may be the current position after the map matching process or the current position before the map matching process (current position measured by a GPS receiver or the like). If the current position is before the map matching process, the control unit 701 (current position detection unit 704) may perform the map matching process.
- the second communication unit 709 receives vehicle moving body information from the in-vehicle communication device and receives moving body information of other pedestrians from the mobile communication terminal.
- Body information may be received from an in-vehicle communication device such as a navigation device mounted on a vehicle, a roadside device, or the like in addition to a mobile communication terminal such as a mobile phone. The same applies to the moving body information of the vehicle.
- the mobile body information of the self is transmitted regularly or irregularly via the second communication unit 709. .
- FIG. 23 is a first flowchart showing a flow of processing executed by the control unit 501 of the navigation apparatus 500 of the present invention.
- step S01 the control unit 501 responds to a Bluetooth-compatible device registered in advance (hereinafter, “a Bluetooth-compatible device previously registered as a pair” is referred to as “paired registered device” in this embodiment). It is determined whether it is time to start the request. For example, it is determined that it is time to start a response request when the door of the host vehicle is opened or when the engine is started.
- a Bluetooth-compatible device registered in advance hereinafter, “a Bluetooth-compatible device previously registered as a pair” is referred to as “paired registered device” in this embodiment. It is determined whether it is time to start the request. For example, it is determined that it is time to start a response request when the door of the host vehicle is opened or when the engine is started.
- step S02 the control unit 501 transmits the registered address response request packet via the first communication unit 508 to all mobile phones existing around the vehicle (communication area) in the form of radio waves.
- the response request may be automatically issued when it is determined in step S01 that it is the timing to start the response request, or the user who knows that it is the timing to start the response request operates the operation unit 503. It is good also to do by. Note that the response request may be made constantly (regularly) regardless of the timing, and in this case, step S01 may be omitted and the response request may be started from this step.
- step S03 the control unit 501 determines whether or not a response packet for the address response request packet in step S02 has been received from the pairing registered device.
- a response packet is received from the pairing registered device (Y in step S03)
- the process proceeds to step S04.
- a response packet is not received from the pairing registered device (N in step S03)
- the process returns to step S01.
- a communicable state a state where connection is established
- a data number is added to the address response request packet transmitted in step S02 and the response packet received in step S03 (in the case of Y in step S03). If the address response request packet and the response packet correspond to each other (if the received response packet is a response to the transmitted response request packet), the same data number is added, so the data number is referred to. Thus, it is possible to specify which address response request packet corresponds to the response packet received in step S03. Therefore, when a received packet is received in this embodiment (Y in step S03), it means that a received packet with the same data number as the data number added to the address response request packet transmitted in step S02 is received. Shall mean. Also, if the source Bluetooth address added to the received response packet is the same as the Bluetooth address of the registered pairing registered device, the response packet is received from the paired registered device (step S03). Y).
- step S04 the control unit 501 determines whether the paired registered device that has responded (hereinafter, “the paired registered device that has responded” is referred to as “responded device”) has an ITS communication function. To do. Whether or not the responded device has the ITS communication function may be specified from the model name of the responded device, or may be specified based on whether or not the device has a profile for performing ITS communication. Then, it is possible to specify whether or not each responded device has an ITS communication function by inquiring the response. When specifying from the model name, for example, as shown in FIG. 25, it is specified whether or not the responded device has the ITS communication function by referring to the model name and a list of whether each model has the ITS communication function. To do.
- the response from the responded device or the information of the responded device registered (stored) in the navigation device 500 includes the model name. Refer to the model name and the list in FIG. To specify whether the responded device has the ITS communication function.
- the responded device In the case where the responded device has an ITS communication function, the responded device will be described as transmitting mobile body information (for example, periodically). That is, in step S04, it is determined whether or not the responded device is a device that transmits mobile body information by ITS communication.
- step S04 When the responded device has the ITS communication function (Y in step S04), the process proceeds to step S05, and when the responded device does not have the ITS communication function (N in step S04), the process returns to step S01.
- step S05 the control unit 501 performs control for restricting ITS communication by the responded device.
- ITS communication by responded device means “transmission of mobile body information of responded device by ITS communication performed by responded device”, and control for limiting ITS communication by responded device.
- Is control for performing the ITS communication by the responded device in the special control state that is, the control unit 501 instructs the responded device to perform the ITS communication by the responded device in the special control state. .
- the instruction to change from the normal control state to the special control state is performed by the Bluetooth communication or by the ITS communication.
- the Bluetooth address of the responded device is added to the change instruction and transmitted, or the change instruction is issued to the control unit of the responded device using the profile.
- the Bluetooth address or ITS address of the responded device is added to the change instruction and transmitted.
- the responded device that matches the Bluetooth address or the ITS address changes the ITS communication from the normal control state to the special control state in accordance with the instruction.
- the ITS address may be input by the user by operating the operation unit 503, may be specified from the Bluetooth address, or may be acquired from the responded device by Bluetooth communication.
- the ITS address of the responded device is specified by referring to a list indicating the ITS address associated with the Bluetooth address.
- the ITS communication in the special control state means control different from the ITS communication in the normal control state
- the ITS communication in the normal control state refers to a device having an ITS communication function in ITS from another communication device.
- the pedestrian moving body information is transmitted.
- the pedestrian moving body information includes information about the pedestrian, and in the normal control state, for example, the pedestrian moving body information includes the pedestrian ID (terminal ID of the mobile communication terminal (mobile phone)).
- the transmission of the pedestrian moving body information is controlled differently from the normal control state.
- the pedestrian is transmitted as the pedestrian moving body information.
- Control for changing information control for changing the transmission range of pedestrian moving body information, control for stopping transmission of pedestrian moving body information, and the like can be considered.
- the information about the pedestrian described above (terminal ID, current position, traveling direction, moving speed) ) Is transmitted as pedestrian moving body information, but only information indicating the terminal ID is transmitted as pedestrian moving body information in the special control state. That is, in the special control state, there is less information regarding the pedestrian transmitted as the pedestrian moving body information than in the normal control state.
- the information which shows a movement type (it is a pedestrian) is contained in the mobile body information of a pedestrian, it is good also considering this movement type as boarding or a vehicle.
- the range for transmitting pedestrian moving body information is not limited in the normal control state, and is mounted on the vehicle in which the pedestrian is traveling in the special control state.
- the mobile body information of the pedestrian is transmitted to a narrow range that can be received by the in-vehicle communication device. (Transmission power is reduced in the special control state compared to the normal control state.)
- the pedestrian's mobile body information is transmitted in the normal control state. In the control state, pedestrian moving body information is not transmitted. Furthermore, it is possible to combine them into a special control state.
- the ITS communication of the other communication device is performed in a special control state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the third communication device (communication device other than the navigation device 500 and other communication devices) from providing safe driving support to the other communication devices. Further, the ITS communication in the normal control state and the ITS communication in the special control state are repeated due to external factors, thereby preventing the safe driving support performed by the third communication device.
- FIG. 24 is a second flowchart showing the flow of processing executed by the control unit 501 of the navigation apparatus 500 of the present invention.
- This embodiment shows a process of whether or not to return the ITS communication to the normal control state after setting the ITS communication of the responded device to the special control state in the seventh embodiment.
- step S11 the control unit 501 determines whether or not the Bluetooth connection with the responded device is maintained (whether or not disconnected).
- step S11 If the Bluetooth connection with the responded device is maintained (Y in step S11), the process returns to step S11, and if the Bluetooth connection with the responded device is not maintained (when the response from the responded device is interrupted) (step In step S11, the process proceeds to step S12, and instructs the paired registered device whose Bluetooth connection is disconnected to perform ITS communication in the normal control state.
- step S12 since the Bluetooth connection is disconnected, the control unit 501 cannot make an instruction using the Bluetooth communication or directly control the Bluetooth connection. Therefore, an instruction is given to change the control of the ITS communication using the ITS communication. That is, by transmitting a change instruction with a Bluetooth address or an ITS address added, a device that matches the address (paired registered device) changes from the special control state to the normal control state for ITS communication according to the instruction.
- the ITS communication of the other communication device is performed in the normal control state.
- the safe driving support by the third communication device is not hindered.
- FIG. 28 is a first flowchart showing a flow of processing executed by the control unit 701 of the mobile phone 700 of the present invention.
- step S21 the control unit 701 determines whether there is a response request from the pairing registered device. If there is a response request (Y in step S21), the process proceeds to step S22 to respond (transmits a response packet), and if there is no response request (N in step S22), the process returns to step S21.
- step S23 the control unit 701 determines whether the pairing registered device that has made the response request has an ITS communication function. Whether the pairing registered device that has made the response request has the ITS communication function may be specified from the model name of the pairing registered device that has made the response request, or a profile for performing ITS communication. It may be specified based on whether or not the device has an ITS communication function, or it may be specified by inquiring whether or not it has an ITS communication function with respect to a paired registered device that has made an individual response request. Good. When specifying from the model name, for example, as shown in FIG. 25, the paired registered device that has made a response request with reference to the model name and a list of whether each model has the ITS communication function is the ITS communication function. It is specified whether or not it has.
- step S23 When the pairing registered device that has made the response request has an ITS communication function (Y in step S23), the process proceeds to step S24, and when the pairing registered device that has made the response request does not have the ITS communication function (step N of S23) Return to step S21.
- step S24 the control unit 701 performs ITS communication by the second communication unit 709 in a special control state. That is, for example, when the paired registered device that has made a response request is a navigation device, and the navigation device has an ITS communication function, special ITS communication performed via the second communication unit 709 of the mobile phone 700 is performed.
- the control state for example, the mobile body information of the pedestrian holding the mobile phone 700 is not transmitted, and other communication devices provide safe driving support to the mobile phone 700 (the pedestrian moving with the vehicle). It is possible to prevent safe driving assistance (such as collision determination).
- the ITS communication performed via the second communication unit 709 of the mobile phone 700 is performed in the normal control state.
- the position of the vehicle on which the navigation device is mounted can be notified to the surroundings.
- the mobile phone 700 transmits information indicating that the mobile phone 700 is a vehicle or information indicating that the mobile phone 700 is a pedestrian riding in the vehicle, so that the communication device that has received the information from the mobile phone 700 can transmit information. It is desirable to prevent the mobile phone 700 from providing safe driving assistance as a pedestrian.
- the ITS communication of the mobile phone 700 is performed in a special control state.
- the third communication device (the communication device other than the mobile phone 700 and other communication devices) can be prevented from providing safe driving support to the mobile phone 700. Further, the ITS communication based on the communication control and the ITS communication based on the special control state are repeated due to external factors, thereby preventing the safe driving support performed by the third communication device.
- FIG. 29 is a second flowchart showing the flow of processing executed by the control unit 701 of the mobile phone 700 of the present invention.
- This embodiment shows a process for determining whether or not to return the ITS communication to the normal control state after setting the ITS communication of the mobile phone 700 to the special control state in the ninth embodiment.
- step S31 the control unit 701 determines whether or not the Bluetooth connection with the paired registered device that has made the response request is maintained (whether or not disconnected).
- step S31 If the Bluetooth connection with the pairing registered device that has made the response request is maintained (Y in step S31), the process returns to step S31, and the Bluetooth connection with the pairing registered device that has made the response request must be maintained. If (N in Step S31), the process proceeds to Step S32, and the ITS communication by the second communication unit 709 is performed in the normal control state.
- the mobile phone 700 when the connection by the short-range wireless method between the mobile phone 700 and another communication device having an ITS communication function is disconnected, the mobile phone 700 performs ITS communication in the normal control state.
- the safe driving support by the third communication device (communication device other than the mobile phone 700 and other communication devices) is not hindered.
- the in-vehicle communication device and the mobile communication terminal are performing short-range wireless communication
- the in-vehicle communication is performed so that wide-range wireless communication by the mobile communication terminal is performed in a special control state.
- the control unit 501 of the communication device instructs or the control unit 701 of the mobile communication terminal performs wide-range wireless communication in a special control state via the second communication unit 709. It may be performed in a controlled state.
- the control unit 701 of the mobile communication terminal instructs to perform wide-range wireless communication by the in-vehicle communication device in a special control state, or in-vehicle communication.
- the control unit 501 of the apparatus may perform wide-range wireless communication in the special control state via the second communication unit 509.
- the short-range wireless communication between the in-vehicle communication device and the mobile communication terminal is disconnected, and special control is performed for wide-range wireless communication by the in-vehicle communication device when the in-vehicle communication device and the mobile communication terminal perform short-range wireless communication If the short-range wireless communication between the in-vehicle communication device and the mobile communication terminal is disconnected, the wide-range wireless communication by the in-vehicle communication device is performed in the normal control state (returns to the normal control state). .
- the navigation apparatus 500 includes the current position detection unit 504 and the display unit 502 that detect the current position.
- the current position may be acquired by performing wireless or wired communication with a communication device including a current position detection unit 504 mounted on a vehicle on which the navigation device 500 is mounted.
- an image may be displayed on the display unit 502 by performing a display instruction via a wireless or wired communication with a communication device including the display unit 502 (the same applies to the mobile phone 700).
- the navigation apparatus 500 does not include the second communication unit 509.
- mobile body information is transmitted from the navigation apparatus 500 to the communication apparatus including the second communication unit 509 mounted on the host vehicle by wireless or wired communication.
- the mobile device information may be transmitted from the communication device including the second communication unit 509 by the wide range wireless communication method.
- the navigation apparatus 500 may receive the mobile body information received by the communication apparatus including the second communication unit 509 via wireless or wired communication.
- the navigation device 500 does not include the first communication unit 508, and, for example, a communication device including the first communication unit 508 mounted on the host vehicle and a mobile communication terminal make a short-range wireless communication connection (Bluetooth connection). If the communication device includes the first communication unit 508, information indicating that the Bluetooth connection is established is transmitted to the navigation device 500 by wireless or wired communication, and the navigation device 500 (the control unit 501), based on the information, It may be determined whether the first communication unit 508 and the mobile communication terminal are performing near field communication.
- a short-range wireless communication connection Bluetooth connection
- the information transmitted from the communication device including the first communication unit 508 preferably includes information that can specify whether or not the mobile communication terminal connected via Bluetooth has an ITS communication function.
- control is performed for wide-range wireless communication (for example, ITS communication) of the mobile communication terminal from the navigation device 500 via the communication device including the first communication unit 508.
- the “mobile communication device provided in the vehicle” is not limited to a device fixed to the vehicle, and may be a device that can be removed from the vehicle (for example, a portable navigation device). In this case, for example, when a power supply (12 V) is received from a vehicle battery or the like, it can be determined that the vehicle is equipped. Various known methods can be used to determine whether the vehicle is equipped.
- the in-vehicle communication device (navigation device) and the mobile communication terminal (mobile phone) perform short-range wireless communication
- the in-vehicle communication device or the mobile communication terminals also perform short-range wireless communication. It is preferable to control the transmission of any one of the mobile body information so as to be performed in a special control state (for example, stop transmission).
- the communication line (ITS communication) is not compressed (communication collision or the like is reduced). . That is, the communication line (ITS communication) is stabilized, and the safe driving support performed by the third communication device is not hindered.
- the third communication device (a communication device that is not a device that performs short-range wireless communication) can identify the current position of one of the third communication devices. It can be determined that there is a person (communication device) near the position.
- the present invention relates to a communication technique, and can be used for a communication apparatus, a transmission control method, and a communication control method for transmitting information including predetermined information to another communication apparatus.
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Atmospheric Sciences (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
- Traffic Control Systems (AREA)
Abstract
A first wireless communication unit (80) makes a notification about a packet signal using first wireless communication. A second wireless communication unit (82) communicates prescribed information using second wireless communication that has a narrower communicable area than that of the first wireless communication. A control unit (84) controls the operations of the first wireless communication unit (80) and the second wireless communication unit (82). The control unit (84) stops the operation of the first wireless communication unit (80) during a period starting from when communication by the second wireless communication unit (82) ends until a prescribed period elapses. Further, the moving-body communication device is equipped with: a communication unit that receives information including information indicating the current locations of other moving bodies; and a control unit that obtains the current location of the moving body detected by a current-location detection unit, and determines, on the basis of the current location of the moving body and the current locations of the other moving bodies received by the communication unit, whether to execute transmission of moving-body information to be executed via the communication unit in normal control state or in special control state. Further, the moving-body communication device is provided with a control unit that conducts, when a first communication unit and another communication device are conducting a short-distance wireless communication, control for executing the transmission of the moving-body information via a second communication unit, or via the other communication device, in special control state.
Description
本発明は、通信技術に関し、所定の情報が含まれる情報を他の通信装置に送信する移動体通信装置、端末装置、基地局装置(以下、「移動体通信装置」・「端末装置」・「基地局装置」のいずれか一つについて「通信装置」ということがあり、また、三つを総称して「通信装置」ということがある。)及び送信制御方法、通信制御方法に関する。
The present invention relates to a communication technology, and relates to a mobile communication device, a terminal device, and a base station device (hereinafter referred to as “mobile communication device”, “terminal device”, “ Any one of the “base station devices” may be referred to as “communication device”, and the three may be collectively referred to as “communication device”.), A transmission control method, and a communication control method.
情報通信技術を用いて人と道路と車両とを情報でネットワークすることにより、交通事故や渋滞などといった道路交通問題の解決を目的とした高度道路通信システム(Intelligent Transport Systems、以下「ITS」という。)が研究、開発されている。ITSの中でも特に安全運転支援システムを扱う分野における自動車向け無線通信の形態は路車間通信と車車(歩車)間通信とに大別できる。路車間通信は路側機と車両が情報を通信するのに対し、車車(歩車)間通信は車両と車両(或いは歩行者)が直接情報の通信を行う。
Intelligent traffic communication systems (Intelligent Transport Systems, hereinafter referred to as “ITS”) for the purpose of solving road traffic problems such as traffic accidents and traffic jams by networking people, roads and vehicles with information using information communication technology. ) Has been researched and developed. The form of wireless communication for automobiles in the field dealing with the safe driving support system in ITS can be broadly divided into road-to-vehicle communication and vehicle-to-vehicle (walking) communication. In the road-to-vehicle communication, the roadside machine and the vehicle communicate information, whereas in the vehicle-to-vehicle (walk) communication, the vehicle and the vehicle (or pedestrian) directly communicate information.
路車間通信により路側機から車両に発信される情報には交差点情報、信号機情報、観測エリアに存在する移動体の移動種別及び移動種別毎の数を示す情報(詳細は後述)が含まれる。交差点情報としては交差点を識別するための識別情報、信号機情報としては信号機を識別するための識別情報、信号機の現在の信号表示情報(信号機の表示色を示す情報)、次の信号表示情報及び該信号表示に変更されるまでの時間を示す情報等の情報が含まれる。
The information transmitted from the roadside unit to the vehicle by road-to-vehicle communication includes intersection information, traffic signal information, movement types of moving bodies existing in the observation area, and information indicating the number of movement types (details will be described later). As intersection information, identification information for identifying an intersection, as traffic signal information, identification information for identifying a traffic signal, current signal display information (information indicating the display color of the traffic signal), next signal display information, Information such as information indicating the time until the signal display is changed is included.
車車間通信により車両から車両に発信される情報には、車両の現在位置、移動速度、進行方向などを示す情報が含まれ、歩車間通信により歩行者から車両に発信される情報には、歩行者等の現在位置、移動速度、進行方向などを示す情報が含まれる(車歩間通信及び歩歩間通信においても同様である)。
The information transmitted from the vehicle to the vehicle by the inter-vehicle communication includes information indicating the current position of the vehicle, the moving speed, the traveling direction, etc. The information transmitted from the pedestrian to the vehicle by the inter-vehicle communication includes the walking Information indicating the current position, movement speed, traveling direction, etc. of the person or the like is included (the same applies to inter-vehicle communication and inter-walk communication).
そして移動体通信装置は、該移動体通信装置を備える(所持する)移動体(自車)の情報(現在位置、進行方向、移動速度などを示す情報)と、ITS通信によって該移動体通信装置が他の通信装置から受信する該他の通信装置を備える(所持する)他の移動体(他の車両や歩行者等)の情報(現在位置、進行方向、移動速度などを示す情報)に基づいて、渋滞判定を行って渋滞していると判定された場合に渋滞回避経路の検索を行ったり、交通事故判定を行って交通事故発生の可能性がある場合に事故回避制御を行ったりするなど道路交通問題の解決に貢献している(例えば、特許文献1に開示されている移動体通信装置を参照)。
The mobile communication device includes information (information indicating a current position, a traveling direction, a moving speed, etc.) of a mobile body (own vehicle) provided with (owned by) the mobile communication device, and ITS communication. Based on information (information indicating the current position, traveling direction, moving speed, etc.) of other moving bodies (other vehicles, pedestrians, etc.) provided with (possessed by) the other communication devices received from other communication devices If a traffic jam is detected and it is determined that there is a traffic jam, a traffic jam avoidance route is searched, or a traffic accident judgment is performed and a traffic accident is likely to occur. It contributes to the solution of the road traffic problem (for example, see the mobile communication device disclosed in Patent Document 1).
しかしながら、路車間通信では、路側機の設置が必要になり、手間と費用が大きくなる。これに対して、車車間通信、つまり車両(車載器)間で情報を通信する形態であれば、路側機の設置が不要になる。その場合、例えば、GPS(Global Positioning System)等によって車両の現在の位置情報をリアルタイムに検出し、その位置情報を車両(車載器)同士で交換しあうことによって、自車および他車がそれぞれ交差点へ進入するどの道路に位置するかを判断し(例えば、特許文献2参照)、これによって交差点の出会い頭の衝突事故を防止することができる。
However, road-to-vehicle communication requires the installation of roadside equipment, which increases labor and cost. On the other hand, if it is a form which communicates information between vehicles, ie, a vehicle (vehicle equipment), installation of a roadside machine becomes unnecessary. In that case, for example, the current position information of the vehicle is detected in real time by GPS (Global Positioning System), etc., and the position information is exchanged between the vehicles (on-vehicle devices), so that the own vehicle and the other vehicle cross each other. It is possible to determine which road to enter the road (see, for example, Patent Document 2), thereby preventing a collision accident at the intersection.
ところで、上述したようにITSにおいてはITS通信可能な各通信装置が所定の情報を含む情報を送信するが、状況によっては自通信装置に関する情報を送信しないことが望まれることがある。例えば特許文献3に開示されている走行支援システムにおいて携帯型端末器は、当該携帯型端末器(携帯型端末器を所持するユーザ(歩行者))が車両に存在するか否かを判定する存在判定手段を備えており、車両の現在位置と歩行者の現在位置が同一である場合に限り携帯型端末器が車両に存在していると判定し、歩行者の移動体情報の送信を中止することとしている。
By the way, as described above, in ITS, each communication device capable of ITS communication transmits information including predetermined information, but depending on the situation, it may be desired not to transmit information related to the own communication device. For example, in the driving support system disclosed in Patent Document 3, the portable terminal device determines whether or not the portable terminal device (the user (pedestrian) who owns the portable terminal device) is present in the vehicle. A determination unit is provided, and only when the current position of the vehicle and the current position of the pedestrian are the same, the portable terminal is determined to be present in the vehicle, and the transmission of the pedestrian's mobile body information is stopped. I am going to do that.
また、ITS通信において、全てのITS通信装置(ナビゲーション装置等の車載通信装置、歩行者が所持する携帯電話等の移動通信装置、路側機など)が定期的、或いは不定期に情報を送信すると回線が混雑してしまう可能性がある。特に、ITSにおいて無線通信を行なう際の周波数帯域は700MHz帯の周波数帯域のみであり、1チャンネルのみで通信を行うことになるので、多くのITS通信装置が存在する場所では、回線の混雑による影響(通信不可能、通信遅延、通信衝突など)が顕著に現れる可能性が高い。
In ITS communication, if all ITS communication devices (vehicle communication devices such as navigation devices, mobile communication devices such as mobile phones possessed by pedestrians, roadside devices, etc.) transmit information regularly or irregularly, May get crowded. In particular, the frequency band for wireless communication in ITS is only the frequency band of 700 MHz band, and communication is performed using only one channel. Therefore, in a place where many ITS communication devices exist, the influence of line congestion is present. (Communication impossible, communication delay, communication collision, etc.) are likely to appear prominently.
本発明はこうした状況に鑑みてなされたものであり、自通信装置に関する情報を他の通信装置に対してブロードキャスト送信すべきではない状況であるときに、当該状況に応じて適切な制御を行う移動体通信装置、端末装置、基地局装置、送信制御方法、通信制御方法を提供することを目的とする。
The present invention has been made in view of such a situation, and in a situation where information about the own communication device should not be broadcasted to other communication devices, the mobile device performs appropriate control according to the situation. An object of the present invention is to provide a body communication device, a terminal device, a base station device, a transmission control method, and a communication control method.
上記課題を解決するために、本発明の端末装置は、第1の無線通信にてパケット信号を報知する第1通信部と、第1の無線通信よりも通信可能領域が狭い第2の無線通信にて所定の情報を通信する第2通信部と、第1通信部の動作と第2通信部の動作とを制御する制御部とを備える。制御部は、第2通信部による通信が終了してから所定の期間が経過するまでの間、第1通信部の動作を停止させる。
In order to solve the above-described problem, a terminal device of the present invention includes a first communication unit that notifies a packet signal through first wireless communication, and second wireless communication in which a communicable area is narrower than that of the first wireless communication. And a second communication unit that communicates predetermined information, and a control unit that controls the operation of the first communication unit and the operation of the second communication unit. The control unit stops the operation of the first communication unit until a predetermined period elapses after the communication by the second communication unit is completed.
本発明の別の態様は、基地局装置である。この装置は、パケット信号を生成する生成部と、生成部において生成したパケット信号を報知する報知部とを備える。生成部は、第1種の端末装置を対象にした送信禁止期間であって、かつ第2種の端末装置を対象から除外した送信禁止期間に関する情報をパケット信号に含める。
Another aspect of the present invention is a base station apparatus. This apparatus includes a generation unit that generates a packet signal and a notification unit that notifies the packet signal generated in the generation unit. The generation unit includes, in the packet signal, information related to the transmission prohibition period for the first type terminal device and the transmission prohibition period for which the second type terminal device is excluded from the target.
本発明のさらに別の態様は、端末装置である。この装置は、車両に搭載された端末装置であって、基地局装置からのパケット信号を受信する受信部と、受信部において受信したパケット信号に含まれた情報をもとに、パケット信号の送信可能期間を決定する決定部と、決定部において決定した送信可能期間にて、パケット信号を報知する報知部とを備える。決定部は、受信部において受信したパケット信号に含まれた情報が、歩行者に携帯された端末装置に対する送信禁止期間である場合、当該情報を無視して、パケット信号の送信可能期間を決定する。
Still another aspect of the present invention is a terminal device. This device is a terminal device mounted in a vehicle, and receives a packet signal from a base station device, and transmits a packet signal based on information contained in the packet signal received by the receiving unit. A determination unit that determines the possible period; and an informing unit that notifies the packet signal in the transmittable period determined by the determination unit. When the information included in the packet signal received by the reception unit is a transmission prohibition period for the terminal device carried by the pedestrian, the determination unit ignores the information and determines the transmission period of the packet signal. .
なお、以上の構成要素の任意の組合せ、本発明の表現を方法、装置、システム、記録媒体、コンピュータプログラムなどの間で変換したものもまた、本発明の態様として有効である。
It should be noted that an arbitrary combination of the above-described components and a conversion of the expression of the present invention between a method, an apparatus, a system, a recording medium, a computer program, and the like are also effective as an aspect of the present invention.
上記目的を達成するために本発明の移動体通信装置は、移動体に備えられ、他の移動体の現在位置を示す情報を含む情報を受信する通信部と、現在位置検出部により検出された移動体の現在位置を取得し、前記移動体の現在位置と前記通信部により受信された前記他の移動体の現在位置とに基づいて、前記通信部を介して行われる移動体情報の送信について通常制御状態で行うか特別制御状態で行うかを決定する制御部と、を備えることを特徴としている。
In order to achieve the above object, a mobile communication device of the present invention is provided in a mobile body, and is detected by a communication section that receives information including information indicating the current position of another mobile body, and a current position detection section. Obtaining the current position of the mobile object and transmitting the mobile object information via the communication unit based on the current position of the mobile object and the current position of the other mobile object received by the communication unit And a control unit that determines whether to perform in a normal control state or a special control state.
また上記構成の移動体通信装置において、前記制御部は、前記通信部により受信された他の移動体の現在位置が前記現在位置検出部により検出された前記移動体の現在位置から所定範囲内であるときには、前記移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行うと決定することが望ましい。
Further, in the mobile communication device having the above-described configuration, the control unit has a current position of another mobile body received by the communication unit within a predetermined range from a current position of the mobile body detected by the current position detection unit. In some cases, it is desirable to determine that transmission of the mobile body information is performed in a special control state.
また上記構成の移動体通信装置において、前記制御部は、前記通信部により受信された他の移動体の現在位置が前記現在位置検出部により検出された前記移動体の現在位置から所定範囲内であって、且つ、前記移動体と前記他の移動体の移動種別が同一であるときには、前記移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行うと決定することが望ましい。
Further, in the mobile communication device having the above-described configuration, the control unit has a current position of another mobile body received by the communication unit within a predetermined range from a current position of the mobile body detected by the current position detection unit. In addition, when the movement types of the moving body and the other moving body are the same, it is desirable to determine that transmission of the moving body information is performed in a special control state.
また上記構成の移動体通信装置において、前記制御部は、さらに前記移動体の現在位置が前記他の移動体の現在位置よりも前記移動体の進行方向前方でない場合には、前記移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行うと決定することが望ましい。
Further, in the mobile communication device having the above-described configuration, the control unit further includes the mobile unit information when the current position of the mobile unit is not ahead of the current direction of the other mobile unit. It is desirable to decide to perform transmission in a special control state.
また上記構成の移動体通信装置において、前記他の移動体の現在位置を示す情報は、観測エリアを示す情報であり、前記通信部は、前記観測エリア内における他の移動体の有無を示す情報を受信し、前記制御部は、前記現在位置検出部によって検出された前記移動体の現在位置が前記観測エリア内であって、且つ、該観測エリア内に他の移動体が存在するときに、前記移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行うことが望ましい。
In the mobile communication device having the above configuration, the information indicating the current position of the other mobile object is information indicating an observation area, and the communication unit is information indicating the presence or absence of another mobile object in the observation area. When the current position of the moving object detected by the current position detecting unit is within the observation area and another moving object exists in the observation area, It is desirable to perform transmission of the mobile object information in a special control state.
また上記構成の移動体通信装置において、前記特別制御状態は、前記移動体情報を送信しないこと、又は送信周期を遅らせること、又は前記移動体情報として送信される情報を減らすこと、のうち少なくとも1つを含むことが望ましい。
In the mobile communication device having the above configuration, the special control state is at least one of not transmitting the mobile body information, delaying a transmission cycle, or reducing information transmitted as the mobile body information. It is desirable to include one.
上記目的を達成するために本発明の送信制御方法は、前記移動体の現在位置を取得するステップと、他の移動体の現在位置を示す情報を含む情報を取得するステップと、前記移動体の現在位置と、前記他の移動体の現在位置との比較結果に基づいて、移動体情報の送信について通常制御状態で行うか特別制御状態で行うかを決定するステップと、を有することを特徴としている。
In order to achieve the above object, a transmission control method of the present invention includes a step of acquiring a current position of the mobile body, a step of acquiring information including information indicating a current position of another mobile body, Determining whether transmission of mobile body information is performed in a normal control state or a special control state based on a comparison result between the current position and the current position of the other mobile body Yes.
上記目的を達成するために本発明の移動体通信装置は、第1通信部と他の通信装置とが近距離無線通信を行っているときに、第2通信部を介した移動体情報の送信又は前記他の通信装置による移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行なうための制御を行う制御部を備えることを特徴としている。
In order to achieve the above object, the mobile communication device of the present invention transmits mobile information via the second communication unit when the first communication unit and another communication device are performing near field communication. Alternatively, a control unit that performs control for performing transmission of mobile body information by the other communication device in a special control state is provided.
また上記構成の移動体通信装置において、前記第2通信部を介した移動体情報の送信及び前記他の通信装置による移動体情報の送信は、前記近距離無線通信よりも無線通信可能範囲が広い広範囲無線通信方式により行なわれることが望ましい。
Further, in the mobile communication device having the above-described configuration, transmission of mobile body information via the second communication unit and transmission of mobile body information by the other communication device have a wider wireless communication range than the short-range wireless communication. It is desirable to be performed by a wide range wireless communication system.
また上記構成の移動体通信装置において、前記制御部は、前記他の通信装置が前記広範囲無線通信方式による移動体情報の送信を行なうことが可能か否かを判定し、前記他の通信装置が前記広範囲無線通信方式による移動体情報の送信を行なうことが可能である場合に、前記第2通信部を介した移動体情報の送信又は前記他の通信装置による移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行なうための制御を行うことが望ましい。
In the mobile communication device having the above-described configuration, the control unit determines whether or not the other communication device can transmit mobile information using the wide-range wireless communication method, and the other communication device When it is possible to transmit mobile body information by the wide-range wireless communication system, special control state for mobile body information transmission via the second communication unit or mobile body information transmission by the other communication device It is desirable to perform control for performing the above.
また上記構成の移動体通信装置において、前記制御部は、前記第1通信部と前記他の通信装置との近距離無線通信が切断されたときに、前記第2通信部を介した移動体情報の送信又は前記移動通信端末による移動体情報の送信について通常制御状態で行なうための制御を行うことが望ましい。
Further, in the mobile communication device having the above-described configuration, the control unit is configured to transmit mobile information via the second communication unit when short-range wireless communication between the first communication unit and the other communication device is disconnected. It is desirable to perform control for performing transmission in a normal control state regarding transmission of mobile information by the mobile communication terminal.
また上記構成の移動体通信装置において、前記移動体通信装置は車両に備えられ、前記他の通信装置は移動通信端末であることが望ましい。
In the mobile communication device having the above configuration, it is preferable that the mobile communication device is provided in a vehicle, and the other communication device is a mobile communication terminal.
また上記構成の移動体通信装置において、前記移動体通信装置は歩行者に携行され、前記他の通信装置は車載通信装置であることが望ましい。
In the mobile communication device having the above configuration, it is preferable that the mobile communication device is carried by a pedestrian and the other communication device is an in-vehicle communication device.
上記目的を達成するために本発明の通信制御方法は、第1通信部と他の通信装置とが近距離無線通信を行うステップと、第1通信部と他の通信装置とが近距離無線通信を行っているときに、第2通信部を介した移動体情報の送信又は前記他の通信装置による移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行なうための制御を行うステップと、を有することを特徴としている。
In order to achieve the above object, the communication control method of the present invention includes a step in which a first communication unit and another communication device perform near field communication, and a first communication unit and another communication device perform near field communication. Performing a control for performing the transmission of mobile body information via the second communication unit or the transmission of mobile body information by the other communication device in a special control state when performing the communication. It is said.
本発明によれば、自通信装置に関する情報を他の通信装置に対してブロードキャスト送信すべきではない状況であるときに、当該状況に応じて適切な制御を行うことができる。
According to the present invention, when it is a situation in which information related to the own communication device should not be broadcasted to other communication devices, appropriate control can be performed according to the situation.
すなわち、本発明によれば、一定のエリアにおいて通信機能を自動的に停止できる。また、本発明によれば、安全運転支援(渋滞判定や交通事故判定)を妨げることなく、ITS通信における回線の混雑を未然に防ぐことができる。また、本発明によれば、近距離無線通信を行っているときには、広範囲無線通信(移動体情報の送信)が制限されている(特別制御状態で行われている)ので、他の通信装置の安全運転支援を妨げることがない。
That is, according to the present invention, the communication function can be automatically stopped in a certain area. Furthermore, according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent congestion of the line in ITS communication without disturbing safe driving support (congestion determination or traffic accident determination). In addition, according to the present invention, when performing short-range wireless communication, wide-range wireless communication (transmission of mobile object information) is restricted (performed in a special control state), so that other communication devices Does not interfere with safe driving support.
本発明の第1の課題について以下説明する。IEEE802.11等の規格に準拠した無線LAN(Local Area Network)では、CSMA/CA(Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance)と呼ばれるアクセス制御機能が使用されている。そのため、当該無線LANでは、複数の端末装置によって同一の無線チャネルが共有される。このようなCSMA/CAでは、キャリアセンスによって他のパケット信号が送信されていないことを確認した後に、パケット信号が送信される。ITS(Intelligent Transport Systems)のような車車間通信に無線LANを適用する場合、不特定多数の車両のそれぞれに搭載された端末装置へ情報を送信する必要があるために、信号はブロードキャストにて送信されることが望ましい。その結果、端末装置は、ブロードキャストされた信号を受信することによって、他の車両の接近を検出し、それを運転者に通知することによって、車両間の衝突事故を防止するための注意を運転者に喚起させる。
The first problem of the present invention will be described below. In a wireless LAN (Local Area Network) compliant with a standard such as IEEE 802.11, an access control function called CSMA / CA (Carrier Sense Multiple Access Avididance) is used. Therefore, in the wireless LAN, the same wireless channel is shared by a plurality of terminal devices. In such CSMA / CA, a packet signal is transmitted after confirming that no other packet signal is transmitted by carrier sense. When applying wireless LAN to inter-vehicle communication such as ITS (Intelligent Transport Systems), it is necessary to transmit information to terminal devices mounted on each of an unspecified number of vehicles, so signals are transmitted by broadcast. It is desirable that As a result, the terminal device detects the approach of another vehicle by receiving the broadcast signal, and notifies the driver of the approach by notifying the driver of the approach to the driver. To arouse.
車両間の衝突事故を防止するとともに、歩行者等と車両との衝突事故を防止することも望まれる。これに対応するために、端末装置は、車載される他に歩行者にも携帯される。歩行者が車両に追突されることを防止するために、歩行者に携帯される端末装置は、車載の端末装置に対して、存在している位置を通知する。一方、歩行者に携帯される端末装置は、バッテリで駆動するので、車載の端末装置と比較して処理量の低減が必要とされる。例えば、他の車両の接近は歩行者に対して通知されない。このような歩行者に携帯される端末装置の通信機能は、一定のエリアにおいて停止されることが望ましい。例えば、学校等の施設内や電車等の交通機関内である。また、歩行者の利便性を考慮すると、通信機能の停止や再開は自動的になされる方が望ましい。
It is also desirable to prevent collisions between vehicles and prevent collisions between pedestrians and vehicles. In order to cope with this, the terminal device is carried by a pedestrian in addition to being mounted on the vehicle. In order to prevent the pedestrian from colliding with the vehicle, the terminal device carried by the pedestrian notifies the in-vehicle terminal device of the existing position. On the other hand, since a terminal device carried by a pedestrian is driven by a battery, the amount of processing is required to be reduced as compared with an in-vehicle terminal device. For example, the approach of another vehicle is not notified to the pedestrian. It is desirable that the communication function of the terminal device carried by such a pedestrian is stopped in a certain area. For example, in facilities such as schools and in transportation such as trains. In consideration of the convenience of pedestrians, it is desirable that the communication function is automatically stopped or resumed.
本発明の第1実施形態はこうした状況に鑑みてなされたものであり、その目的は、一定のエリアにおいて通信機能を自動的に停止させる技術を提供することにある。以下、本発明の実施形態について記載する。
The first embodiment of the present invention has been made in view of such a situation, and an object thereof is to provide a technique for automatically stopping a communication function in a certain area. Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described.
[第1実施形態]
本発明を具体的に説明する前に、概要を述べる。本発明の実施例は、車両に搭載された端末装置間において車車間通信を実行するとともに、交差点等に設置された基地局装置から端末装置へ路車間通信も実行する通信システムに関する。車車間通信として、端末装置は、車両の速度や位置等の情報(以下、これらを「データ」という)を格納したパケット信号をブロードキャスト送信する。また、他の端末装置は、パケット信号を受信するとともに、データをもとに車両の接近等を認識する。車両の接近を運転者に通知することによって、運転者に注意を促す。車車間通信と路車間通信との干渉を低減するために、基地局装置は、複数のサブフレームが含まれたフレームを繰り返し規定する。基地局装置は、路車間通信のために、複数のサブフレームのいずれかを選択し、選択したサブフレームの先頭部分の期間において、制御情報等が格納されたパケット信号をブロードキャスト送信する。制御情報には、当該基地局装置がパケット信号をブローキャスト送信するための期間(以下、「路車送信期間」という)に関する情報が含まれている。 [First embodiment]
Before describing the present invention in detail, an outline will be described. Embodiments of the present invention relate to a communication system that performs vehicle-to-vehicle communication between terminal devices mounted on a vehicle, and also executes road-to-vehicle communication from a base station device installed at an intersection or the like to a terminal device. As inter-vehicle communication, the terminal device broadcasts and transmits a packet signal storing information such as the speed and position of the vehicle (hereinafter referred to as “data”). Further, the other terminal device receives the packet signal and recognizes the approach of the vehicle based on the data. The driver is alerted by notifying the driver of the approach of the vehicle. In order to reduce interference between vehicle-to-vehicle communication and road-to-vehicle communication, the base station apparatus repeatedly defines a frame including a plurality of subframes. The base station apparatus selects any of a plurality of subframes for road-to-vehicle communication, and broadcasts a packet signal in which control information and the like are stored during the period of the head portion of the selected subframe. The control information includes information related to a period for the base station apparatus to broadcast the packet signal (hereinafter referred to as “road vehicle transmission period”).
本発明を具体的に説明する前に、概要を述べる。本発明の実施例は、車両に搭載された端末装置間において車車間通信を実行するとともに、交差点等に設置された基地局装置から端末装置へ路車間通信も実行する通信システムに関する。車車間通信として、端末装置は、車両の速度や位置等の情報(以下、これらを「データ」という)を格納したパケット信号をブロードキャスト送信する。また、他の端末装置は、パケット信号を受信するとともに、データをもとに車両の接近等を認識する。車両の接近を運転者に通知することによって、運転者に注意を促す。車車間通信と路車間通信との干渉を低減するために、基地局装置は、複数のサブフレームが含まれたフレームを繰り返し規定する。基地局装置は、路車間通信のために、複数のサブフレームのいずれかを選択し、選択したサブフレームの先頭部分の期間において、制御情報等が格納されたパケット信号をブロードキャスト送信する。制御情報には、当該基地局装置がパケット信号をブローキャスト送信するための期間(以下、「路車送信期間」という)に関する情報が含まれている。 [First embodiment]
Before describing the present invention in detail, an outline will be described. Embodiments of the present invention relate to a communication system that performs vehicle-to-vehicle communication between terminal devices mounted on a vehicle, and also executes road-to-vehicle communication from a base station device installed at an intersection or the like to a terminal device. As inter-vehicle communication, the terminal device broadcasts and transmits a packet signal storing information such as the speed and position of the vehicle (hereinafter referred to as “data”). Further, the other terminal device receives the packet signal and recognizes the approach of the vehicle based on the data. The driver is alerted by notifying the driver of the approach of the vehicle. In order to reduce interference between vehicle-to-vehicle communication and road-to-vehicle communication, the base station apparatus repeatedly defines a frame including a plurality of subframes. The base station apparatus selects any of a plurality of subframes for road-to-vehicle communication, and broadcasts a packet signal in which control information and the like are stored during the period of the head portion of the selected subframe. The control information includes information related to a period for the base station apparatus to broadcast the packet signal (hereinafter referred to as “road vehicle transmission period”).
端末装置は、制御情報をもとに路車送信期間を特定し、路車送信期間以外の期間においてパケット信号を送信する。このように、路車間通信と車車間通信とが時間分割多重されるので、両者間のパケット信号の衝突確率が低減される。なお、車車間通信は、路車送信期間以外の車車間通信を実行するための期間(以下、「車車送信期間」という)においてCSMA方式にてなされる。このような端末装置は、歩行者にも携帯される。歩行者に携帯される端末装置は、バッテリ駆動であり、低消費電力化を必要とされる。そのため、歩行者に携帯される端末装置は、データを格納したパケット信号をブロードキャスト送信するだけであり、車両の接近を歩行者に通知しない。このような端末装置を携帯した歩行者が、横断歩道に進入するかを正確に検出し、それを通知するために、本実施例に係る通信システムは、次の処理を実行する。なお、以下では、歩行者に携帯される端末装置であっても、車車間通信、路車間通信というものとする。
The terminal device specifies a road and vehicle transmission period based on the control information, and transmits a packet signal in a period other than the road and vehicle transmission period. Thus, since the road-to-vehicle communication and the vehicle-to-vehicle communication are time-division multiplexed, the collision probability of packet signals between them is reduced. The inter-vehicle communication is performed by the CSMA method in a period for performing inter-vehicle communication other than the road-vehicle transmission period (hereinafter referred to as “vehicle transmission period”). Such a terminal device is also carried by a pedestrian. A terminal device carried by a pedestrian is battery-driven and requires low power consumption. Therefore, the terminal device carried by the pedestrian only broadcasts a packet signal storing data, and does not notify the pedestrian of the approach of the vehicle. In order to accurately detect whether or not a pedestrian carrying such a terminal device enters a pedestrian crossing and to notify the pedestrian, the communication system according to the present embodiment executes the following processing. In the following, even terminal devices carried by pedestrians are referred to as inter-vehicle communication and road-to-vehicle communication.
横断歩道の両端には、近距離無線通信のリーダライタが設置される。また、端末装置にも近距離無線通信の機能が備えられる。歩行者が横断歩道に進入するために、リーダライタに接近すると、端末装置は、近距離無線通信によって情報をリーダライタに送信する。当該情報は、端末装置のIDや歩行者の情報である。リーダライタは、基地局装置に接続されており、受信した情報を基地局装置に出力する。基地局装置は、情報を入力すると、信号機の各点灯色の変化予定を決定する。例えば、歩行者側の信号機が一定期間以上にわたって赤色である場合、基地局装置は、これを早期に青色に変更するとともに、車道側の信号を赤色に変更するような変化予定を決定する。基地局装置は、変化予定が含まれたパケット信号を路車間通信にて報知する。当該パケット信号を受信した車載の端末装置は、信号機の灯色が赤色に変化することを運転者に通知するので、歩行者が横断歩道に進入することを運転者に通知できる。また、端末装置は、リーダライタに情報を送信した後、一定期間にわたって、パケット信号の報知を停止する。これによって、消費電力が低減される。
リ ー ダ Near-distance wireless communication reader / writers will be installed at both ends of the pedestrian crossing. The terminal device also has a short-range wireless communication function. When a pedestrian approaches a reader / writer so as to enter a pedestrian crossing, the terminal device transmits information to the reader / writer by short-range wireless communication. The information is the ID of the terminal device or pedestrian information. The reader / writer is connected to the base station apparatus and outputs the received information to the base station apparatus. When the base station apparatus inputs information, the base station apparatus determines a change schedule of each lighting color of the traffic light. For example, when the traffic light on the pedestrian side is red for a certain period or longer, the base station apparatus determines a change schedule so as to change this to blue early and change the signal on the roadway side to red. The base station apparatus notifies the packet signal including the change schedule through road-to-vehicle communication. Since the vehicle-mounted terminal device that has received the packet signal notifies the driver that the color of the traffic light changes to red, it can notify the driver that the pedestrian enters the pedestrian crossing. In addition, after transmitting information to the reader / writer, the terminal device stops reporting the packet signal for a certain period. Thereby, power consumption is reduced.
図1は、本発明の実施例に係る通信システム100の構成を示す。これは、ひとつの交差点を上方から見た場合に相当する。通信システム100は、基地局装置10、車両12と総称される第1車両12a、第2車両12b、第3車両12c、第4車両12d、第5車両12e、第6車両12f、第7車両12g、第8車両12h、信号機16、リーダライタ18と総称される第1リーダライタ18a、第2リーダライタ18b、ネットワーク202を含む。なお、各車両12には、図示しない端末装置が搭載されている。また、エリア212は、基地局装置10の周囲に形成され、エリア外214は、エリア212の外側に形成されている。
FIG. 1 shows a configuration of a communication system 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention. This corresponds to a case where one intersection is viewed from above. The communication system 100 includes a base station device 10, a first vehicle 12a, a second vehicle 12b, a third vehicle 12c, a fourth vehicle 12d, a fifth vehicle 12e, a sixth vehicle 12f, and a seventh vehicle 12g, collectively referred to as a vehicle 12. , An eighth vehicle 12h, a traffic light 16, a first reader / writer 18a, a second reader / writer 18b, which are collectively referred to as a reader / writer 18, and a network 202. Each vehicle 12 is equipped with a terminal device (not shown). The area 212 is formed around the base station apparatus 10, and the outside area 214 is formed outside the area 212.
図示のごとく、図面の水平方向、つまり左右の方向に向かう道路と、図面の垂直方向、つまり上下の方向に向かう道路とが中心部分で交差している。ここで、図面の上側が方角の「北」に相当し、左側が方角の「西」に相当し、下側が方角の「南」に相当し、右側が方角の「東」に相当する。また、ふたつの道路の交差部分が「交差点」である。第1車両12a、第2車両12bが、左から右へ向かって進んでおり、第3車両12c、第4車両12dが、右から左へ向かって進んでいる。また、第5車両12e、第6車両12fが、上から下へ向かって進んでおり、第7車両12g、第8車両12hが、下から上へ向かって進んでいる。
As shown in the figure, the road that goes in the horizontal direction of the drawing, that is, the left and right direction, intersects the vertical direction of the drawing, that is, the road that goes in the up and down direction, at the central portion. Here, the upper side of the drawing corresponds to the direction “north”, the left side corresponds to the direction “west”, the lower side corresponds to the direction “south”, and the right side corresponds to the direction “east”. The intersection of the two roads is an “intersection”. The first vehicle 12a and the second vehicle 12b are traveling from left to right, and the third vehicle 12c and the fourth vehicle 12d are traveling from right to left. Further, the fifth vehicle 12e and the sixth vehicle 12f are traveling from the top to the bottom, and the seventh vehicle 12g and the eighth vehicle 12h are traveling from the bottom to the top.
交差点には、信号機16が設置されている。実際には、交差点にて交差する道路の各方向に対して信号機16が設置されているが、ここでは、説明を明瞭にするために、ひとつの信号機16のみが図示される。また、交差点には、基地局装置10も設置されている。基地局装置10は、端末装置間の通信を制御する。基地局装置10は、図示しないGPS衛星から受信した信号や、図示しない他の基地局装置10にて形成されたフレームをもとに、複数のサブフレームが含まれたフレームを繰り返し生成する。ここで、各サブフレームの先頭部分に路車送信期間が設定可能であるような規定がなされている。基地局装置10は、複数のサブフレームのうち、他の基地局装置10によって路車送信期間が設定されていないサブフレームを選択する。基地局装置10は、選択したサブフレームの先頭部分に路車送信期間を設定する。基地局装置10は、設定した路車送信期間においてパケット信号を報知する。
A traffic light 16 is installed at the intersection. Actually, a traffic light 16 is installed in each direction of the road that intersects at the intersection, but only one traffic light 16 is shown here for the sake of clarity. A base station device 10 is also installed at the intersection. The base station device 10 controls communication between terminal devices. The base station device 10 repeatedly generates a frame including a plurality of subframes based on a signal received from a GPS satellite (not shown) and a frame formed by another base station device 10 (not shown). Here, the road vehicle transmission period can be set at the head of each subframe. The base station apparatus 10 selects a subframe in which the road and vehicle transmission period is not set by another base station apparatus 10 from among the plurality of subframes. The base station apparatus 10 sets a road and vehicle transmission period at the beginning of the selected subframe. The base station apparatus 10 notifies the packet signal in the set road and vehicle transmission period.
基地局装置10は、信号機16の近傍に設置され、第1リーダライタ18a、第2リーダライタ18b、信号機16と接続される。リーダライタ18は、図示しない端末装置との間で近距離無線通信を実行する。ここで、リーダライタ18と通信可能な端末装置は、車両12に搭載された端末装置ではなく、歩行者に携帯される端末装置である。近距離無線通信とは、例えば、NFC(Near Field Communication)であり、前述の路車間通信や車車間通信よりも通信可能領域の狭い通信である。歩行者は、横断歩道に進入する際に、端末装置をリーダライタ18にかざす。ここで、リーダライタ18は、第1リーダライタ18aであるとする。第1リーダライタ18aは、端末装置と通信し、通信によって取得した端末装置に関する情報を基地局装置10に出力する。
The base station apparatus 10 is installed in the vicinity of the traffic light 16 and is connected to the first reader / writer 18a, the second reader / writer 18b, and the traffic light 16. The reader / writer 18 performs short-range wireless communication with a terminal device (not shown). Here, the terminal device capable of communicating with the reader / writer 18 is not a terminal device mounted on the vehicle 12 but a terminal device carried by a pedestrian. The short-range wireless communication is, for example, NFC (Near Field Communication), which is communication having a narrower communication range than the above-described road-to-vehicle communication or vehicle-to-vehicle communication. When the pedestrian enters the pedestrian crossing, he holds the terminal device over the reader / writer 18. Here, the reader / writer 18 is assumed to be the first reader / writer 18a. The first reader / writer 18a communicates with the terminal device, and outputs information related to the terminal device acquired by communication to the base station device 10.
基地局装置10は、第1リーダライタ18aから情報を受けつけることによって、歩行者が横断歩道に進入しようとしていることを認識する。基地局装置10は、受けつけた情報をもとに、信号機16における各点灯色を点灯させるスケジュールを決定する。このスケジュールが前述の変化予定に相当する。例えば、現在の車道側の点灯色が青色であり、横断歩道側の点灯色が赤色であるときには、横断歩道側の点灯色において青色から赤色への変化が早くなるように、変化予定が決定される。このような変化予定によって、歩行者が横断歩道を横断しようとしていることが通知可能になる。基地局装置10は、変化予定をパケット信号に含めて報知する。変化予定とは異なったデータもパケット信号に格納可能である。ひとつが制御情報であり、別のひとつが渋滞情報である。
The base station apparatus 10 recognizes that the pedestrian is about to enter the pedestrian crossing by receiving information from the first reader / writer 18a. The base station apparatus 10 determines a schedule for lighting each lighting color in the traffic light 16 based on the received information. This schedule corresponds to the aforementioned change schedule. For example, when the current lighting color on the roadway side is blue and the lighting color on the pedestrian crossing side is red, the change schedule is determined so that the lighting color on the pedestrian crossing side changes quickly from blue to red. The Such a change schedule makes it possible to notify that a pedestrian is about to cross a pedestrian crossing. The base station apparatus 10 notifies the change schedule by including it in the packet signal. Data different from the change schedule can be stored in the packet signal. One is control information and the other is traffic jam information.
さらに、歩行者が横断歩道の横断を終了し、横断歩道に進入する際に端末装置をかざしたリーダライタ18とは別のリーダライタ18、例えば、第2リーダライタ18bに携帯端末をかざす。第2リーダライタ18bは、端末装置と通信し、通信によって取得した端末装置に関する情報を基地局装置10に出力する。基地局装置10は、第2リーダライタ18bから情報を受けつけることによって、歩行者が横断歩道から退出しようとしていることを認識する。基地局装置10は、受けつけた情報をもとに、信号機16における各点灯色を点灯させるスケジュールを再度決定する。基地局装置10は、新たな変化予定が格納されたパケット信号を報知する。
Further, when the pedestrian finishes crossing the pedestrian crossing and enters the pedestrian crossing, the portable terminal is held over a reader / writer 18 different from the reader / writer 18 holding the terminal device, for example, the second reader / writer 18b. The second reader / writer 18b communicates with the terminal device, and outputs information related to the terminal device acquired by communication to the base station device 10. The base station device 10 recognizes that the pedestrian is leaving the pedestrian crossing by receiving information from the second reader / writer 18b. Based on the received information, the base station apparatus 10 again determines a schedule for lighting each lighting color in the traffic light 16. The base station apparatus 10 broadcasts a packet signal in which a new change schedule is stored.
車両12は、エンジンにて駆動され、端末装置を搭載する。端末装置は、受信したパケット信号に含まれた制御情報をもとに、フレームを生成する。その結果、複数の端末装置のそれぞれにおいて生成されるフレームは、基地局装置10において生成されるフレームに同期する。また、端末装置は、車車送信期間において、CSMA/CAを実行することによって、パケット信号を報知する。端末装置は、例えば、存在位置に関する情報をパケット信号に格納する。また、端末装置は、制御情報もパケット信号に格納する。つまり、基地局装置10から送信された制御情報は、端末装置によって転送される。一方、基地局装置10からのパケット信号を受信できない端末装置、つまりエリア外214に存在する端末装置は、フレームの構成に関係なく、CSMA/CAを実行することによって、パケット信号を報知する。
The vehicle 12 is driven by an engine and is equipped with a terminal device. The terminal device generates a frame based on the control information included in the received packet signal. As a result, the frame generated in each of the plurality of terminal devices is synchronized with the frame generated in the base station device 10. Moreover, a terminal device alert | reports a packet signal by performing CSMA / CA in a vehicle transmission period. For example, the terminal device stores information on the location in the packet signal. The terminal device also stores control information in the packet signal. That is, the control information transmitted from the base station device 10 is transferred by the terminal device. On the other hand, a terminal device that cannot receive a packet signal from the base station device 10, that is, a terminal device existing outside the area 214 broadcasts the packet signal by executing CSMA / CA regardless of the frame configuration.
さらに、端末装置は、他の端末装置からのパケット信号を受信することによって、他の端末装置が搭載された車両の接近を運転者へ通知する。また、端末装置は、基地局装置10からのパケット信号に含まれた変化予定も取得し、信号機16の点灯色の変化を運転者へ通知する。運転者は、赤色への点灯色の変化を認識することによって、歩行者が横断歩道をわたりうることを知る。前述のごとく、端末装置は、歩行者にも携帯される。このような端末装置は、車両12に搭載された端末装置と比較して、次の点が異なる。ひとつは、近距離無線通信の機能を有すること、別のひとつは、受信したパケット信号の内容を通知するための機能を有しないことである。
Furthermore, the terminal device notifies the driver of the approach of the vehicle on which the other terminal device is mounted by receiving a packet signal from the other terminal device. The terminal device also acquires a change schedule included in the packet signal from the base station device 10 and notifies the driver of a change in the lighting color of the traffic light 16. The driver knows that the pedestrian can cross the pedestrian crossing by recognizing the change in the lighting color to red. As described above, the terminal device is also carried by a pedestrian. Such a terminal device is different from the terminal device mounted on the vehicle 12 in the following points. One is that it has a short-range wireless communication function, and the other is that it does not have a function for notifying the contents of a received packet signal.
図2は、基地局装置10の構成を示す。基地局装置10は、アンテナ20、RF部22、変復調部24、処理部26、制御部30、ネットワーク通信部36を含む。処理部26は、取得部32、再取得部34、決定部38、信号機IF部48、フレーム規定部40、選択部42、生成部46を含む。
FIG. 2 shows the configuration of the base station apparatus 10. The base station apparatus 10 includes an antenna 20, an RF unit 22, a modem unit 24, a processing unit 26, a control unit 30, and a network communication unit 36. The processing unit 26 includes an acquisition unit 32, a re-acquisition unit 34, a determination unit 38, a traffic signal IF unit 48, a frame definition unit 40, a selection unit 42, and a generation unit 46.
RF部22は、受信処理として、図示しない端末装置や他の基地局装置10からのパケット信号をアンテナ20にて受信する。RF部22は、受信した無線周波数のパケット信号に対して周波数変換を実行し、ベースバンドのパケット信号を生成する。さらに、RF部22は、ベースバンドのパケット信号を変復調部24に出力する。一般的に、ベースバンドのパケット信号は、同相成分と直交成分によって形成されるので、ふたつの信号線が示されるべきであるが、ここでは、図を明瞭にするためにひとつの信号線だけを示すものとする。RF部22には、LNA(Low Noise Amplifier)、ミキサ、AGC、A/D変換部も含まれる。
The RF unit 22 receives a packet signal from a terminal device (not shown) or another base station device 10 by the antenna 20 as a reception process. The RF unit 22 performs frequency conversion on the received radio frequency packet signal to generate a baseband packet signal. Further, the RF unit 22 outputs a baseband packet signal to the modem unit 24. In general, baseband packet signals are formed by in-phase and quadrature components, so two signal lines should be shown, but here only one signal line is shown for clarity. Shall be shown. The RF unit 22 also includes an LNA (Low Noise Amplifier), a mixer, an AGC, and an A / D conversion unit.
RF部22は、送信処理として、変復調部24から入力したベースバンドのパケット信号に対して周波数変換を実行し、無線周波数のパケット信号を生成する。さらに、RF部22は、路車送信期間において、無線周波数のパケット信号をアンテナ20から送信する。また、RF部22には、PA(Power Amplifier)、ミキサ、D/A変換部も含まれる。
The RF unit 22 performs frequency conversion on the baseband packet signal input from the modem unit 24 as a transmission process, and generates a radio frequency packet signal. Further, the RF unit 22 transmits a radio frequency packet signal from the antenna 20 during the road-vehicle transmission period. The RF unit 22 also includes a PA (Power Amplifier), a mixer, and a D / A conversion unit.
変復調部24は、受信処理として、RF部22からのベースバンドのパケット信号に対して、復調を実行する。さらに、変復調部24は、復調した結果を処理部26に出力する。また、変復調部24は、送信処理として、処理部26からのデータに対して、変調を実行する。さらに、変復調部24は、変調した結果をベースバンドのパケット信号としてRF部22に出力する。ここで、通信システム100は、OFDM(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)変調方式に対応するので、変復調部24は、受信処理としてFFT(Fast Fourier Transform)も実行し、送信処理としてIFFT(Inverse Fast Fourier Transform)も実行する。
The modem unit 24 demodulates the baseband packet signal from the RF unit 22 as a reception process. Further, the modem unit 24 outputs the demodulated result to the processing unit 26. The modem unit 24 also modulates the data from the processing unit 26 as a transmission process. Further, the modem unit 24 outputs the modulated result to the RF unit 22 as a baseband packet signal. Here, since the communication system 100 corresponds to the OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) modulation method, the modem unit 24 also executes FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) as reception processing and IFFT (Inverse TransFastFast) as transmission processing. Also execute.
フレーム規定部40は、図示しないGPS衛星からの信号を受信し、受信した信号をもとに時刻の情報を取得する。なお、時刻の情報の取得には公知の技術が使用されればよいので、ここでは説明を省略する。フレーム規定部40は、時刻の情報をもとに、複数のフレームを生成する。例えば、フレーム規定部40は、時刻の情報にて示されたタイミングを基準にして、「1sec」の期間を10分割することによって、「100msec」のフレームを10個生成する。このような処理を繰り返すことによって、フレームが繰り返されるように規定される。なお、フレーム規定部40は、復調結果から制御情報を検出し、検出した制御情報をもとにフレームを生成してもよい。このような処理は、他の基地局装置10によって形成されたフレームのタイミングに同期したフレームを生成することに相当する。図3(a)-(d)は、通信システム100において規定されるフレームのフォーマットを示す。図3(a)は、フレームの構成を示す。フレームは、第1サブフレームから第Nサブフレームと示されるN個のサブフレームによって形成されている。例えば、フレームの長さが100msecであり、Nが8である場合、12.5msecの長さのサブフレームが規定される。図3(b)-(d)の説明は、後述し、図2に戻る。
The frame defining unit 40 receives a signal from a GPS satellite (not shown), and acquires time information based on the received signal. In addition, since a well-known technique should just be used for acquisition of the information of time, description is abbreviate | omitted here. The frame defining unit 40 generates a plurality of frames based on the time information. For example, the frame defining unit 40 generates 10 frames of “100 msec” by dividing the period of “1 sec” into 10 on the basis of the timing indicated by the time information. By repeating such processing, the frame is defined to be repeated. Note that the frame defining unit 40 may detect the control information from the demodulation result and generate a frame based on the detected control information. Such processing corresponds to generating a frame synchronized with the timing of the frame formed by another base station apparatus 10. FIGS. 3A to 3D show frame formats defined in the communication system 100. FIG. FIG. 3A shows the structure of the frame. The frame is formed of N subframes indicated as the first subframe to the Nth subframe. For example, when the frame length is 100 msec and N is 8, a subframe having a length of 12.5 msec is defined. The description of FIGS. 3B to 3D will be described later, and returns to FIG.
選択部42は、フレームに含まれた複数のサブフレームのうち、路車送信期間を設定すべきサブフレームを選択する。具体的に説明すると、選択部42は、フレーム規定部40にて規定されたフレームを受けつける。選択部42は、RF部22、変復調部24を介して、図示しない他の基地局装置10あるいは端末装置からの復調結果を入力する。選択部42は、入力した復調結果のうち、他の基地局装置10からの復調結果を抽出する。選択部42は、復調結果を受けつけたサブフレームを特定することによって、復調結果を受けつけていないサブフレームを特定する。これは、他の基地局装置10によって路車送信期間が設定されていないサブフレーム、つまり未使用のサブフレームを特定することに相当する。未使用のサブフレームが複数存在する場合、選択部42は、ランダムにひとつのサブフレームを選択する。未使用のサブフレームが存在しない場合、つまり複数のサブフレームのそれぞれが使用されている場合に、選択部42は、復調結果に対応した受信電力を取得し、受信電力の小さいサブフレームを優先的に選択する。
The selection unit 42 selects a subframe in which a road and vehicle transmission period is to be set from among a plurality of subframes included in the frame. More specifically, the selection unit 42 receives a frame defined by the frame defining unit 40. The selection unit 42 inputs a demodulation result from another base station device 10 or a terminal device (not shown) via the RF unit 22 and the modem unit 24. The selection unit 42 extracts a demodulation result from another base station apparatus 10 from the input demodulation results. The selection unit 42 identifies the subframe that has not received the demodulation result by specifying the subframe that has received the demodulation result. This corresponds to specifying a subframe in which the road and vehicle transmission period is not set by another base station apparatus 10, that is, an unused subframe. When there are a plurality of unused subframes, the selection unit 42 selects one subframe at random. When there are no unused subframes, that is, when each of a plurality of subframes is used, the selection unit 42 acquires reception power corresponding to the demodulation result, and gives priority to subframes with low reception power. Select
図3(b)は、第1基地局装置10aによって生成されるフレームの構成を示す。第1基地局装置10aは、第1サブフレームの先頭部分に路車送信期間を設定する。また、第1基地局装置10aは、第1サブフレームにおいて路車送信期間につづいて車車送信期間を設定する。車車送信期間とは、端末装置がパケット信号を報知可能な期間である。つまり、第1サブフレームの先頭期間である路車送信期間において第1基地局装置10aはパケット信号を報知可能であり、かつフレームのうち、路車送信期間以外の車車送信期間において端末装置がパケット信号を報知可能であるような規定がなされる。さらに、第1基地局装置10aは、第2サブフレームから第Nサブフレームに車車送信期間のみを設定する。
FIG. 3B shows a configuration of a frame generated by the first base station apparatus 10a. The first base station apparatus 10a sets a road and vehicle transmission period at the beginning of the first subframe. Moreover, the 1st base station apparatus 10a sets a vehicle transmission period following the road and vehicle transmission period in a 1st sub-frame. The vehicle transmission period is a period during which the terminal device can notify the packet signal. That is, in the road and vehicle transmission period which is the head period of the first subframe, the first base station apparatus 10a can notify the packet signal, and in the frame, the terminal apparatus transmits in the vehicle and vehicle transmission period other than the road and vehicle transmission period. It is defined that the packet signal can be broadcast. Furthermore, the first base station apparatus 10a sets only the vehicle transmission period from the second subframe to the Nth subframe.
図3(c)は、第2基地局装置10bによって生成されるフレームの構成を示す。第2基地局装置10bは、第2サブフレームの先頭部分に路車送信期間を設定する。また、第2基地局装置10bは、第2サブフレームにおける路車送信期間の後段、第1サブフレーム、第3サブフレームから第Nサブフレームに車車送信期間を設定する。図3(d)は、第3基地局装置10cによって生成されるフレームの構成を示す。第3基地局装置10cは、第3サブフレームの先頭部分に路車送信期間を設定する。また、第3基地局装置10cは、第3サブフレームにおける路車送信期間の後段、第1サブフレーム、第2サブフレーム、第4サブフレームから第Nサブフレームに車車送信期間を設定する。このように、複数の基地局装置10は、互いに異なったサブフレームを選択し、選択したサブフレームの先頭部分に路車送信期間を設定する。図2に戻る。選択部42は、選択したサブフレームの番号を生成部46へ出力する。
FIG. 3C shows a configuration of a frame generated by the second base station apparatus 10b. The second base station apparatus 10b sets a road and vehicle transmission period at the beginning of the second subframe. Also, the second base station apparatus 10b sets the vehicle transmission period from the first stage of the road and vehicle transmission period in the second subframe, from the first subframe and the third subframe to the Nth subframe. FIG. 3D shows a configuration of a frame generated by the third base station apparatus 10c. The third base station apparatus 10c sets a road and vehicle transmission period at the beginning of the third subframe. In addition, the third base station apparatus 10c sets the vehicle transmission period from the first stage of the road and vehicle transmission period in the third subframe, the first subframe, the second subframe, and the fourth subframe to the Nth subframe. As described above, the plurality of base station apparatuses 10 select different subframes, and set the road and vehicle transmission period at the head portion of the selected subframe. Returning to FIG. The selection unit 42 outputs the selected subframe number to the generation unit 46.
生成部46は、選択部42から受けつけたサブフレーム番号のサブフレームに路車送信期間を設定し、路車送信期間において報知すべきRSUパケット信号を生成する。なお、以下の説明において、RSUパケット信号とパケット信号とは区別せずに使用される。図4(a)-(b)は、サブフレームの構成を示す。図4(a)は、路車送信期間が設定されたサブフレームを示す。図示のごとく、ひとつのサブフレームは、路車送信期間、車車送信期間の順に構成される。図4(b)は、路車送信期間におけるパケット信号の配置を示す。図示のごとく、路車送信期間において、複数のRSUパケット信号が並べられている。ここで、前後のパケット信号は、SIFS(Short Interframe Space)だけ離れている。
The generation unit 46 sets a road and vehicle transmission period in the subframe of the subframe number received from the selection unit 42, and generates an RSU packet signal to be notified during the road and vehicle transmission period. In the following description, the RSU packet signal and the packet signal are used without distinction. FIGS. 4A to 4B show subframe configurations. FIG. 4A shows a subframe in which a road and vehicle transmission period is set. As illustrated, one subframe is configured in the order of a road and vehicle transmission period and a vehicle and vehicle transmission period. FIG. 4B shows the arrangement of packet signals during the road and vehicle transmission period. As illustrated, a plurality of RSU packet signals are arranged in the road and vehicle transmission period. Here, the front and rear packet signals are separated by SIFS (Short Interframe Space).
ここでは、RSUパケット信号の構成を説明する。図5(a)-(b)は、通信システム100において規定されるパケット信号に格納されるMACフレームのフォーマットを示す。図5(a)は、MACフレームのフォーマットを示す。MACフレームは、先頭から順に、「MACヘッダ」、「LLCヘッダ」、「メッセージヘッダ」、「データペイロード」、「FCS」を配置する。データペイロードに含まれる情報については、後述する。図5(b)は、生成部46によって生成されるメッセージヘッダの構成を示す図である。メッセージヘッダには、基本部分が含まれている。
Here, the configuration of the RSU packet signal will be described. 5A and 5B show the format of a MAC frame stored in a packet signal defined in the communication system 100. FIG. FIG. 5A shows the format of the MAC frame. In the MAC frame, “MAC header”, “LLC header”, “message header”, “data payload”, and “FCS” are arranged in order from the top. Information included in the data payload will be described later. FIG. 5B is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a message header generated by the generation unit 46. The message header includes a basic part.
基本部分は、「プロトコルバージョン」、「送信ノード種別」、「再利用回数」、「TSFタイマ」、「RSU送信期間長」を含む。プロトコルバージョンは、対応しているプロトコルのバージョンを示す。送信ノード種別は、MACフレームが含まれたパケット信号の送信元を示す。例えば、「0」は端末装置を示し、「1」は基地局装置10を示す。選択部42が、入力した復調結果のうち、他の基地局装置10からの復調結果を抽出する場合に、選択部42は、送信ノード種別の値を利用する。再利用回数は、メッセージヘッダが端末装置によって転送される場合の有効性の指標を示し、TSFタイマは、送信時刻を示す。RSU送信期間長は、路車送信期間の長さを示しており、路車送信期間に関する情報といえる。図2に戻る。
The basic part includes “protocol version”, “transmission node type”, “number of reuses”, “TSF timer”, and “RSU transmission period length”. The protocol version indicates the version of the corresponding protocol. The transmission node type indicates the transmission source of the packet signal including the MAC frame. For example, “0” indicates a terminal device, and “1” indicates the base station device 10. When the selection unit 42 extracts a demodulation result from another base station apparatus 10 from among the input demodulation results, the selection unit 42 uses the value of the transmission node type. The reuse count indicates an index of validity when the message header is transferred by the terminal device, and the TSF timer indicates the transmission time. The RSU transmission period length indicates the length of the road and vehicle transmission period, and can be said to be information relating to the road and vehicle transmission period. Returning to FIG.
ネットワーク通信部36は、図示しないネットワーク202に接続される。ネットワーク通信部36は、ネットワーク202から、渋滞情報を受けつける。生成部46は、ネットワーク通信部36から、渋滞情報を取得し、データペイロードに格納することによって、前述のRSUパケット信号を生成する。
The network communication unit 36 is connected to a network 202 (not shown). The network communication unit 36 receives traffic jam information from the network 202. The generation unit 46 acquires the traffic jam information from the network communication unit 36 and stores it in the data payload, thereby generating the RSU packet signal described above.
取得部32は、図示しないリーダライタ18に接続される。前述のごとく、リーダライタ18は、近距離無線通信によって、歩行者に携帯された端末装置と通信する。取得部32は、リーダライタ18を介して、近距離無線通信の機能を備えた端末装置から、当該端末装置に関する情報を取得する。端末装置に関する情報の一例は、端末装置のIDや歩行者の情報であり、歩行者の情報とは、歩行者の生年月日等の年齢を特定可能な情報を含む。取得部32は、取得した情報を決定部38と再取得部34へ出力する。
The acquisition unit 32 is connected to a reader / writer 18 (not shown). As described above, the reader / writer 18 communicates with a terminal device carried by a pedestrian by short-range wireless communication. The acquisition unit 32 acquires information related to the terminal device from the terminal device having a short-range wireless communication function via the reader / writer 18. An example of the information regarding the terminal device is the ID of the terminal device or pedestrian information, and the pedestrian information includes information that can specify the age of the pedestrian, such as the date of birth. The acquisition unit 32 outputs the acquired information to the determination unit 38 and the re-acquisition unit 34.
信号機IF部48は、図示しない信号機16に接続される。ここで、信号機16は、複数であってもよい。信号機IF部48は、信号機16から、各点灯色を点灯させるスケジュールを受けつける。これは、前述の変化予定であり、信号機16は、変化予定に応じて、点灯色を変えながら点灯する。例えば、変化予定では、時刻と点灯色との対応が示されている。ひとつの交差点に複数の信号機16が設置されている場合、それらの変化予定は互いに対応する。
The signal IF unit 48 is connected to a signal 16 (not shown). Here, a plurality of traffic lights 16 may be provided. The traffic light IF unit 48 receives a schedule for lighting each lighting color from the traffic light 16. This is the above-described change schedule, and the traffic light 16 is lit while changing the lighting color in accordance with the change schedule. For example, the change schedule shows the correspondence between the time and the lighting color. When a plurality of traffic lights 16 are installed at one intersection, their change schedules correspond to each other.
例えば、ひとつの車道に対する信号機16の点灯色が青色である場合、これと交差する車道に対する信号機16の点灯色が赤色である。そのため、変化予定には、ひとつの交差点に設置されている複数の信号機16に対するスケジュールがまとめられていてもよい。さらに、変化予定には、ひとつの交差点に限らず、連動して動作させるべき複数の信号機16に対するスケジュールがまとめられていてもよい。信号機IF部48は、後述の決定部38から変化予定を受けつけた場合、当該変化予定を各信号機16へ出力する。これは、変化予定に応じた動作を各信号機16に指示することに相当する。
For example, when the lighting color of the traffic light 16 for one roadway is blue, the lighting color of the traffic light 16 for the roadway intersecting this is red. Therefore, the schedule for a plurality of traffic lights 16 installed at one intersection may be collected in the change schedule. Further, the change schedule may include a schedule for a plurality of traffic lights 16 to be operated in conjunction with each other, not limited to one intersection. When the traffic signal IF unit 48 receives a change schedule from the determination unit 38 described later, the traffic signal IF unit 48 outputs the change schedule to each traffic signal 16. This corresponds to instructing each traffic light 16 to perform an operation according to the change schedule.
決定部38は、信号機IF部48から、変化予定を受けつけるとともに、取得部32から、端末装置に関する情報も受けつける。決定部38は、取得部32において取得した情報をもとに、受けつけた変化予定を変更するように、新たな変化予定を決定する。例えば、歩行者が横断予定の横断歩道を横切る車道に対する信号機16の赤色の点灯期間を延長するように、新たな変化予定が決定される。その際、決定部38は、取得した情報の内容に応じて信号機の各点灯色による点灯間隔が変わるように、変化予定を決定してもよい。例えば、歩行者の年齢が70歳よりも上であれば、そうでない場合と比較して、歩行者が横断予定の横断歩道を横切る車道に対する信号機16の赤色の点灯期間をさらに長くする。決定部38は、決定した変化予定を信号機IF部48に出力するとともに、生成部46に出力する。
The determination unit 38 receives the change schedule from the traffic signal IF unit 48 and also receives information related to the terminal device from the acquisition unit 32. The determination unit 38 determines a new change schedule based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit 32 so as to change the accepted change schedule. For example, a new change schedule is determined so as to extend the red lighting period of the traffic light 16 for the roadway where the pedestrian crosses the pedestrian crossing scheduled to cross. In that case, the determination part 38 may determine a change schedule so that the lighting interval by each lighting color of a traffic light may change according to the content of the acquired information. For example, if the age of the pedestrian is older than 70, the red lighting period of the traffic light 16 for the roadway that the pedestrian crosses the pedestrian crossing scheduled to cross is further increased. The determination unit 38 outputs the determined change schedule to the traffic signal IF unit 48 and also outputs it to the generation unit 46.
生成部46は、決定部38から変化予定を受けつけ、データペイロードに格納することによって、前述のRSUパケット信号を生成する。このようなパケット信号は、変復調部24、RF部22から報知されるので、変化予定によって運転者に対して歩行者の存在を知らしめる。再取得部34は、取得部32と同様に、図示しないリーダライタ18に接続される。再取得部34は、取得部32から、端末装置に関する情報を受けつける。また、再取得部34は、取得部32が情報を取得してから一定期間内に、同一の端末装置14から当該端末装置14に関する情報を再取得した場合、当該情報を決定部38へ出力する。ここで、取得部32が情報を受けつけるリーダライタ18と、再取得部34が情報を受けつけるリーダライタ18とは、互いに異なっている。例えば、取得部32が第1リーダライタ18aから情報を受けつけた場合、再取得部34は第2リーダライタ18bから情報を受けつけている。
The generating unit 46 receives the change schedule from the determining unit 38 and stores it in the data payload, thereby generating the RSU packet signal described above. Since such a packet signal is notified from the modem unit 24 and the RF unit 22, the driver is informed of the presence of a pedestrian according to the change schedule. Similar to the acquisition unit 32, the reacquisition unit 34 is connected to a reader / writer 18 (not shown). The reacquisition unit 34 receives information related to the terminal device from the acquisition unit 32. The reacquisition unit 34 outputs the information to the determination unit 38 when the information about the terminal device 14 is reacquired from the same terminal device 14 within a certain period after the acquisition unit 32 acquires the information. . Here, the reader / writer 18 from which the acquisition unit 32 receives information and the reader / writer 18 from which the re-acquisition unit 34 receives information are different from each other. For example, when the acquisition unit 32 receives information from the first reader / writer 18a, the re-acquisition unit 34 receives information from the second reader / writer 18b.
決定部38は、信号機IF部48から、変化予定を受けつけるとともに、再取得部34から、端末装置に関する情報も受けつける。同一の端末装置に関する情報を取得部32と再取得部34とから受けつけることによって、決定部38は、歩行者が横断歩道を横断し終えたことを認識する。決定部38は、再取得部34において再取得した情報をもとに、信号機16の点灯色の変化予定を再決定する。例えば、歩行者が横断予定の横断歩道を横切る車道に対する信号機16の赤色の点灯期間を短縮するように、新たな変化予定が再決定される。
The determination unit 38 receives a change schedule from the traffic signal IF unit 48 and also receives information related to the terminal device from the reacquisition unit 34. By receiving information about the same terminal device from the acquisition unit 32 and the re-acquisition unit 34, the determination unit 38 recognizes that the pedestrian has crossed the pedestrian crossing. Based on the information reacquired by the reacquisition unit 34, the determination unit 38 re-determines the lighting color change schedule of the traffic light 16. For example, a new change schedule is re-determined so as to shorten the red lighting period of the traffic light 16 for the roadway where the pedestrian crosses the pedestrian crossing scheduled to cross.
なお、決定部38は、取得部32から、端末装置に関する情報も受けつけた後、一定期間経過しても、再取得部34からの情報を受けつけなければ、決定部38は、信号機16の点灯色の変化予定を再決定してもよい。これは、歩行者が横断歩道に進入する際に端末装置を第1リーダライタ18aにかざしたが、歩行者が横断歩道から退出する際に端末装置を第2リーダライタ18bにかざさなかった場合に相当する。決定部38は、決定した変化予定を信号機IF部48に出力するとともに、生成部46に出力する。生成部46は、決定部38から再決定した変化予定を受けつけ、データペイロードに格納することによって、前述のRSUパケット信号を生成する。このようなパケット信号は、変復調部24、RF部22から報知されるので、変化予定によって運転者に対して歩行者の横断終了を知らしめる。制御部30は、基地局装置10全体の処理を制御する。
If the determination unit 38 does not receive information from the re-acquisition unit 34 after a certain period of time has passed after receiving information about the terminal device from the acquisition unit 32, the determination unit 38 determines the lighting color of the traffic light 16. The change schedule may be redetermined. This is when the terminal device is held over the first reader / writer 18a when the pedestrian enters the pedestrian crossing, but the terminal device is not held over the second reader / writer 18b when the pedestrian leaves the pedestrian crossing. Equivalent to. The determination unit 38 outputs the determined change schedule to the traffic signal IF unit 48 and also outputs it to the generation unit 46. The generation unit 46 receives the re-decided change schedule from the determination unit 38 and stores it in the data payload, thereby generating the RSU packet signal described above. Since such a packet signal is notified from the modem unit 24 and the RF unit 22, the driver is notified of the end of the pedestrian crossing according to the change schedule. The control unit 30 controls processing of the entire base station apparatus 10.
この構成は、ハードウエア的には、任意のコンピュータのCPU、メモリ、その他のLSIで実現でき、ソフトウエア的にはメモリにロードされたプログラムなどによって実現されるが、ここではそれらの連携によって実現される機能ブロックを描いている。したがって、これらの機能ブロックがハードウエアのみ、ソフトウエアのみ、またはそれらの組合せによっていろいろな形で実現できることは、当業者には理解されるところである。
This configuration can be realized in terms of hardware by a CPU, memory, or other LSI of any computer, and in terms of software, it can be realized by a program loaded in the memory, but here it is realized by their cooperation. Draw functional blocks. Accordingly, those skilled in the art will understand that these functional blocks can be realized in various forms by hardware only, software only, or a combination thereof.
図6は、歩行者に携帯された端末装置14の構成を示す。端末装置14は、第1無線通信部80、第2無線通信部82、制御部84を含む。第1無線通信部80は、アンテナ50、RF部52、変復調部54、処理部56を含む。処理部56は、生成部64、タイミング特定部60、転送決定部70、取得部72を含む。また、タイミング特定部60は、抽出部66、キャリアセンス部68を含む。アンテナ50、RF部52、変復調部54は、図2のアンテナ20、RF部22、変復調部24と同様の処理を実行する。そのため、ここでは、差異を中心に説明する。
FIG. 6 shows the configuration of the terminal device 14 carried by a pedestrian. The terminal device 14 includes a first wireless communication unit 80, a second wireless communication unit 82, and a control unit 84. The first wireless communication unit 80 includes an antenna 50, an RF unit 52, a modem unit 54, and a processing unit 56. The processing unit 56 includes a generation unit 64, a timing identification unit 60, a transfer determination unit 70, and an acquisition unit 72. The timing specifying unit 60 includes an extraction unit 66 and a carrier sense unit 68. The antenna 50, the RF unit 52, and the modem unit 54 execute the same processing as the antenna 20, the RF unit 22, and the modem unit 24 in FIG. Therefore, here, the difference will be mainly described.
第2無線通信部82は、近距離無線通信を実行する。近距離無線通信は、車車間通信や路車間通信よりも通信可能領域が狭い通信であり、これには、公知の技術が使用されればよいので、ここでは説明を省略する。第2無線通信部82は、前述の端末装置14に関する情報を保持しており、近距離無線通信を実行すると、図示しないリーダライタ18へ、端末装置14に関する情報を送信する。第2無線通信部82は、歩行者が横断歩道に進入する場合に、図示しないリーダライタ18の間で通信を実行する。また、第2無線通信部82は、歩行者が横断歩道から退出する場合にも、図示しないリーダライタ18の間で通信を実行してもよい。第2無線通信部82は、歩行者が横断歩道に進入する場合に通信を実行した旨、歩行者が横断歩道から退出する場合に通信を実行した旨を制御部84に出力する。
The second wireless communication unit 82 performs short-range wireless communication. Short-range wireless communication is communication in which the communicable area is narrower than vehicle-to-vehicle communication or road-to-vehicle communication, and a known technique may be used for this, and thus description thereof is omitted here. The second wireless communication unit 82 holds information related to the terminal device 14 described above, and transmits information related to the terminal device 14 to the reader / writer 18 (not shown) when short-range wireless communication is executed. The second wireless communication unit 82 performs communication between the reader / writer 18 (not shown) when a pedestrian enters the pedestrian crossing. Further, the second wireless communication unit 82 may execute communication between the reader / writer 18 (not shown) even when the pedestrian leaves the pedestrian crossing. The second wireless communication unit 82 outputs to the control unit 84 that the communication has been performed when the pedestrian enters the pedestrian crossing and that the communication has been performed when the pedestrian has left the pedestrian crossing.
変復調部54、処理部56は、図示しない他の端末装置14や基地局装置10からのパケット信号を受信する。なお、前述のごとく、変復調部54、処理部56は、路車送信期間において、基地局装置10からのパケット信号を受信する。前述のごとく、変復調部54、処理部56は、車車送信期間において、他の端末装置14からのパケット信号を受信する。なお、変復調部54、処理部56は、低消費電力化を実現するために、車車送信期間における受信を停止してもよい。
The modem unit 54 and the processing unit 56 receive packet signals from other terminal devices 14 and the base station device 10 (not shown). As described above, the modem unit 54 and the processing unit 56 receive the packet signal from the base station apparatus 10 during the road and vehicle transmission period. As described above, the modem unit 54 and the processing unit 56 receive packet signals from other terminal devices 14 during the vehicle transmission period. Note that the modem unit 54 and the processing unit 56 may stop reception during the vehicle transmission period in order to achieve low power consumption.
抽出部66は、変復調部54からの復調結果が、図示しない基地局装置10からのパケット信号である場合に、路車送信期間が配置されたサブフレームのタイミングを特定する。その際、抽出部66は、図1のエリア212内に存在すると推定する。抽出部66は、サブフレームのタイミングと、パケット信号のメッセージヘッダの内容、具体的には、RSU送信期間長の内容をもとに、フレームを生成する。なお、フレームの生成は、前述のフレーム規定部40と同様になされればよいので、ここでは説明を省略する。その結果、抽出部66は、基地局装置10において形成されたフレームに同期したフレームを生成する。
When the demodulation result from the modem unit 54 is a packet signal from the base station device 10 (not shown), the extraction unit 66 specifies the timing of the subframe in which the road-vehicle transmission period is arranged. At that time, the extraction unit 66 estimates that it exists in the area 212 of FIG. The extraction unit 66 generates a frame based on the timing of the subframe and the content of the message header of the packet signal, specifically, the content of the RSU transmission period length. Note that the generation of the frame only needs to be performed in the same manner as the frame defining unit 40 described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. As a result, the extraction unit 66 generates a frame synchronized with the frame formed in the base station apparatus 10.
一方、抽出部66は、RSUパケット信号を受信していない場合、図1のエリア外214に存在すると推定する。抽出部66は、エリア212に存在していることを推定した場合、車車送信期間を選択する。抽出部66は、エリア外214に存在していることを推定すると、フレームの構成と無関係のタイミングを選択する。抽出部66は、車車送信期間を選択した場合、フレームおよびサブフレームのタイミング、車車送信期間に関する情報をキャリアセンス部68へ出力する。抽出部66は、フレームの構成と無関係のタイミングを選択すると、キャリアセンスの実行をキャリアセンス部68に指示する。
On the other hand, when the extraction unit 66 has not received the RSU packet signal, the extraction unit 66 estimates that the extraction unit 66 exists outside the area 214 in FIG. When it is estimated that the extraction unit 66 exists in the area 212, the extraction unit 66 selects the vehicle transmission period. When it is estimated that the extraction unit 66 exists outside the area 214, the extraction unit 66 selects a timing unrelated to the frame configuration. When the vehicle transmission period is selected, the extraction unit 66 outputs information on the frame and subframe timing and the vehicle transmission period to the carrier sense unit 68. When selecting the timing unrelated to the frame configuration, the extraction unit 66 instructs the carrier sense unit 68 to execute carrier sense.
キャリアセンス部68は、抽出部66から、フレームおよびサブフレームのタイミング、車車送信期間に関する情報を受けつける。キャリアセンス部68は、車車送信期間において、キャリアセンスを実行することによって、干渉電力を測定する。また、キャリアセンス部68は、干渉電力をもとに、車車送信期間における送信タイミングを決定する。具体的に説明すると、キャリアセンス部68は、所定のしきい値を予め記憶しており、干渉電力としきい値とを比較する。干渉電力がしきい値よりも小さければ、キャリアセンス部68は、送信タイミングを決定する。キャリアセンス部68は、抽出部66から、キャリアセンスの実行を指示された場合、フレームの構成を考慮せずに、CSMAを実行することによって、送信タイミングを決定する。キャリアセンス部68は、決定した送信タイミングを生成部64へ通知する。
The carrier sense unit 68 receives information on the timing of frames and subframes and the vehicle transmission period from the extraction unit 66. The carrier sense unit 68 measures the interference power by performing carrier sense during the vehicle transmission period. Moreover, the carrier sense part 68 determines the transmission timing in a vehicle transmission period based on interference power. More specifically, the carrier sense unit 68 stores a predetermined threshold value in advance, and compares the interference power with the threshold value. If the interference power is smaller than the threshold value, the carrier sense unit 68 determines the transmission timing. When receiving the carrier sense execution instruction from the extraction unit 66, the carrier sense unit 68 determines the transmission timing by executing the CSMA without considering the frame configuration. The carrier sense unit 68 notifies the generation unit 64 of the determined transmission timing.
取得部72は、図示しないGPS受信機、ジャイロセンサ、車速センサ等を含んでおり、それらから供給されるデータによって、端末装置14の存在位置、進行方向、移動速度等(以下、「位置情報」と総称する)を取得する。なお、存在位置は、緯度・経度によって示される。これらの取得には公知の技術が使用されればよいので、ここでは説明を省略する。取得部72は、位置情報を生成部64へ出力する。
The acquisition unit 72 includes a GPS receiver, a gyro sensor, a vehicle speed sensor, and the like (not shown), and based on data supplied from the GPS receiver, the presence position, the traveling direction, the moving speed, and the like (hereinafter, “position information”). Are collectively called). The existence position is indicated by latitude and longitude. Since a known technique may be used for these acquisitions, description thereof is omitted here. The acquisition unit 72 outputs the position information to the generation unit 64.
転送決定部70は、メッセージヘッダの転送を制御する。転送決定部70は、パケット信号からメッセージヘッダを抽出する。パケット信号が基地局装置10から直接送信されている場合には、再利用回数が「0」に設定されているが、パケット信号が他の端末装置14から送信されている場合には、再利用回数が「1以上」の値に設定されている。転送決定部70は、抽出したメッセージヘッダから、転送すべきメッセージヘッダを選択する。ここでは、例えば、再利用回数が最も小さいメッセージヘッダが選択される。また、転送決定部70は、複数のメッセージヘッダに含まれた内容を合成することによって新たなメッセージヘッダを生成してもよい。転送決定部70は、選択対象のメッセージヘッダを生成部64へ出力する。その際、転送決定部70は、再利用回数を「1」増加させる。
The transfer determination unit 70 controls the transfer of the message header. The transfer determining unit 70 extracts a message header from the packet signal. When the packet signal is directly transmitted from the base station apparatus 10, the reuse count is set to “0”. However, when the packet signal is transmitted from another terminal apparatus 14, the reuse is performed. The number of times is set to a value of “1 or more”. The transfer determination unit 70 selects a message header to be transferred from the extracted message header. Here, for example, the message header with the smallest number of reuses is selected. In addition, the transfer determination unit 70 may generate a new message header by combining the contents included in the plurality of message headers. The transfer determination unit 70 outputs the message header to be selected to the generation unit 64. At that time, the transfer determination unit 70 increases the number of reuses by “1”.
生成部64は、取得部72から位置情報を受けつけ、転送決定部70からメッセージヘッダを受けつける。生成部64は、図5(a)-(b)に示されたMACフレームを使用し、位置情報をデータペイロードに格納する。生成部64は、MACフレームが含まれたパケット信号を生成するとともに、キャリアセンス部68において決定した送信タイミングにて、変復調部54、RF部52、アンテナ50を介して、生成したパケット信号をブロードキャスト送信する。これは、車車間通信に相当する。なお、送信タイミングは、車車送信期間に含まれている。
The generation unit 64 receives position information from the acquisition unit 72 and receives a message header from the transfer determination unit 70. The generation unit 64 stores the position information in the data payload using the MAC frame shown in FIGS. The generation unit 64 generates a packet signal including a MAC frame, and broadcasts the generated packet signal via the modem unit 54, the RF unit 52, and the antenna 50 at the transmission timing determined by the carrier sense unit 68. Send. This corresponds to inter-vehicle communication. The transmission timing is included in the vehicle transmission period.
制御部84は、第1無線通信部80の動作と第2無線通信部82の動作とを制御する。制御部84は、通常、第1無線通信部80を動作させる。制御部84は、第2無線通信部82による通信が終了してから所定の期間が経過するまでの間、第1無線通信部80の動作を停止させる。具体的に説明すると、制御部84は、横断歩道に進入する場合に第2無線通信部82が通信してから、予め定められた期間が経過するまでの間、第1無線通信部80の動作を停止させる。これは、歩行者が横断歩道を横断している間にわたって、車車間通信を停止させることに相当する。予め定められた期間は、歩行者が横断歩道を横断するために必要とされる期間である。制御部84は、横断歩道から退出する場合に第2無線通信部82が通信した場合、予め定められた期間が経過していなくても、第1無線通信部80の動作を再開させる。これは、歩行者が横断歩道を横断し終えた場合に、車車間通信を再開させることに相当する。
The control unit 84 controls the operation of the first wireless communication unit 80 and the operation of the second wireless communication unit 82. The control unit 84 normally operates the first wireless communication unit 80. The control unit 84 stops the operation of the first wireless communication unit 80 until a predetermined period elapses after the communication by the second wireless communication unit 82 ends. Specifically, the control unit 84 operates the first wireless communication unit 80 until a predetermined period elapses after the second wireless communication unit 82 communicates when entering the pedestrian crossing. Stop. This is equivalent to stopping the inter-vehicle communication while the pedestrian crosses the pedestrian crossing. The predetermined period is a period required for the pedestrian to cross the pedestrian crossing. When the second wireless communication unit 82 communicates when leaving the pedestrian crossing, the control unit 84 resumes the operation of the first wireless communication unit 80 even if a predetermined period has not elapsed. This is equivalent to restarting inter-vehicle communication when a pedestrian has crossed a pedestrian crossing.
なお、車両12に搭載された端末装置14では、第2無線通信部82と制御部84とが含まれない。その代わりに、車両12に搭載された端末装置14は、通知部を含む。通知部は、路車送信期間において、図示しない基地局装置10からのパケット信号を取得するとともに、車車送信期間において、図示しない他の端末装置14からのパケット信号を取得する。通知部は、取得したパケット信号に対する処理として、パケット信号に格納されたデータの内容に応じて、図示しない他の車両12の接近等を運転者へモニタやスピーカを介して通知する。
The terminal device 14 mounted on the vehicle 12 does not include the second wireless communication unit 82 and the control unit 84. Instead, the terminal device 14 mounted on the vehicle 12 includes a notification unit. The notification unit acquires a packet signal from the base station device 10 (not shown) during the road-vehicle transmission period, and acquires a packet signal from another terminal device 14 (not shown) during the vehicle-vehicle transmission period. As a process for the acquired packet signal, the notification unit notifies the driver of the approach of another vehicle 12 (not shown) or the like via a monitor or a speaker according to the content of the data stored in the packet signal.
以上の構成による通信システム100の動作を説明する。図7は、通信システム100における通信手順を示すシーケンス図である。これは、歩行者が、横断歩道から退出する際に、端末装置14をリーダライタ18にかざさない場合に相当する。端末装置14は、パケット信号を報知し、基地局装置10は、パケット信号を受信する(S10)。歩行者が横断歩道をわたろうとして第1リーダライタ18aに端末装置14をかざすと、端末装置14は、第1リーダライタ18aと通信する(S12)。第1リーダライタ18aは、通信によって取得した情報を基地局装置10に通知する(S14)。端末装置14は、路車間通信および車車間通信を停止する(S16)。基地局装置10は、変化予定を決定し(S18)、変化予定が格納されたパケット信号を報知する(S20)。端末装置14は、第1リーダライタ18aとの間で通信してから一定期間経過したことを認識する(S22)。端末装置14は、パケット信号を報知し、基地局装置10は、パケット信号を受信する(S24)。
The operation of the communication system 100 configured as above will be described. FIG. 7 is a sequence diagram showing a communication procedure in the communication system 100. This corresponds to a case where the pedestrian does not hold the terminal device 14 over the reader / writer 18 when leaving the pedestrian crossing. The terminal device 14 broadcasts the packet signal, and the base station device 10 receives the packet signal (S10). When the pedestrian holds the terminal device 14 over the first reader / writer 18a to cross the pedestrian crossing, the terminal device 14 communicates with the first reader / writer 18a (S12). The first reader / writer 18a notifies the base station apparatus 10 of information acquired by communication (S14). The terminal device 14 stops road-to-vehicle communication and vehicle-to-vehicle communication (S16). The base station apparatus 10 determines the change schedule (S18) and broadcasts the packet signal storing the change schedule (S20). The terminal device 14 recognizes that a certain period has elapsed since the communication with the first reader / writer 18a (S22). The terminal device 14 broadcasts the packet signal, and the base station device 10 receives the packet signal (S24).
図8は、通信システム100における別の通信手順を示すシーケンス図である。端末装置14は、パケット信号を報知し、基地局装置10は、パケット信号を受信する(S50)。歩行者が横断歩道をわたろうとして第1リーダライタ18aに端末装置14をかざすと、端末装置14は、第1リーダライタ18aと通信する(S52)。第1リーダライタ18aは、通信によって取得した情報を基地局装置10に通知する(S54)。端末装置14は、路車間通信および車車間通信を停止する(S56)。基地局装置10は、変化予定を決定し(S58)、変化予定が格納されたパケット信号を報知する(S60)。歩行者が横断歩道をわたり終え、歩行者が第2リーダライタ18bに端末装置14をかざすと、端末装置14は、第2リーダライタ18bと通信する(S62)。第2リーダライタ18bは、通信によって取得した情報を基地局装置10に通知する(S64)。基地局装置10は、変化予定を決定し(S66)、変化予定が格納されたパケット信号を報知する(S68)。端末装置14は、パケット信号を報知し、基地局装置10は、パケット信号を受信する(S70)。
FIG. 8 is a sequence diagram showing another communication procedure in the communication system 100. The terminal device 14 broadcasts the packet signal, and the base station device 10 receives the packet signal (S50). When the pedestrian holds the terminal device 14 over the first reader / writer 18a to cross the pedestrian crossing, the terminal device 14 communicates with the first reader / writer 18a (S52). The first reader / writer 18a notifies the base station apparatus 10 of information acquired through communication (S54). The terminal device 14 stops road-to-vehicle communication and vehicle-to-vehicle communication (S56). The base station apparatus 10 determines the change schedule (S58) and broadcasts the packet signal storing the change schedule (S60). When the pedestrian finishes crossing the pedestrian crossing and the pedestrian holds the terminal device 14 over the second reader / writer 18b, the terminal device 14 communicates with the second reader / writer 18b (S62). The second reader / writer 18b notifies the base station apparatus 10 of information acquired through communication (S64). The base station apparatus 10 determines a change schedule (S66) and broadcasts a packet signal storing the change schedule (S68). The terminal device 14 broadcasts the packet signal, and the base station device 10 receives the packet signal (S70).
次に、本発明の変形例を説明する。本発明の変形例も、実施例と同様に、車車間通信を実行するとともに、路車間通信も実行する通信システムに関する。特に、歩行者に携帯され、かつ近距離無線通信機能を備えた端末装置に関する。実施例に係る端末装置は、横断歩道をわたっている期間にわたって、車車間通信と路車間通信の機能を停止させている。つまり、ITS送信が不要な場合に、ITSに必要な情報(以下、「ITS情報」という)の報知が停止されている。本変形例も、実施例と同様に、ITS送信が不要な場合にITS情報の報知を停止させることに関する。ここでは、会社、学校、病院、公共施設の利用を想定する。歩行者は、会社等に入る際に、近距離無線通信によって出勤を通知し、そのタイミングにてITS情報の報知が停止される。
Next, a modification of the present invention will be described. The modification of this invention is related with the communication system which also performs road-to-vehicle communication while performing vehicle-to-vehicle communication like an Example. In particular, the present invention relates to a terminal device that is carried by a pedestrian and has a short-range wireless communication function. The terminal device according to the embodiment stops the functions of vehicle-to-vehicle communication and road-to-vehicle communication over a period of crossing a pedestrian crossing. That is, when ITS transmission is unnecessary, notification of information necessary for ITS (hereinafter referred to as “ITS information”) is stopped. Similar to the embodiment, this modification also relates to stopping the notification of the ITS information when the ITS transmission is unnecessary. Here, the use of a company, a school, a hospital, or a public facility is assumed. When a pedestrian enters a company or the like, he / she notifies work by short-range wireless communication, and the notification of ITS information is stopped at that timing.
一方、歩行者は、会社等から出る際に、近距離無線通信によって退出を通知し、そのタイミングにてITS情報の報知が再開される。本発明の変形例に係る通信システム100は、図1と同様のタイプであり、基地局装置10は、図2と同様のタイプであり、端末装置14は、図6と同様のタイプである。なお、通信システム100には、リーダライタ18が含まれていなくてもよく、基地局装置10には、取得部32、再取得部34、決定部38、信号機IF部48が含まれていなくてもよい。以下では、差異を中心に説明する。
On the other hand, when the pedestrian leaves the office, the pedestrian notifies the exit by short-range wireless communication, and the ITS information is resumed at that timing. The communication system 100 according to the modification of the present invention is the same type as that in FIG. 1, the base station device 10 is the same type as that in FIG. 2, and the terminal device 14 is the same type as that in FIG. Note that the communication system 100 may not include the reader / writer 18, and the base station apparatus 10 does not include the acquisition unit 32, the reacquisition unit 34, the determination unit 38, and the traffic signal IF unit 48. Also good. Below, it demonstrates focusing on a difference.
通信システム100において、基地局装置10と端末装置14との間において、路車間通信が実行されるとともに、複数の端末装置14の間において、車車間通信が実行される。これらの処理は、実施例と同様であるので、ここでは説明を省略する。以下では、歩行者が、端末装置14を携帯しながら、会社等に出勤した際の処理を説明する。図9は、本発明の変形例に係る通信システム110の構成を示す。通信システム110は、端末装置14、リーダライタ18、管理装置150を含む。
In the communication system 100, road-to-vehicle communication is performed between the base station device 10 and the terminal device 14, and vehicle-to-vehicle communication is performed between the plurality of terminal devices 14. Since these processes are the same as those in the embodiment, description thereof is omitted here. Below, the process at the time of a pedestrian going to work etc., carrying the terminal device 14 is demonstrated. FIG. 9 shows a configuration of a communication system 110 according to a modification of the present invention. The communication system 110 includes a terminal device 14, a reader / writer 18, and a management device 150.
リーダライタ18は、会社の受付に設置される。リーダライタ18は、前述のごとく、近距離無線通信を実行するとともに、管理装置150に接続されている。歩行者は、端末装置14を携帯して出勤したときに、端末装置14をリーダライタ18にかざす。端末装置14とリーダライタ18との間で近距離無線通信が実行され、端末装置14に関する情報が、端末装置14からリーダライタ18を介して管理装置150に送信される。管理装置150は、端末装置14に関する情報を受けつけると、当該端末装置14を携帯した歩行者の出勤を登録する。端末装置14は、路車間通信および車車間通信を停止する。
The reader / writer 18 is installed at a company reception. As described above, the reader / writer 18 performs short-range wireless communication and is connected to the management device 150. When a pedestrian goes to work with the terminal device 14, the pedestrian holds the terminal device 14 over the reader / writer 18. Near field communication is performed between the terminal device 14 and the reader / writer 18, and information regarding the terminal device 14 is transmitted from the terminal device 14 to the management device 150 via the reader / writer 18. When the management device 150 receives information on the terminal device 14, the management device 150 registers the attendance of the pedestrian carrying the terminal device 14. The terminal device 14 stops road-to-vehicle communication and vehicle-to-vehicle communication.
一方、歩行者は、退出するときに、端末装置14をリーダライタ18にかざす。前述のごとく、端末装置14とリーダライタ18との間で近距離無線通信が実行され、端末装置14に関する情報が、端末装置14からリーダライタ18を介して管理装置150に送信される。管理装置150は、端末装置14に関する情報を受けつけると、当該端末装置14を携帯した歩行者の退出を登録する。端末装置14は、路車間通信および車車間通信を再開する。
On the other hand, the pedestrian holds the terminal device 14 over the reader / writer 18 when leaving. As described above, short-range wireless communication is performed between the terminal device 14 and the reader / writer 18, and information regarding the terminal device 14 is transmitted from the terminal device 14 to the management device 150 via the reader / writer 18. When the management device 150 receives information on the terminal device 14, the management device 150 registers the exit of the pedestrian carrying the terminal device 14. The terminal device 14 resumes road-to-vehicle communication and vehicle-to-vehicle communication.
管理装置150は、リーダライタ18を介して、端末装置14と通信することによって、端末装置14に関する情報を受けつける。管理装置150は、端末装置14に関する情報をもとに、端末装置14を携帯した歩行者の出勤状況を管理する。管理装置150は、歩行者の状態が退出になっている場合に、端末装置14に関する情報を受けつけると、歩行者の状態を出勤に変更する。また、管理装置150は、歩行者の状態が出勤になっている場合に、端末装置14に関する情報を受けつけると、歩行者の状態を退出に変更する。なお、リーダライタ18が、会社ではなく、学校、病院、公共施設に設置されてもよい。管理装置150は、リーダライタ18を設置した場所に応じた情報を管理する。例えば、出勤が、登校、受付等になる。
The management device 150 receives information related to the terminal device 14 by communicating with the terminal device 14 via the reader / writer 18. The management device 150 manages the attendance status of pedestrians who carry the terminal device 14 based on information regarding the terminal device 14. When the management device 150 receives information related to the terminal device 14 when the pedestrian's state is leaving, the management device 150 changes the pedestrian's state to work. In addition, when the management device 150 receives information on the terminal device 14 when the pedestrian's state is going to work, the management device 150 changes the pedestrian's state to withdrawal. Note that the reader / writer 18 may be installed in a school, a hospital, or a public facility instead of a company. The management device 150 manages information according to the place where the reader / writer 18 is installed. For example, attendance is going to school, reception, etc.
次に、本発明の別の変形例を説明する。本発明の別の変形例も、実施例と同様に、車車間通信を実行するとともに、路車間通信も実行する通信システムに関する。特に、歩行者に携帯され、かつ近距離無線通信機能を備えた端末装置に関する。実施例に係る端末装置は、横断歩道をわたっている期間にわたって、車車間通信と路車間通信の機能を停止させている。別の変形例も、実施例と同様に、ITS送信が不要な場合にITS情報の報知を停止させることに関する。ここでは、電車、バス、タクシー等の交通機関を利用する場合を想定する。歩行者は、電車等に乗車する際、近距離無線通信によって決済処理を実行するとともに、そのタイミングにてITS情報の報知が停止される。
Next, another modification of the present invention will be described. Another modification of the present invention also relates to a communication system that executes vehicle-to-vehicle communication and road-to-vehicle communication as in the embodiment. In particular, the present invention relates to a terminal device that is carried by a pedestrian and has a short-range wireless communication function. The terminal device according to the embodiment stops the functions of vehicle-to-vehicle communication and road-to-vehicle communication over a period of crossing a pedestrian crossing. Another modification also relates to stopping reporting of ITS information when ITS transmission is unnecessary, as in the embodiment. Here, it is assumed that transportation such as a train, a bus, and a taxi is used. When a pedestrian gets on a train or the like, the pedestrian executes a settlement process by short-range wireless communication, and the notification of the ITS information is stopped at that timing.
一方、歩行者は、電車等から降車する際、近距離無線通信によって決済処理を実行するとともに、ITS情報の報知が再開される。本発明の変形例に係る通信システム100は、図1と同様のタイプであり、基地局装置10は、図2と同様のタイプである。なお、通信システム100には、リーダライタ18が含まれていなくてもよく、基地局装置10には、取得部32、再取得部34、決定部38、信号機IF部48が含まれていなくてもよい。
On the other hand, when the pedestrian gets off the train, the pedestrian executes settlement processing by short-range wireless communication and the ITS information is resumed. The communication system 100 according to the modification of the present invention is the same type as that in FIG. 1, and the base station apparatus 10 is the same type as that in FIG. Note that the communication system 100 may not include the reader / writer 18, and the base station apparatus 10 does not include the acquisition unit 32, the reacquisition unit 34, the determination unit 38, and the traffic signal IF unit 48. Also good.
路車間通信および車車間通信について、ここでは説明を省略する。以下では、歩行者が、端末装置14を携帯しながら、電車を利用する際の処理を説明する。図10は、本発明の別の変形例に係る通信システム120の構成を示す。通信システム120は、端末装置14、改札機152、ネットワーク202、決済サーバ154を含み、改札機152は、リーダライタ18を含む。
Description of road-to-vehicle communication and vehicle-to-vehicle communication is omitted here. Below, the process at the time of a pedestrian using a train, carrying the terminal device 14 is demonstrated. FIG. 10 shows a configuration of a communication system 120 according to another modification of the present invention. The communication system 120 includes a terminal device 14, a ticket gate 152, a network 202, and a payment server 154, and the ticket gate 152 includes a reader / writer 18.
リーダライタ18は、改札機152に設置される。リーダライタ18は、前述のごとく、近距離無線通信を実行するとともに、管理装置150に接続されている。歩行者は、乗車のために、端末装置14を携帯して改札機152を通過するときに、端末装置14をリーダライタ18にかざす。端末装置14とリーダライタ18との間で近距離無線通信が実行されることによって、ネットワーク202を介して、端末装置14と決済サーバ154とは決済処理を実行する。決済処理には公知の技術が使用されればよいので、ここでは説明を省略する。その後、端末装置14は、路車間通信および車車間通信を停止する。
The reader / writer 18 is installed in the ticket gate 152. As described above, the reader / writer 18 performs short-range wireless communication and is connected to the management device 150. A pedestrian holds the terminal device 14 over the reader / writer 18 when carrying the terminal device 14 and passing through the ticket gate 152 for boarding. By performing short-range wireless communication between the terminal device 14 and the reader / writer 18, the terminal device 14 and the payment server 154 execute a payment process via the network 202. Since a publicly known technique may be used for the settlement process, the description is omitted here. Thereafter, the terminal device 14 stops road-to-vehicle communication and vehicle-to-vehicle communication.
一方、歩行者は、降車のために、端末装置14を携帯して別の改札機152を通過するときに、端末装置14をリーダライタ18にかざす。前述のごとく、端末装置14とリーダライタ18との間で近距離無線通信が実行されることによって、ネットワーク202を介して、端末装置14と決済サーバ154とは決済処理を実行する。端末装置14は、路車間通信および車車間通信を再開する。
On the other hand, the pedestrian holds the terminal device 14 over the reader / writer 18 when carrying the terminal device 14 and passing another ticket gate 152 for getting off. As described above, short-distance wireless communication is performed between the terminal device 14 and the reader / writer 18, whereby the terminal device 14 and the settlement server 154 perform settlement processing via the network 202. The terminal device 14 resumes road-to-vehicle communication and vehicle-to-vehicle communication.
決済サーバ154は、リーダライタ18、ネットワーク202を介して、端末装置14と通信することによって、端末装置14との間で運賃を決済する。決済サーバ154は、乗車の際に端末装置14との決済処理を実行することによって、歩行者の乗車駅を確認する。また、決済サーバ154は、降車の際に端末装置14との決済処理を実行することによって、歩行者の降車駅を確認する。さらに、決済サーバ154は、運賃のテーブルを予め記憶しており、当該テーブルをもとに、乗車駅から降車駅までの運賃を導出する。決済サーバ154は、歩行者の電子マネーから、導出した運賃に応じた金額を差し引く。
The settlement server 154 settles the fare with the terminal device 14 by communicating with the terminal device 14 via the reader / writer 18 and the network 202. The settlement server 154 confirms the pedestrian boarding station by executing a settlement process with the terminal device 14 when boarding. In addition, the settlement server 154 confirms the pedestrian exit station by executing a settlement process with the terminal device 14 when getting off. Furthermore, the settlement server 154 stores a fare table in advance, and derives the fare from the boarding station to the departure station based on the table. The settlement server 154 subtracts the amount corresponding to the derived fare from the pedestrian's electronic money.
図11は、端末装置14の構成を示す。端末装置14では、図6の端末装置14に、決済部86がさらに追加されている。決済部86は、第2無線通信部82を介して外部の決済サーバ154との間で通信を実行することによって、サービスの利用料金、つまり運賃を決済する。ここで、第2無線通信部82は、サービス提供エリアに進入する場合と、サービス提供エリアから退出する場合とにおいて通信を実行する。前者は、乗車の際に改札機152を通過することであり、後者は、後者の際に改札機152を通過することに相当する。制御部84は、乗車の際に改札機152を通過する場合に第2無線通信部82が通信してから、後者の際に改札機152を通過する場合に第2無線通信部82が通信するまでの間、第1無線通信部80の動作を停止させる。
FIG. 11 shows the configuration of the terminal device 14. In the terminal device 14, a settlement unit 86 is further added to the terminal device 14 of FIG. The settlement unit 86 performs a communication with the external settlement server 154 via the second wireless communication unit 82 to settle the service usage fee, that is, the fare. Here, the second wireless communication unit 82 performs communication when entering the service providing area and when leaving the service providing area. The former means passing through the ticket gate 152 when getting on, and the latter corresponds to passing through the ticket gate 152 during the latter. The control unit 84 communicates with the second wireless communication unit 82 when passing the ticket gate 152 when boarding, and then communicates with the second wireless communication unit 82 when passing the ticket gate 152 with the latter. In the meantime, the operation of the first wireless communication unit 80 is stopped.
図12は、通信システム120における通信手順を示すシーケンス図である。これは、乗車の際の処理手順に相当する。端末装置14は、車車間通信のためにパケット信号を報知する(S100)。端末装置14とリーダライタ18とは通信を実行し(S102)、端末装置14と決済サーバ154とは決済処理を実行する(S104)。端末装置14は、車車間通信のための報知を停止する(S106)。
FIG. 12 is a sequence diagram showing a communication procedure in the communication system 120. This corresponds to a processing procedure for boarding. The terminal device 14 notifies a packet signal for vehicle-to-vehicle communication (S100). The terminal device 14 and the reader / writer 18 execute communication (S102), and the terminal device 14 and the payment server 154 execute a payment process (S104). The terminal device 14 stops the notification for vehicle-to-vehicle communication (S106).
図13は、通信システム120における別の通信手順を示すシーケンス図である。これは、降車の際の処理手順に相当し、かつ図12につづく処理である。端末装置14は、車車間通信のための報知を停止する(S120)。端末装置14とリーダライタ18とは通信を実行し(S122)、端末装置14と決済サーバ154とは決済処理を実行する(S124)。端末装置14は、車車間通信のためにパケット信号を報知する(S126)。
FIG. 13 is a sequence diagram showing another communication procedure in the communication system 120. This corresponds to the processing procedure at the time of getting off, and is processing following FIG. The terminal device 14 stops the notification for vehicle-to-vehicle communication (S120). The terminal device 14 and the reader / writer 18 execute communication (S122), and the terminal device 14 and the payment server 154 execute a payment process (S124). The terminal device 14 notifies a packet signal for vehicle-to-vehicle communication (S126).
次に、本発明のさらに別の変形例を説明する。本発明のさらに別の変形例も、実施例と同様に、車車間通信を実行するとともに、路車間通信も実行する通信システムに関する。特に、歩行者に携帯され、かつ近距離無線通信機能を備えた端末装置に関する。実施例に係る端末装置は、横断歩道をわたっている期間にわたって、車車間通信と路車間通信の機能を停止させている。さらに別の変形例も、実施例と同様に、ITS送信が不要な場合にITS情報の報知を停止させることに関する。ここでは、電車、バス、タクシー等の車内や建物内に歩行者が存在する場合を想定する。
Next, still another modification of the present invention will be described. Still another modified example of the present invention relates to a communication system that executes vehicle-to-vehicle communication and road-to-vehicle communication as in the embodiment. In particular, the present invention relates to a terminal device that is carried by a pedestrian and has a short-range wireless communication function. The terminal device according to the embodiment stops the functions of vehicle-to-vehicle communication and road-to-vehicle communication over a period of crossing a pedestrian crossing. Still another modified example relates to stopping reporting of ITS information when ITS transmission is unnecessary, as in the embodiment. Here, it is assumed that there are pedestrians in a train, bus, taxi, or other vehicle or building.
図5(b)には、メッセージヘッダの構成が示されているが、そのうちの「RSU送信期間長」では、端末装置14に送信を禁止させるための期間(以下、「送信禁止期間」という)が示されている。さらに別の変形例では、これを利用して、車内や建物内のようなITS送信を禁止させるエリアに簡易な基地局装置10が設置される。簡易な基地局装置10の送信電力は、車内や建物内をサービスエリアとするように、通常の基地局装置10と比較して送信電力が小さい。簡易な基地局装置10は、RSUパケット信号を報知するが、その際に、全期間に対して送信禁止期間が設定される。基地局装置10は、車内や建物内に限定されるようなアンテナ指向性を有していてもよい。端末装置14は、RSUパケット信号を受信すると、全期間に対して送信禁止期間を設定する。これは、RSUパケット信号を受信している間、端末装置14はパケット信号を報知しないことに相当する。
FIG. 5B shows the structure of the message header. Of these, the “RSU transmission period length” is a period for which the terminal device 14 is prohibited from transmitting (hereinafter referred to as “transmission prohibited period”). It is shown. In yet another modification, a simple base station apparatus 10 is installed in an area where ITS transmission is prohibited, such as in a car or a building, using this. The transmission power of the simple base station apparatus 10 is smaller than that of the normal base station apparatus 10 so that the inside of the vehicle or the building is a service area. The simple base station apparatus 10 broadcasts the RSU packet signal, and at that time, a transmission prohibition period is set for the entire period. The base station apparatus 10 may have antenna directivity that is limited to the inside of a vehicle or a building. When receiving the RSU packet signal, the terminal device 14 sets a transmission prohibition period for the entire period. This corresponds to the terminal device 14 not notifying the packet signal while receiving the RSU packet signal.
一方、簡易な基地局装置10から報知されたRSUパケット信号は、車両12に搭載された端末装置14に受信されることもある。その際、車両12に搭載された端末装置14は、パケット信号の報知を停止せず、報知し続けるべきである。これに対応するために、簡易な基地局装置10は、RSUパケット信号のうちのリザーブ領域に、歩行者に携帯される端末装置14向け(以下、「歩行者向け」という)の情報を表すための識別子を含める。歩行者に携帯された端末装置14は、当該識別子を確認すると、全期間に対して送信禁止期間を設定するが、車両12に搭載された端末装置14は、当該識別子を確認すると、RSUパケット信号を破棄する。本発明の変形例に係る通信システム100は、図1と同様のタイプであり、基地局装置10は、図2と同様のタイプであり、端末装置14は、図6と同様のタイプである。なお、通信システム100には、リーダライタ18が含まれていなくてもよく、基地局装置10には、取得部32、再取得部34、決定部38、信号機IF部48が含まれていなくてもよい。簡易な基地局装置10も同様である。
On the other hand, the RSU packet signal notified from the simple base station apparatus 10 may be received by the terminal apparatus 14 mounted on the vehicle 12. At that time, the terminal device 14 mounted on the vehicle 12 should continue notifying the packet signal without stopping the notification. In order to deal with this, the simple base station device 10 represents information for the terminal device 14 carried by the pedestrian (hereinafter referred to as “for pedestrian”) in the reserved area of the RSU packet signal. Include the identifier. When the terminal device 14 carried by the pedestrian confirms the identifier, the terminal device 14 sets a transmission prohibition period for the entire period. However, when the terminal device 14 mounted on the vehicle 12 confirms the identifier, the RSU packet signal Is discarded. The communication system 100 according to the modification of the present invention is the same type as that in FIG. 1, the base station device 10 is the same type as that in FIG. 2, and the terminal device 14 is the same type as that in FIG. Note that the communication system 100 may not include the reader / writer 18, and the base station apparatus 10 does not include the acquisition unit 32, the reacquisition unit 34, the determination unit 38, and the traffic signal IF unit 48. Also good. The same applies to the simple base station apparatus 10.
図2において、簡易な基地局装置10の生成部46は、前述のごとく、パケット信号を生成する。生成部46は、歩行者向けの情報を表すための識別子をパケット信号に含めるとともに、全期間に対して送信禁止期間を設定する。これは、歩行者に携帯された端末装置14を対象にした送信禁止期間を設定することに相当し、車両12に搭載された端末装置14を対象から除外した送信禁止期間を設定することに相当する。変復調部24、RF部22は、生成部46において生成したパケット信号を報知する。
2, the generation unit 46 of the simple base station apparatus 10 generates a packet signal as described above. The generation unit 46 includes an identifier for representing information for pedestrians in the packet signal, and sets a transmission prohibition period for the entire period. This corresponds to setting a transmission prohibition period for the terminal device 14 carried by a pedestrian, and corresponds to setting a transmission prohibition period excluding the terminal device 14 mounted on the vehicle 12 from the target. To do. The modem unit 24 and the RF unit 22 broadcast the packet signal generated by the generation unit 46.
図6において、車両12に搭載された端末装置14のRF部52、変復調部54は、基地局装置10からのパケット信号を受信する。タイミング特定部60は、パケット信号に含まれた情報をもとに、パケット信号の送信可能期間を決定する。具体的には、送信禁止期間以外の期間に、送信可能期間が設定される。なお、CSMAは、送信可能期間内においてなされる。ここで、受信したパケット信号に、歩行者向けの情報を表すための識別子が含まれていた場合、タイミング特定部60は、パケット信号に含まれた送信禁止期間を無視して、パケット信号の送信可能期間を決定する。変復調部54、RF部52は、決定した送信可能期間にて、パケット信号を報知する。
6, the RF unit 52 and the modem unit 54 of the terminal device 14 mounted on the vehicle 12 receive the packet signal from the base station device 10. The timing specifying unit 60 determines a packet signal transmittable period based on information included in the packet signal. Specifically, the transmittable period is set in a period other than the transmission prohibited period. Note that CSMA is performed within the transmittable period. When the received packet signal includes an identifier for representing information for pedestrians, the timing specifying unit 60 ignores the transmission prohibition period included in the packet signal and transmits the packet signal. Determine the possible period. The modem unit 54 and the RF unit 52 broadcast the packet signal in the determined transmittable period.
図14は、本発明のさらに別の変形例に係る端末装置14の設定手順を示すフローチャートである。RF部52、変復調部54は、パケット信号を受信する(S150)。タイミング特定部60は、送信禁止期間に関する情報を抽出する(S152)。歩行者向けの識別子がパケット信号に含まれていれば(S154のY)、タイミング特定部60は、送信禁止期間を反映させて(S156)、送信可能期間を設定する(S160)。一方、歩行者向けの識別子がパケット信号に含まれていなければ(S154のN)、タイミング特定部60は、送信禁止期間を破棄して(S158)、送信可能期間を設定する(S160)。
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a setting procedure of the terminal device 14 according to still another modified example of the present invention. The RF unit 52 and the modem unit 54 receive the packet signal (S150). The timing specifying unit 60 extracts information related to the transmission prohibition period (S152). If the identifier for pedestrians is included in the packet signal (Y in S154), the timing specifying unit 60 reflects the transmission prohibition period (S156) and sets the transmittable period (S160). On the other hand, if the identifier for pedestrians is not included in the packet signal (N in S154), the timing specifying unit 60 discards the transmission prohibition period (S158) and sets the transmission possible period (S160).
本発明の実施例によれば、車車間通信の機能に加えて近距離無線通信の機能も備えた端末装置から、近距離無線通信を介して情報を取得するので、当該端末装置を携帯した歩行者が横断歩道に進入することを正確に認識できる。また、端末装置から取得した情報をもとに、変化予定を決定するので、歩行者の横断に適した変化予定を決定できる。また、歩行者の横断に適した変化予定が決定されるので、歩行者と車両との追突事故の発生確率を低減できる。また、歩行者の横断に適した変化予定を通知するので、歩行者が横断歩道に進入することを正確に通知できる。また、歩行者に関する情報をもとに、各点灯色による点灯間隔が変わるように変化予定を決定するので、歩行者に適した変化予定を決定できる。また、歩行者に適した変化予定が通知されるので、安全性をさらに向上できる。また、歩行者に適した変化予定が通知されるので、交通弱者を保護できる。
According to the embodiment of the present invention, since information is acquired through short-range wireless communication from a terminal device having a short-range wireless communication function in addition to a vehicle-to-vehicle communication function, walking with the terminal device carried It can be accurately recognized that the person enters the pedestrian crossing. Moreover, since the change schedule is determined based on the information acquired from the terminal device, it is possible to determine the change schedule suitable for pedestrian crossing. Moreover, since the change schedule suitable for a pedestrian crossing is determined, the probability of a rear-end collision between a pedestrian and a vehicle can be reduced. Moreover, since the change schedule suitable for a pedestrian crossing is notified, it can notify correctly that a pedestrian approachs a pedestrian crossing. In addition, since the change schedule is determined based on the information about the pedestrian so that the lighting interval of each lighting color changes, the change schedule suitable for the pedestrian can be determined. Moreover, since the change schedule suitable for a pedestrian is notified, safety can further be improved. Moreover, since the change schedule suitable for a pedestrian is notified, a traffic weak person can be protected.
また、情報を取得してから一定期間内に、同一の端末装置から情報を再取得するので、当該端末装置を携帯した歩行者が横断歩道から退出することを正確に認識できる。また、端末装置から再取得した情報をもとに、変化予定を決定するので、車両の走行に適した変化予定を決定できる。また、決定された変化予定を通知するので、歩行者が横断歩道から退出することを正確に通知できる。また、横断歩道を歩行者が横断しているか否かに応じた変化予定を報知するので、変化予定に応じた運転を促すことができる。また、変化予定に応じた運転を促すので、ドライバのストレスを軽減できる。また、変化予定に応じた運転を促すので、渋滞を軽減できる。また、変化予定に応じた運転を促すので、二酸化炭素の排出量を削減できる。また、リーダライタは、市販のものを使用可能であるので、実現性を向上できる。
In addition, since information is reacquired from the same terminal device within a certain period after the information is acquired, it is possible to accurately recognize that a pedestrian carrying the terminal device exits the pedestrian crossing. In addition, since the change schedule is determined based on the information reacquired from the terminal device, it is possible to determine the change schedule suitable for traveling of the vehicle. Further, since the determined change schedule is notified, it is possible to accurately notify that the pedestrian leaves the pedestrian crossing. Moreover, since the change schedule according to whether the pedestrian crosses the pedestrian crossing is notified, driving according to the change schedule can be urged. In addition, driving according to the change schedule is urged, so the driver's stress can be reduced. In addition, since driving according to the change schedule is urged, traffic congestion can be reduced. Moreover, since the driving | operation according to a change schedule is encouraged, the discharge | emission amount of a carbon dioxide can be reduced. Further, since a commercially available reader / writer can be used, the feasibility can be improved.
また、近距離無線通信が終了してから所定の期間が経過するまでの間、車車間通信を停止させるので、消費電力を低減できる。また、消費電力が低減されるので、バッテリ駆動時間を延長できる。また、横断歩道に進入する場合に車車間通信を停止させるので、横断歩道の横断中の消費電力を低減できる。また、横断歩道から退出する場合に車車間通信を再開させるので、横断終了後に位置情報を報知できる。また、予め定められた期間が経過すると、車車間通信を再開させるので、位置情報を自動的に報知できる。
In addition, since the inter-vehicle communication is stopped until the predetermined period elapses after the short-range wireless communication ends, the power consumption can be reduced. Further, since the power consumption is reduced, the battery driving time can be extended. In addition, since inter-vehicle communication is stopped when entering a pedestrian crossing, power consumption during crossing of the pedestrian crossing can be reduced. Moreover, since vehicle-to-vehicle communication is resumed when leaving the pedestrian crossing, position information can be notified after the crossing is completed. Moreover, since vehicle-to-vehicle communication is resumed when a predetermined period has elapsed, the position information can be automatically notified.
また、会社に出勤した際に近距離無線通信にて出勤確認を実行するとともに、車車間通信を停止させるので、両方の処理をまとめて実行できる。また、会社に出勤した際に近距離無線通信にて車車間通信を停止させるので、会社内での車車間通信を停止できる。また、両方の処理がまとめて実行されるので、歩行者の利便性を改善できる。また、学校、病院、公共施設等にもリーダライタが設置されるので、さまざまな場所において車車間通信を停止させることができる。
Also, when working at a company, the attendance confirmation is executed by short-range wireless communication and the inter-vehicle communication is stopped, so both processes can be executed together. Further, since the vehicle-to-vehicle communication is stopped by short-range wireless communication when working at the company, the vehicle-to-vehicle communication in the company can be stopped. Moreover, since both processes are performed collectively, the convenience of a pedestrian can be improved. In addition, since reader / writers are installed in schools, hospitals, public facilities, etc., inter-vehicle communication can be stopped in various places.
また、乗車の際に運賃の決済を実行するとともに、車車間通信を停止させるので、両方の処理をまとめて実行できる。また、乗車の際に車車間通信を停止させるので、乗車中の差車間通信を停止させることができる。また、降車の際に運賃の決済を実行するとともに、車車間通信を再開させるので、両方の処理をまとめて実行できる。また、簡易な基地局装置において、全期間を送信禁止期間に設定するので、簡易な基地局装置が設置された場所の周囲で車車間通信を停止させることができる。また、全期間を送信禁止期間に設定するとともに、歩行者向けの情報であることを表す識別子をパケット信号に含めるので、歩行者に携帯された端末装置に限定して送信を停止させることができる。また、歩行者に携帯された端末装置に限定して送信を停止させるので、車両に搭載された端末装置に車車間通信を継続させることができる。
Also, since the fare is settled when boarding and the inter-vehicle communication is stopped, both processes can be executed together. Further, since the inter-vehicle communication is stopped when boarding, the inter-vehicle communication during boarding can be stopped. Moreover, since the settlement of the fare is executed at the time of getting off and the inter-vehicle communication is resumed, both processes can be executed together. Further, since the whole base period is set as the transmission prohibition period in the simple base station apparatus, the inter-vehicle communication can be stopped around the place where the simple base station apparatus is installed. Moreover, since the whole period is set as a transmission prohibition period and an identifier representing information for pedestrians is included in the packet signal, transmission can be stopped only for terminal devices carried by pedestrians. . Moreover, since transmission is stopped only for the terminal device carried by the pedestrian, the inter-vehicle communication can be continued by the terminal device mounted on the vehicle.
以上、本発明を実施例をもとに説明した。この実施例は例示であり、それらの各構成要素や各処理プロセスの組合せにいろいろな変形例が可能なこと、またそうした変形例も本発明の範囲にあることは当業者に理解されるところである。
The present invention has been described based on the embodiments. This embodiment is an exemplification, and it will be understood by those skilled in the art that various modifications can be made to the combination of each component and each processing process, and such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. .
本発明の別の変形例において、リーダライタ18は、改札機152に備えられ、決済サーバ154は、運賃の決済処理を実行している。つまり、交通機関に適用されている。しかしながらこれに限らず例えば、交通機関ではなく、映画、劇場等のサービス提供施設に適用されてもよい。その際、リーダライタ18は、受付に備えられ、決済サーバ154は、入場料の決済処理を実行する。本変形例によれば、さまざまなサービスに本発明を適用できる。
In another modification of the present invention, the reader / writer 18 is provided in the ticket gate 152, and the settlement server 154 executes a fare settlement process. In other words, it is applied to transportation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention may be applied not to transportation facilities but to service providing facilities such as movies and theaters. At that time, the reader / writer 18 is provided for reception, and the settlement server 154 executes settlement processing for the entrance fee. According to this modification, the present invention can be applied to various services.
本発明の第2の課題について以下説明する。ITS通信において、全てのITS通信端末(ナビゲーション装置等の車載通信装置、歩行者が所持する携帯電話等の移動通信端末、路側機など)が定期的、或いは不定期に情報を送信すると回線が混雑してしまう可能性がある。
The second problem of the present invention will be described below. In ITS communication, all ITS communication terminals (in-vehicle communication devices such as navigation devices, mobile communication terminals such as mobile phones held by pedestrians, roadside devices, etc.) transmit information regularly or irregularly, the line is congested There is a possibility that.
特に、ITSにおいて無線通信を行なう際の周波数帯域は700MHz帯の周波数帯域のみであり、1チャンネルのみで通信を行うことになるので、多くのITS通信端末が存在する場所では、回線の混雑による影響(通信不可能、通信遅延、通信衝突など)が顕著に現れる可能性が高い。
In particular, the frequency band when performing wireless communication in ITS is only the 700 MHz band, and communication is performed using only one channel. Therefore, in a place where many ITS communication terminals exist, the influence of line congestion is present. (Communication impossible, communication delay, communication collision, etc.) are likely to appear prominently.
本発明の第2実施形態~第6実施形態は、上述した問題点に鑑み、安全運転支援(渋滞判定や交通事故判定)を妨げることなく、ITS通信における回線の混雑を未然に防ぐことができる移動体通信装置及び送信制御方法を提供することを目的とするものである。以下、本発明の実施形態について記載する。
The second to sixth embodiments of the present invention can prevent congestion of the line in ITS communication without disturbing safe driving support (congestion determination and traffic accident determination) in view of the above-described problems. An object of the present invention is to provide a mobile communication device and a transmission control method. Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described.
以下に本発明の実施形態について図面を参照して説明する。但し、以下に示す実施形態は、本発明の技術的思想を具体化するために本発明の移動体通信装置の一例であるナビゲーション装置を示すものであって、本発明をこのナビゲーション装置に特定することを意図するものではなく、特許請求の範囲に含まれるその他の実施形態の装置にも等しく適応し得るものである。例えば、ナビゲーション機能を有しない装置や携帯電話等の移動通信端末であってもよい。なお、以下の説明では、ナビゲーション装置が自動車に取付けられた場合を例示するが、バイクや歩行者等がナビゲーション装置を備えて(保持して)いてもよい。図15は本発明のナビゲーション装置の構成を示すブロック図である。ナビゲーション装置300は制御部301と、表示部302と、操作部303と、現在位置検出部304と、速度検出部305と、地図情報記憶部306と、バッテリ307と、通信部308とを備えている。
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, the embodiment described below shows a navigation device which is an example of the mobile communication device of the present invention in order to embody the technical idea of the present invention, and the present invention is specified to this navigation device. And is equally applicable to other embodiments of the device falling within the scope of the claims. For example, a mobile communication terminal such as a device without a navigation function or a mobile phone may be used. In the following description, a case where the navigation device is attached to an automobile is illustrated, but a motorcycle, a pedestrian, or the like may be provided (held) with the navigation device. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the navigation apparatus of the present invention. The navigation apparatus 300 includes a control unit 301, a display unit 302, an operation unit 303, a current position detection unit 304, a speed detection unit 305, a map information storage unit 306, a battery 307, and a communication unit 308. Yes.
制御部301はナビゲーション装置300全体を総括的に制御する制御手段である。制御部301はCPUとROMとRAM(いずれも不図示)とを含んでいる。ROMには制御部301が実行するプログラム、プログラムの実行に必要なパラメータやデータが記憶されている。CPUはROMに記憶されている各種プログラムを実行する。RAMは各種処理の過程で得られるデータや各種処理の結果得られるデータを一時的に格納する。これらCPU、RAM、ROM等は、バスを介して接続されている。なお、CPU、ROM及びRAMはこれらの一部または全部を1チップに集積化しても構わない。また、制御部301は通信部308を介して行われる他の通信装置に対する自車の移動体情報の送信を制御する(詳細は後述)。
The control unit 301 is a control unit that comprehensively controls the entire navigation apparatus 300. The control unit 301 includes a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM (all not shown). The ROM stores a program executed by the control unit 301 and parameters and data necessary for executing the program. The CPU executes various programs stored in the ROM. The RAM temporarily stores data obtained during various processes and data obtained as a result of various processes. These CPU, RAM, ROM and the like are connected via a bus. Note that the CPU, ROM, and RAM may be partially or fully integrated on one chip. In addition, the control unit 301 controls transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle to other communication devices performed via the communication unit 308 (details will be described later).
表示部302は、制御部301の指示に基づき、地図画面(目的地への経路、ナビゲーション装置300が搭載された車両(以下、「ナビゲーション装置300が搭載された車両」を「自車」ということもある。)の現在位置を示すマークなどを含む地図画像を表示する画面)やメニュー画面を表示するための表示手段である。
Based on an instruction from the control unit 301, the display unit 302 displays a map screen (route to the destination, vehicle equipped with the navigation device 300 (hereinafter, “vehicle equipped with the navigation device 300” is referred to as “own vehicle”). Display screen for displaying a map image including a mark indicating the current position) and a menu screen.
操作部303はユーザが目的地を入力したり、メニューを操作したりするための入力操作手段である。なお、操作部303としては、ナビゲーション装置本体に各種のキーやボタンを設けてもよいし、表示部302にタッチパネル機能を付加してもよい。また、操作部303としてナビゲーション装置300本体を遠隔操作するためのリモートコントローラを操作部303として用いても構わない。
The operation unit 303 is input operation means for the user to input a destination or operate a menu. As the operation unit 303, various keys and buttons may be provided on the navigation device body, or a touch panel function may be added to the display unit 302. Further, a remote controller for remotely operating the navigation device 300 main body as the operation unit 303 may be used as the operation unit 303.
現在位置検出部304は自車の現在位置を検出するものであり、GPS受信機、自立航法手段、位置計算用CPU等を含んで構成される。自立航法手段は操角センサ、加速度センサ、距離センサや方位センサなどからなり、自車の走行距離と進行方向とをそれぞれ検出し、これらの値に基づいて現在位置を求める。また、GPS受信機は複数のGPS衛星から送られてくる電波をGPSアンテナで受信して3次元測位処理又は2次元測位処理を行って自車の絶対位置及び進行方向を計算する。ここで進行方向は現時点の自車位置と直前の自車位置とに基づいて計算される。なお、進行方向の検出方法は特に限定されず、例えばタイヤの回転方向から検出することとしてもよいし、方位センサを用いて検出してもよい。また、現在位置検出部304とは別に進行方向検出部を設けて自車の進行方向を検出するものとしてもよい。
The current position detection unit 304 detects the current position of the host vehicle, and includes a GPS receiver, self-contained navigation means, a position calculation CPU, and the like. The self-contained navigation means includes a steering angle sensor, an acceleration sensor, a distance sensor, a direction sensor, and the like, detects the travel distance and the traveling direction of the own vehicle, and obtains the current position based on these values. The GPS receiver receives radio waves transmitted from a plurality of GPS satellites with a GPS antenna and performs a three-dimensional positioning process or a two-dimensional positioning process to calculate the absolute position and traveling direction of the own vehicle. Here, the traveling direction is calculated based on the current vehicle position and the previous vehicle position. In addition, the detection method of the advancing direction is not specifically limited, For example, it is good also as detecting from the rotation direction of a tire, and you may detect using a direction sensor. Further, a traveling direction detection unit may be provided separately from the current position detection unit 304 to detect the traveling direction of the host vehicle.
速度検出部305は自車の移動速度を検出する。移動速度は車速センサや加速度センサの出力から算出してもよいし、GPS履歴間の走行距離とGPS受信時刻の差から算出してもよい。なお、自車の移動速度は現在位置検出部304が検出することとしてもよい。現在位置検出部304が自車の現在位置に加えて移動速度を検出することができる場合には速度検出部305を別途設けない構成とすることができる。その場合、現在位置検出部304に速度検出部305が含まれる構成となる。
Speed detector 305 detects the moving speed of the vehicle. The moving speed may be calculated from the output of the vehicle speed sensor or the acceleration sensor, or may be calculated from the difference between the travel distance between the GPS histories and the GPS reception time. Note that the current position detection unit 304 may detect the moving speed of the host vehicle. When the current position detection unit 304 can detect the moving speed in addition to the current position of the host vehicle, the speed detection unit 305 can be omitted. In this case, the current position detection unit 304 includes the speed detection unit 305.
なお、操角センサ、加速度センサ、速度センサや方位センサなどは、ナビゲーション装置300が備えていてもよいし、車両(自車)が上記各種センサを備えており、ナビゲーション装置300は、上記各種センサの出力を取得するインターフェースを備える構成としてもよい。
The steering angle sensor, acceleration sensor, speed sensor, direction sensor, and the like may be included in the navigation device 300, or the vehicle (own vehicle) includes the various sensors. The navigation device 300 includes the various sensors. It is good also as a structure provided with the interface which acquires these outputs.
地図情報記憶部306は目的地への経路探索や誘導を行う際に参照される地図情報が記憶されている。地図情報には、ネットワークデータ(ノードデータ、リンクデータ)が含まれる。地図情報記憶部306としてはNANDフラッシュやSDメモリカードなどを好適に用いることができる。地図情報記憶部306はナビゲーション装置300に内蔵しても構わないし、ナビゲーション装置300に着脱可能な構成としても構わない。なお、地図情報には、地図画像が含まれていてもよいし、地図情報に含まれるネットワークデータ(ノードデータ、リンクデータ)に基づき地図画像を表示部302に描画してもよい。また、地図情報は予め地図情報記憶部306に記憶される以外にも、後述する通信部308が路側機などから地図情報を受信し、受信された地図情報が地図情報記憶部306に記憶されてもよい。
The map information storage unit 306 stores map information that is referred to when performing route search or guidance to the destination. The map information includes network data (node data, link data). As the map information storage unit 306, a NAND flash, an SD memory card, or the like can be suitably used. The map information storage unit 306 may be built in the navigation device 300, or may be configured to be detachable from the navigation device 300. The map information may include a map image, or the map image may be drawn on the display unit 302 based on network data (node data, link data) included in the map information. In addition to storing map information in advance in the map information storage unit 306, a communication unit 308, which will be described later, receives map information from a roadside machine or the like, and the received map information is stored in the map information storage unit 306. Also good.
本発明においては、ネットワークデータに、道路のノードデータ・リンクデータが含まれる。自車が現在走行している道路を特定する際には、制御部301が現在位置検出部304によって検出される自車の現在位置(進行方向や移動速度も加えてもよい)と地図情報とに基づき、マップマッチング処理を行うことで特定することができる。
In the present invention, the network data includes road node data and link data. When the road on which the vehicle is currently traveling is specified, the control unit 301 detects the current position of the vehicle detected by the current position detection unit 304 (the traveling direction and the moving speed may be added), map information, Can be specified by performing a map matching process.
なお、マップマッチング処理については、制御部301が行なってもよいが、現在位置検出部304が行なってもよい。すなわち、GPS受信機及び/又は自律航法手段を用いて検出した現在位置と地図情報とに基づき、マップマッチング処理を行い、マップマッチング処理を行なった現在位置を現在位置として制御部301へ出力してもよい。或いは、制御部301のマップマッチング処理までを含めて現在位置検出部304としてもよい。
Note that the map matching process may be performed by the control unit 301 or the current position detection unit 304. That is, based on the current position detected using the GPS receiver and / or the autonomous navigation means and the map information, the map matching process is performed, and the current position where the map matching process is performed is output to the control unit 301 as the current position. Also good. Or it is good also as the present position detection part 304 including the map matching process of the control part 301. FIG.
バッテリ307はナビゲーション装置300の携帯使用時における電源供給手段であり、リチウムイオン電池やニッケル水素電池などの二次電池を好適に用いることが可能である。もちろん、バッテリ307として、アルカリマンガン乾電池やマンガン乾電池などの一次電池を用いても構わないし、燃料電池を用いても構わない。
The battery 307 is a power supply means when the navigation device 300 is used in a portable manner, and a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery or a nickel metal hydride battery can be suitably used. Of course, as the battery 307, a primary battery such as an alkaline manganese dry battery or a manganese dry battery may be used, or a fuel cell may be used.
通信部308はナビゲーション装置300と通信可能な他の通信装置(以下、「他の通信装置」という。)に情報を送信する送信部(図示せず)と他の通信装置から送信される情報を受信する受信部(図示せず)とを有する。通信方法は無線通信や赤外線通信などの非接触通信とすることが好ましい。他の通信装置としては他の車両に搭載されたナビゲーション装置等の車載通信装置(他の車両に歩行者が乗車している場合において、該歩行者が保持する携帯電話等の移動通信端末でもよい)、路側機、歩行者等(歩行者や自転車の運転手など)が所持する携帯電話等の移動通信端末などを挙げることができる。
The communication unit 308 transmits information to other communication devices that can communicate with the navigation device 300 (hereinafter referred to as “other communication devices”) and information transmitted from the other communication devices. A receiving unit (not shown) for receiving. The communication method is preferably non-contact communication such as wireless communication or infrared communication. The other communication device may be an in-vehicle communication device such as a navigation device mounted on another vehicle (when a pedestrian is on another vehicle, a mobile communication terminal such as a mobile phone held by the pedestrian may be used. ), Mobile communication terminals such as mobile phones possessed by roadside devices, pedestrians, etc. (pedestrians, bicycle drivers, etc.).
通信部308が他の車両に搭載されたナビゲーション装置等の車載通信装置から受信する情報には他の車両の移動体情報(車載通信装置の情報(現在位置や移動速度など)を車載通信装置が搭載された「他の車両の移動体情報」と言い換えることができる)が含まれる。他の車両の移動体情報には、ナビゲーション装置等の車載通信装置が搭載された他の車両(以下、「ナビゲーション装置等の車載通信装置が搭載された他の車両」を「他の車両」ということもある。)の現在位置、進行方向、移動速度を示す情報などが含まれており、また、他の車両の移動種別(すなわち、車両)を示す情報が含まれていてもよい。
The information received by the communication unit 308 from the in-vehicle communication device such as a navigation device mounted on another vehicle includes the vehicle information of the other vehicle (information on the in-vehicle communication device (current position, moving speed, etc.). It can be rephrased as “moving body information of other vehicles”). In the moving body information of other vehicles, other vehicles equipped with in-vehicle communication devices such as navigation devices (hereinafter referred to as “other vehicles equipped with in-vehicle communication devices such as navigation devices” are referred to as “other vehicles”). Information indicating the current position, traveling direction, moving speed, and the like, and information indicating the movement type (that is, the vehicle) of another vehicle may be included.
また、通信部308が、歩行者等が所持している携帯電話等の移動通信端末から受信する情報には、歩行者等の移動体情報が含まれる。歩行者等の移動体情報には、携帯電話等の移動通信端末を所持する歩行者等(以下、「携帯電話等の移動通信端末を所持する歩行者等」を「歩行者等」ということもある。)の現在位置、進行方向、移動速度を示す情報などが含まれており、また、歩行者等の移動種別(すなわち、歩行者等)を示す情報が含まれていてもよい。
Also, the information received by the communication unit 308 from a mobile communication terminal such as a mobile phone possessed by a pedestrian or the like includes mobile body information such as a pedestrian or the like. For mobile information such as pedestrians, pedestrians who have mobile communication terminals such as mobile phones (hereinafter referred to as “pedestrians who have mobile communication terminals such as mobile phones” are also referred to as “pedestrians”) Information indicating the current position, traveling direction, moving speed, and the like, and information indicating the type of movement such as a pedestrian (that is, a pedestrian or the like) may be included.
なお、他の車両や歩行者等の現在位置は、マップマッチング処理後の現在位置であってもよいし、マップマッチング処理前の現在位置(GPS受信機等により測位された現在位置)であってもよい。マップマッチング処理前の現在位置であれば、制御部301(現在位置検出部304)がマップマッチング処理を行なってもよい。
The current position of other vehicles, pedestrians, etc. may be the current position after the map matching process, or the current position before the map matching process (current position measured by a GPS receiver or the like). Also good. If the current position is before the map matching process, the control unit 301 (current position detection unit 304) may perform the map matching process.
なお、上記において通信部308は、他の車両から他の車両の移動体情報を受信しているが、例えば路側機や携帯電話等の移動通信端末などから受信してもよい。また、歩行者等の移動体情報についても同様である。
In the above description, the communication unit 308 receives the moving body information of another vehicle from another vehicle, but may receive it from a mobile communication terminal such as a roadside device or a mobile phone. The same applies to moving body information such as pedestrians.
なお、他の通信装置(車載通信装置や路側機など)から送信される他の移動体(他の車両、歩行者等)の移動体情報や、通信部308を介して送信される自車の移動体情報は、ブロードキャストで周囲に送信されるものとして説明を行なう。
In addition, the mobile body information of other mobile bodies (other vehicles, pedestrians, etc.) transmitted from other communication devices (such as in-vehicle communication devices and roadside machines), or the own vehicle transmitted via the communication unit 308 The mobile object information will be described as being transmitted to the surroundings by broadcast.
ここで、本発明について、簡単に概要を説明する。
Here, the outline of the present invention will be briefly described.
上記説明した通り、ナビゲーション装置300は、通信部308を介して他の移動体(他の車両、歩行者等)の移動体情報を受信(取得)し、また、通信部308を介して自車の移動体情報(現在位置など)を送信する。
As described above, the navigation device 300 receives (acquires) moving body information of other moving bodies (other vehicles, pedestrians, etc.) via the communication unit 308, and the own vehicle via the communication unit 308. The moving body information (current position, etc.) is transmitted.
これにより、ナビゲーション装置300は、他の移動体(他の車両、歩行者等)の現在位置や移動速度を特定でき、特定した他の移動体の現在位置や移動速度と自車の移動体情報(現在位置や移動速度など)に基づき、安全運転支援(渋滞判定や交通事故判定)を行なうことが可能となる。
Thereby, the navigation apparatus 300 can specify the current position and moving speed of other moving bodies (other vehicles, pedestrians, etc.), and the specified current position and moving speed of the other moving bodies and the moving body information of the own vehicle. Based on (current position, moving speed, etc.), it becomes possible to perform safe driving support (congestion judgment and traffic accident judgment).
同様に、通信部308を介して送信された自車の移動体情報を受信した他の通信装置(例えば他の車両に搭載されたナビゲーション装置等の車載通信装置)においても、安全運転支援(渋滞判定や交通事故判定)を行なうことが可能となる。
Similarly, in other communication devices (for example, in-vehicle communication devices such as navigation devices mounted on other vehicles) that have received the vehicle information transmitted through the communication unit 308, safe driving assistance (congestion) Determination and traffic accident determination).
しかしながら、上記説明した通り、全てのITS通信端末(ナビゲーション装置300、車載通信装置、移動通信端末など)が同様の送信周期で同様の情報(現在位置や移動速度など)を含む移動体情報を送信すると回線が混雑してしまう可能性がある。
However, as described above, all ITS communication terminals (navigation device 300, in-vehicle communication device, mobile communication terminal, etc.) transmit mobile body information including the same information (current position, moving speed, etc.) in the same transmission cycle. Then, the line may be congested.
ところで、例えば、AとBの2人が夫々移動通信端末を保持して並んで歩行しているような場合において、安全運転支援(渋滞判定や交通事故判定)を行なうためには、AかBの何れか1人の移動通信端末から移動体情報が送信されればよい。
By the way, for example, when two people A and B are walking side by side holding a mobile communication terminal, in order to perform safe driving support (congestion determination or traffic accident determination), A or B Mobile body information may be transmitted from any one of the mobile communication terminals.
すなわち、安全運転支援(特に交通事故判定)を行なうためには、第3者がある地点(A又はBが保持する移動通信端末から送信された移動体情報に含まれる現在位置)に人がいることを認識できればよく、並んで歩行しているような場合においては、A及びBが保持する夫々の移動通信端末から移動体情報を送信する必要性は1人で歩行している場合よりも低くなる。
That is, in order to perform safe driving support (especially traffic accident determination), there is a person at a point where the third person is (current position included in the mobile body information transmitted from the mobile communication terminal held by A or B). In the case of walking side by side, the need to transmit mobile body information from the respective mobile communication terminals held by A and B is lower than when walking alone. Become.
そこで、本発明では、自車の現在位置(例えば上記Aの現在位置)と、通信部308を介して受信した他の移動体の現在位置(例えばBの現在位置)とが所定範囲内である場合、通信部を介して行われる自車の移動体情報(Aの移動体情報)の送信について特別制御状態(送信停止など、詳細は後述)で行うと決定する。
Therefore, in the present invention, the current position of the host vehicle (for example, the current position of A) and the current position of the other moving body (for example, the current position of B) received via the communication unit 308 are within a predetermined range. In this case, it is determined that the transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle (the moving body information of A) performed through the communication unit is performed in a special control state (details will be described later, such as transmission stoppage).
すなわち、自車の現在位置(例えばAの現在位置)から所定範囲内である他の移動体の現在位置(例えばBの現在位置)を受信したということは、他の移動体(B)の周囲に存在する他の通信装置(自車の現在位置(Aの現在位置)の周囲に存在する他の通信装置とほぼ同一)に、他の移動体(B)の現在位置に他の移動体(B)が存在することが送信されている(ブロードキャストのため)。
That is, the fact that the current position (for example, the current position of B) of another moving body within the predetermined range from the current position of the own vehicle (for example, the current position of A) is received means that the surroundings of the other moving body (B) Other communication devices (substantially the same as other communication devices existing around the current position of the vehicle (the current position of A)), other mobile objects (B) B) is present (being broadcast).
そのため、自車の移動体情報(Aの移動体情報)の送信について特別制御状態(送信停止など、詳細は後述)で行うと決定しても、B(A)の周囲に存在する他の通信装置は、ある地点(Bが保持する移動通信端末から送信された移動体情報に含まれる現在位置)に、B(歩行者)が存在することを認識(受信)しているため、安全運転支援(渋滞判定や交通事故判定)を妨げることなく、ITS通信における回線の混雑を未然に防ぐことができる。
Therefore, even if it is determined that transmission of mobile body information of the own vehicle (mobile body information of A) is performed in a special control state (details will be described later, such as transmission stop), other communication existing around B (A) Since the device recognizes (receives) that B (pedestrian) exists at a certain point (current position included in the mobile body information transmitted from the mobile communication terminal held by B), it supports safe driving. It is possible to prevent congestion of lines in ITS communication without obstructing (congestion determination or traffic accident determination).
[第2実施形態]
本発明のナビゲーション装置300の第2実施形態について図16を用いて説明する。図16は本発明のナビゲーション装置300の制御部301が実行する処理の流れを示す第1のフローチャートである。 [Second Embodiment]
A second embodiment of thenavigation device 300 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a first flowchart showing a flow of processing executed by the control unit 301 of the navigation device 300 of the present invention.
本発明のナビゲーション装置300の第2実施形態について図16を用いて説明する。図16は本発明のナビゲーション装置300の制御部301が実行する処理の流れを示す第1のフローチャートである。 [Second Embodiment]
A second embodiment of the
ステップS01において制御部301は、現在位置検出部304によって検出される自車の現在位置と、現在位置検出部304(ナビゲーション装置300が進行方向検出部を備えるときは進行方向検出部でもよい)により検出される自車の進行方向、速度検出部305により検出される自車の移動速度などの自車に関する情報を取得する。
In step S01, the control unit 301 uses the current position of the host vehicle detected by the current position detection unit 304 and the current position detection unit 304 (or a traveling direction detection unit when the navigation device 300 includes a traveling direction detection unit). Information related to the host vehicle such as the traveling direction of the host vehicle detected and the moving speed of the host vehicle detected by the speed detector 305 is acquired.
また、ステップ02において制御部301は、通信部308が受信した1又は複数の他の移動体(他の車両、歩行者等)の移動体情報を取得する。本実施形態において、それぞれの他の移動体の移動体情報には少なくとも該他の移動体の現在位置を示す情報が含まれている(例えば、他の車両Aの移動体情報には少なくとも他の車両Aの現在位置を示す情報が含まれており、その他に、他の車両Aの進行方向を示す情報や、他の車両Aの移動速度を示す情報が含まれていてもよいが、他の車両Aの移動体情報には他の車両Aに関する情報のみが含まれている(例えば、他の車両Bに関する情報は含まれていない)。)。
In step 02, the control unit 301 acquires the moving body information of one or more other moving bodies (other vehicles, pedestrians, etc.) received by the communication unit 308. In the present embodiment, the mobile body information of each other mobile body includes at least information indicating the current position of the other mobile body (for example, the mobile body information of the other vehicle A includes at least other mobile body information). Information indicating the current position of the vehicle A is included. In addition, information indicating the traveling direction of the other vehicle A and information indicating the moving speed of the other vehicle A may be included. The moving body information of the vehicle A includes only information related to the other vehicle A (for example, information related to the other vehicle B is not included).
なお、本実施形態において制御部301は、ステップS01において自車に関する情報を取得し、ステップS02において1又は複数の他の移動体の移動体情報を取得しているが、制御部301がこれらの情報を取得する順番はフローチャートに示した順序でなくてもよく、例えば同時に取得するものであってもよいし、先に1又は複数の他の移動体の移動体情報を取得するものであってもよい。また、本実施形態及び以下の実施形態(第3実施形態~第6実施形態)において制御部301が自車に関する情報及び1又は複数の他の移動体の移動体情報を取得するタイミングは当該タイミングとは限られない。定期的或いは不定期に取得されてもよく、定期的或いは不定期に複数回情報を取得する場合には、取得された情報のうち最も新しい情報を使用することとしてもよい。
In this embodiment, the control unit 301 acquires information about the own vehicle in step S01, and acquires moving body information of one or more other moving bodies in step S02. The order in which the information is acquired may not be the order shown in the flowchart. For example, the information may be acquired at the same time, or the moving body information of one or more other moving bodies may be acquired first. Also good. In addition, in this embodiment and the following embodiments (third to sixth embodiments), the timing at which the control unit 301 acquires information about the vehicle and the moving body information of one or more other moving bodies is the timing. Not necessarily. The information may be acquired regularly or irregularly, and when information is acquired a plurality of times regularly or irregularly, the latest information among the acquired information may be used.
次にステップS03において制御部301は他の移動体の現在位置が自車の現在位置から所定範囲内であるか否かを判定する。他の移動体の現在位置が自車の現在位置から所定範囲内であれば(ステップS03のY)ステップS04に進み、他の移動体の現在位置が自車の現在位置から所定範囲内でなければ(ステップS03のN)ステップS06に進む。
Next, in step S03, the control unit 301 determines whether or not the current position of the other moving body is within a predetermined range from the current position of the own vehicle. If the current position of the other moving body is within the predetermined range from the current position of the own vehicle (Y in step S03), the process proceeds to step S04, and the current position of the other moving body must be within the predetermined range from the current position of the own vehicle. (N in step S03), the process proceeds to step S06.
なお、当該判定はステップS02において複数の他の移動体の移動体情報を取得している場合には、他の移動体の移動体情報毎に行う。取得した全ての他の移動体の移動体情報毎に判定を行なった後、複数の他の移動体の現在位置の少なくとも一つにおいて、自車の現在位置から所定範囲内であればステップS04に進むものとする。
In addition, the said determination is performed for every moving body information of another moving body, when the moving body information of several other moving bodies is acquired in step S02. After determination is made for each piece of moving body information of all other moving bodies, if at least one of the current positions of a plurality of other moving bodies is within a predetermined range from the current position of the host vehicle, the process proceeds to step S04. Shall proceed.
また、自車の現在位置から所定範囲とは、適宜設定される任意の範囲であってもよいが、例えば、自車の現在位置を中心として所定半径(5m)の円(移動種別に応じて半径を変更してもよい。)であってもよいし、自車の現在位置を中心として、自車が走行している道路の道路幅と所定距離(5m)からなる四角形であってもよい。
The predetermined range from the current position of the host vehicle may be an arbitrary range set as appropriate. For example, a circle having a predetermined radius (5 m) centered on the current position of the host vehicle (depending on the movement type) The radius may be changed.), Or a quadrangle formed of the road width of the road on which the vehicle is traveling and a predetermined distance (5 m) centered on the current position of the vehicle. .
次にステップS04において制御部301は自車の移動種別と他の移動体の移動種別とが同一であるか否かを判定する。本ステップにおいて他の移動体とは、ステップS03において、自車の現在位置から所定範囲内であると判定された他の移動体であり、自車の現在位置から所定範囲内であると判定された他の移動体が複数存在する場合には、他の移動体毎に判定を行う。
Next, in step S04, the control unit 301 determines whether or not the movement type of the own vehicle and the movement type of another moving body are the same. In this step, the other moving body is another moving body determined in step S03 as being within a predetermined range from the current position of the own vehicle, and is determined to be within the predetermined range from the current position of the own vehicle. When there are a plurality of other mobile objects, the determination is made for each of the other mobile objects.
自車の移動種別と他の移動体の移動種別とが同一であれば(ステップS04のY)ステップS05に進み、自車の移動種別と他の移動体の移動種別とが同一でなければ(ステップS04のN)ステップS06に進む。
If the movement type of the own vehicle and the movement type of the other moving body are the same (Y in step S04), the process proceeds to step S05, and the movement type of the own vehicle and the movement type of the other moving body are not the same ( N in step S04) The process proceeds to step S06.
なお、自車の移動種別と他の移動体の移動体種別を特定する方法は特に限定されないが以下に移動種別を特定する方法について例示する。自車の移動種別を特定する第1の方法はユーザが操作部303を用いて入力し、或いは表示部302に表示された複数の移動種別の中からユーザが操作部303を用いて移動種別を選択することによって特定する方法である。特定された移動種別を示す情報はメモリ(例えばRAM)に記憶される。この場合、ユーザによって特定された移動種別を示す情報がメモリに記憶されているため、制御部301はステップS01において自車の移動種別を示す情報を自車に関する情報として取得すると言い換えることができる。
In addition, although the method of specifying the moving type of the own vehicle and the moving type of another moving body is not particularly limited, a method for specifying the moving type is illustrated below. The first method for specifying the movement type of the host vehicle is that the user inputs the movement type using the operation unit 303, or the user uses the operation unit 303 to select the movement type from a plurality of movement types displayed on the display unit 302. It is a method of specifying by selecting. Information indicating the identified movement type is stored in a memory (for example, RAM). In this case, since the information indicating the movement type specified by the user is stored in the memory, it can be said that the control unit 301 acquires the information indicating the movement type of the own vehicle as information about the own vehicle in step S01.
自車の移動種別を特定する第2の方法は、制御部301が自車の移動速度に基づいて特定する方法である。具体的には、例えば移動速度が時速30km以上であるときは移動種別を「車両」とし、移動速度が時速30km未満であるときは移動種別を「歩行者等」とする。なお、移動速度に基づいて特定する場合は、移動速度の平均が時速30km以上であるか否かで判定することが好ましい。
The second method of specifying the movement type of the own vehicle is a method in which the control unit 301 specifies based on the moving speed of the own vehicle. Specifically, for example, when the moving speed is 30 km / h or more, the moving type is “vehicle”, and when the moving speed is less than 30 km / h, the moving type is “pedestrians”. In addition, when specifying based on moving speed, it is preferable to determine by whether the average of moving speed is 30 km / h or more.
自車の移動種別を特定する第3の方法は、制御部301がナビゲーション装置300の電源の種類に基づいて特定する方法である。具体的には、ナビゲーション装置300が車両に搭載されたバッテリから電源供給(12V)を受けていれば移動種別を「車両」とし、ナビゲーション装置300が備えるバッテリ307から電源供給を受けていれば移動種別を「歩行者等」とする。
The third method of specifying the movement type of the own vehicle is a method in which the control unit 301 specifies based on the type of power supply of the navigation device 300. Specifically, if the navigation apparatus 300 receives power supply (12V) from a battery mounted on the vehicle, the movement type is “vehicle”, and if the navigation apparatus 300 receives power supply from the battery 307 included in the navigation apparatus 300, the movement is performed. The type is “pedestrians”.
自車の移動種別を特定する第4の方法は、制御部301が、車両(自車)が備えるセンサなどの出力に基づいて特定する方法である。具体的には、例えばナビゲーション装置300が車両(自車)のヘッドライトの点灯状態を示す情報を取得するインターフェースを備えている場合において、ヘッドライトの点灯或いは消灯を示す情報を自車に関する情報として取得していれば移動種別を「車両」とし、取得していなければ移動種別を「歩行者等」とする。
The fourth method of specifying the movement type of the own vehicle is a method in which the control unit 301 specifies based on the output of a sensor or the like included in the vehicle (own vehicle). Specifically, for example, when the navigation device 300 includes an interface that acquires information indicating the lighting state of the headlight of the vehicle (own vehicle), information indicating whether the headlight is turned on or off is used as information about the own vehicle. If it is acquired, the movement type is “vehicle”, and if it is not acquired, the movement type is “pedestrian”.
また、自車の移動種別は、現在位置から特定することも可能である。例えば、地図情報と現在位置とに基づき、現在位置が車道上であれば移動種別を「車両」とし、現在位置が歩道上であれば移動種別を「歩行者等」としてもよい。
Also, the movement type of the own vehicle can be specified from the current position. For example, based on the map information and the current position, the movement type may be “vehicle” if the current position is on a roadway, and the movement type may be “pedestrians” if the current position is on a sidewalk.
他の移動体の移動種別を特定する方法は、自車の移動種別を特定する方法と同様に、受信した他の移動体の移動体情報に移動種別を示す情報が含まれていれば該移動種別を示す情報に基いて特定し、移動種別を示す情報が含まれていなければ、受信した他の移動体情報に含まれる他の移動体の移動速度や、他の移動体に搭載されている他の通信装置が電源供給を受けている電源の種類、他の移動体のヘッドライトの点灯状態を示す情報の有無等に基づいて特定することができる。
The method for specifying the movement type of another mobile object is similar to the method for specifying the movement type of the own vehicle. If the received mobile object information of another mobile object includes information indicating the movement type, the movement type is determined. If the information indicating the type is specified and the information indicating the movement type is not included, the moving speed of the other moving body included in the received other moving body information or the other moving body is mounted. It can be specified based on the type of power source to which other communication devices are supplied with power, the presence or absence of information indicating the lighting state of headlights of other mobile units, and the like.
ステップS05において制御部301は、自車の移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態(詳細は後述)で行い、ステップS06において制御部301は、自車の移動体情報の送信について通常制御状態(詳細は後述)で行う(すなわち、自車の移動体情報の送信について通常制御状態で行うか特別制御状態で行うかを決定する)。
In step S05, the control unit 301 performs transmission of mobile body information of the host vehicle in a special control state (details will be described later). In step S06, the control unit 301 performs normal control state (details of transmission of mobile body information of the host vehicle). (That is, it is determined whether transmission of moving body information of the vehicle is performed in a normal control state or a special control state).
ここで通常制御状態による自車の移動体情報の送信とは、ITS通信において一般的に、車両に搭載された車載装置から他の通信装置に対して送信される車両の移動体情報と同様の情報が通信部308を介して送信されることである。移動体情報には車両(自車)に関する様々な情報が含まれており、通常制御状態において車両(自車)に関するどのような情報を移動体情報として送信するかは予め設定されている。自車に関する情報としては、自車の移動種別を示す情報、自車のID(ナビゲーション装置300の端末ID)を示す情報、自車の現在位置を示す情報、自車の進行方向を示す情報、自車の移動速度を示す情報、ヘッドライトの点灯状態を示す情報、ワイパーの稼動状態を示す情報などが挙げられる。
Here, the transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle in the normal control state is generally the same as the moving body information of the vehicle transmitted from the in-vehicle device mounted on the vehicle to another communication device in the ITS communication. Information is transmitted via the communication unit 308. The mobile body information includes various information related to the vehicle (own vehicle), and what information is transmitted as the mobile body information in the normal control state is set in advance. As information about the own vehicle, information indicating the movement type of the own vehicle, information indicating the ID of the own vehicle (terminal ID of the navigation device 300), information indicating the current position of the own vehicle, information indicating the traveling direction of the own vehicle, Examples include information indicating the moving speed of the own vehicle, information indicating the lighting state of the headlight, information indicating the operating state of the wiper, and the like.
一方、特別制御状態による自車の移動体情報の送信とは、通常制御状態とは異なる制御であり、例えば、自車の移動体情報として送信される自車に関する情報を変更する制御、自車の移動体情報の送信周期を変更する制御、自車の移動体情報の送信を停止する制御、これらを組み合わる制御などが考えられる。
On the other hand, transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle in the special control state is control different from the normal control state, for example, control for changing information on the own vehicle transmitted as moving body information of the own vehicle, The control which changes the transmission cycle of this mobile body information, the control which stops transmission of the mobile body information of the own vehicle, the control which combines these, etc. can be considered.
本実施形態において、自車の移動体情報として送信される自車に関する情報を変更する場合には、例えば、通常制御状態時には上述した自車に関する情報(移動種別、端末ID、現在位置、進行方向、移動速度、ヘッドライト点灯状態、ワイパーの稼動状態)が自車の移動体情報として送信されるが、特別制御状態時には、自車の移動種別を示す情報及び自車の現在位置を示す情報のみが自車の移動体情報として送信されることとする。つまり、特別制御状態時においては通常制御状態時に比べて、自車の移動体情報として送信される自車に関する情報が少ない。
In this embodiment, when changing the information about the own vehicle transmitted as the moving body information of the own vehicle, for example, in the normal control state, the information about the own vehicle described above (movement type, terminal ID, current position, traveling direction) , Movement speed, headlight lighting state, wiper operating state) is transmitted as the moving body information of the own vehicle, but in the special control state, only the information indicating the moving type of the own vehicle and the information indicating the current position of the own vehicle Is transmitted as moving body information of the own vehicle. That is, in the special control state, there is less information regarding the own vehicle transmitted as the moving body information of the own vehicle than in the normal control state.
また、自車の移動体情報の送信周期を変更する場合には、例えば通常制御状態時には100ms毎に自車の移動体情報を送信することとし、特別制御状態時には200ms毎に自車の移動体情報を送信することとする。また、自車の移動体情報の送信を停止する場合には、通常制御状態時には自車の移動体情報の送信を行い、特別制御状態時には自車の移動体情報の送信を行わないこととする。さらに、これらを組み合わせて特別制御状態とすることも可能である。
In addition, when changing the transmission cycle of the moving body information of the own vehicle, for example, the moving body information of the own vehicle is transmitted every 100 ms in the normal control state, and the moving body information of the own vehicle is changed every 200 ms in the special control state. Information shall be transmitted. In addition, when the transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle is stopped, the moving body information of the own vehicle is transmitted in the normal control state, and the moving body information of the own vehicle is not transmitted in the special control state. . Furthermore, it is possible to combine them into a special control state.
すなわち、「自車の移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行なう」とは、「自車の移動体情報の送信について通常制御状態で行なう」場合に比べて、通信回線に負担をかけない(送信される情報を減らす及び/又は送信される回数を減らす(送信しない)など)状態とすることである。
That is, “transmission of own vehicle information in a special control state” does not impose a burden on the communication line compared to “performs transmission of own vehicle information in a normal control state” ( Reducing information to be transmitted and / or reducing the number of times of transmission (not transmitting).
また、本実施形態においては、自車と同一の移動種別の他の移動体が、所定範囲内に存在するときに特別制御状態とすることとしたが、制御部301は、当該所定範囲内に存在する他の移動体の数(自車と同一の移動種別である他の移動体の数としてもよいし、移動体種別を問わない他の移動体の数であってもよい)に基づいて、特別制御状態の内容を変更することとしてもよい。すなわち、自車の周辺に存在する他の移動体の数が少なければ回線の混雑が起こる可能性が低く、一方、自車の周辺に存在する他の移動体の数が多ければ回線の混雑が起こる可能性が高いため、自車の周辺に存在する他の移動体の数に基づいて特別制御状態の内容を変更する。
Further, in the present embodiment, the control unit 301 is in the special control state when another mobile body having the same movement type as the own vehicle exists within the predetermined range. Based on the number of other moving bodies present (the number of other moving bodies having the same movement type as that of the own vehicle may be used, or the number of other moving bodies regardless of the moving body type). The contents of the special control state may be changed. In other words, if the number of other mobile objects present in the vicinity of the own vehicle is small, it is unlikely that the line will be congested. Since there is a high possibility that this will occur, the content of the special control state is changed based on the number of other moving objects present around the host vehicle.
例えば通常制御状態時における自車の移動体情報の送信周期が100msである場合に、自車周辺に他の移動体が1つ(1人、1台)存在する場合には送信周期を200msとし、自車周辺に他の移動体が2つ存在する場合には送信周期を300msとし、自車周辺に他の移動体が3つ存在する場合には送信を停止することとする。
For example, when the transmission cycle of the moving body information of the own vehicle in the normal control state is 100 ms, the transmission cycle is set to 200 ms when one other moving body (one person, one person) exists around the own vehicle. The transmission cycle is set to 300 ms when two other mobile objects exist around the own vehicle, and the transmission is stopped when three other mobile objects exist around the own vehicle.
本実施形態によれば、自車の現在位置から所定範囲内に自車と同一の移動種別である他の移動体が存在するときに自車の移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行うので、安全運転支援(渋滞判定や交通事故判定)を妨げることなく、ITS通信における回線の混雑を未然に防ぐことができる。
According to this embodiment, when there is another moving body having the same movement type as the own vehicle within a predetermined range from the current position of the own vehicle, transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle is performed in a special control state. Thus, it is possible to prevent congestion of the line in ITS communication without disturbing safe driving support (congestion judgment and traffic accident judgment).
なお、本実施形態では、自車の移動種別と他の移動体の移動種別とが同一であるか否かを判定したが、移動種別が同一であるか否かを判定せずとも、何れかの他の移動体の現在位置が自車の現在位置から所定範囲内であると判定した時点で、自車の移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行なうと決定してもよい。
In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the movement type of the own vehicle and the movement type of another moving body are the same, but it is not necessary to determine whether or not the movement type is the same. When it is determined that the current position of the other moving body is within a predetermined range from the current position of the own vehicle, it may be determined that transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle is performed in the special control state.
[第3実施形態]
本発明のナビゲーション装置300の第3実施形態について図17を用いて説明する。図17は本発明のナビゲーション装置300の制御部301が実行する処理の流れを示す第2のフローチャートである。なお、本実施形態のステップS11~ステップS14、ステップS16~ステップS17は、それぞれ第2実施形態のステップS01~ステップS04、ステップS05~ステップS06と同一であるため説明を省略する。 [Third embodiment]
A third embodiment of thenavigation device 300 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a second flowchart showing the flow of processing executed by the control unit 301 of the navigation device 300 of the present invention. Note that steps S11 to S14 and steps S16 to S17 of the present embodiment are the same as steps S01 to S04 and steps S05 to S06 of the second embodiment, respectively, and thus description thereof is omitted.
本発明のナビゲーション装置300の第3実施形態について図17を用いて説明する。図17は本発明のナビゲーション装置300の制御部301が実行する処理の流れを示す第2のフローチャートである。なお、本実施形態のステップS11~ステップS14、ステップS16~ステップS17は、それぞれ第2実施形態のステップS01~ステップS04、ステップS05~ステップS06と同一であるため説明を省略する。 [Third embodiment]
A third embodiment of the
ステップS15において制御部301は、自車の進行方向と他の移動体の進行方向が同一であるか否かを判定する。本ステップにおいて他の移動体とは、ステップS14において、自車の移動種別と同一であると判定された他の移動体(すなわち、他の車両)であり、自車の移動種別と同一であると判定された他の移動体(他の車両)が複数存在する場合には、他の移動体(他の車両)毎に判定を行う。
In step S15, the control unit 301 determines whether or not the traveling direction of the host vehicle is the same as the traveling direction of another moving body. In this step, the other moving body is another moving body (that is, another vehicle) determined to be the same as the moving type of the own vehicle in step S14, and is the same as the moving type of the own vehicle. When there are a plurality of other moving bodies (other vehicles) that are determined as follows, the determination is performed for each of the other moving bodies (other vehicles).
自車の進行方向は、現在位置検出部304によって検出される自車の進行方向とし、他の移動体の進行方向は、通信部308が受信する他の移動体(他の車両)の進行方向に基づいて特定することとしてもいいし、自車及び他の移動体の進行方向を現在位置検出部304によって検出される自車の現在位置(緯度、経度)を示す情報、通信部308が受信する他の移動体(他の車両)の現在位置(緯度、経度)を示す情報、地図情報に基づいて特定するこことしてもよい。すなわち、自車及び他の移動体(他の車両)の現在位置から、自車及び他の移動体(他の車両)が走行している車線を特定することにより、その車線における進行方向を特定することができる(車線と当該車線における進行方向が対応付けられている)。
The traveling direction of the host vehicle is the traveling direction of the host vehicle detected by the current position detection unit 304, and the traveling direction of the other moving body is the traveling direction of another moving body (other vehicle) received by the communication unit 308. The communication unit 308 receives the information indicating the current position (latitude, longitude) of the own vehicle detected by the current position detection unit 304 and the traveling direction of the own vehicle and other moving objects. You may specify based on the information which shows the present position (latitude, longitude) of the other mobile body (other vehicle) to perform, and map information. That is, by identifying the lane in which the vehicle and other moving bodies (other vehicles) are traveling from the current positions of the own vehicle and other moving bodies (other vehicles), the traveling direction in the lane is identified. (The lane and the traveling direction in the lane are associated with each other).
自車の進行方向と他の移動体(他の車両)の進行方向が同一であれば(ステップS15のY)ステップS16に進み、自車の進行方向と他の移動体(他の車両)の進行方向が同一でなければ(ステップS15のN)ステップS17に進む。すなわち、自車の進行方向と他の移動体(他の車両)の進行方向が同一でなければ、両者は対向車関係(すなわち対向する車線を走行する車両)である可能性があるから、安全運転支援のために自車の移動体情報の送信について通常制御状態で行う。
If the traveling direction of the own vehicle and the traveling direction of the other moving body (other vehicle) are the same (Y in step S15), the process proceeds to step S16, and the traveling direction of the own vehicle and the other moving body (other vehicle) If the traveling directions are not the same (N in step S15), the process proceeds to step S17. That is, if the traveling direction of the host vehicle and the traveling direction of another moving body (other vehicle) are not the same, the two may be in an oncoming vehicle relationship (that is, a vehicle traveling in an opposite lane). Transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle is performed in the normal control state for driving support.
なお、自車の移動種別と同一であると判定された他の移動体(他の車両)が複数存在する場合には、その全ての他の移動体(他の車両)が自車の進行方向と同一でない場合にのみステップS17に進む。
When there are a plurality of other moving bodies (other vehicles) that are determined to be the same as the movement type of the own vehicle, all of the other moving bodies (other vehicles) are traveling directions of the own vehicle. The process proceeds to step S17 only when it is not the same.
本実施形態によれば、第2実施形態と同様の効果を奏する。加えて、自車の進行方向と他の移動体の進行方向が同一でないときには、自車の移動体情報の送信について通常制御状態で行うので、対向車同士の衝突事故を回避する等の安全運転支援(渋滞判定や交通事故判定)を妨げることがない。
According to this embodiment, the same effects as those of the second embodiment are obtained. In addition, when the traveling direction of the host vehicle and the traveling direction of other moving bodies are not the same, transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle is performed in a normal control state, so that safe driving such as avoiding a collision accident between oncoming vehicles is performed. Support (congestion judgment and traffic accident judgment) is not hindered.
なお、ステップ15において他の移動体とは、ステップS14において、自車の移動種別と同一であると判定された他の移動体(すなわち、他の車両)であると、説明を行なったが、ステップ13において、他の移動体の現在位置が自車の現在位置から所定範囲内であると判定された他の移動体(すなわち、他の車両)であってもよい。
In addition, although it demonstrated that the other mobile body in step 15 is another mobile body (namely, other vehicle) determined to be the same as the movement type of the own vehicle in step S14, In step 13, it may be another moving body (that is, another vehicle) determined that the current position of the other moving body is within a predetermined range from the current position of the own vehicle.
すなわち、自車の移動種別と他の移動体の移動種別とが同一であるか否かを判定したが、移動種別が同一であるか否かを判定しなくてもよい。
That is, it is determined whether or not the movement type of the own vehicle is the same as the movement type of another moving body, but it is not necessary to determine whether or not the movement type is the same.
[第4実施形態]
本発明のナビゲーション装置300の第4実施形態について図18を用いて説明する。図18は本発明のナビゲーション装置300の制御部301が実行する処理の流れを示す第3のフローチャートである。なお、本実施形態のステップS21~ステップS25、ステップS27~ステップS28は、それぞれ第3実施形態のステップS11~ステップS15、ステップS16~ステップS17と同一であるため説明を省略する。 [Fourth embodiment]
A fourth embodiment of thenavigation device 300 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a third flowchart showing the flow of processing executed by the control unit 301 of the navigation device 300 of the present invention. Note that Steps S21 to S25 and Steps S27 to S28 of the present embodiment are the same as Steps S11 to S15 and Steps S16 to S17 of the third embodiment, respectively, and thus description thereof is omitted.
本発明のナビゲーション装置300の第4実施形態について図18を用いて説明する。図18は本発明のナビゲーション装置300の制御部301が実行する処理の流れを示す第3のフローチャートである。なお、本実施形態のステップS21~ステップS25、ステップS27~ステップS28は、それぞれ第3実施形態のステップS11~ステップS15、ステップS16~ステップS17と同一であるため説明を省略する。 [Fourth embodiment]
A fourth embodiment of the
ステップS26において制御部301は、他の移動体(他の車両)の現在位置が自車の現在位置よりも自車の進行方向前方(ステップS25において自車の進行方向と他の移動体(他の車両)の進行方向が同一であると判定されているため、他の移動体(他の車両)の進行方向前方であってもよい)であるか否かを判定する。
In step S <b> 26, the control unit 301 determines that the current position of the other mobile body (other vehicle) is ahead of the current position of the host vehicle in the forward direction of the host vehicle (step S <b> 25 and the other mobile body (other Since the traveling direction of the other vehicle (the other vehicle) is determined to be the same, it may be determined whether the traveling direction is ahead of the other moving body (other vehicle)).
他の移動体(他の車両)が前方車両であるか否かは(他の移動体(他の車両)の現在位置が自車の現在位置よりも自車の進行方向前方であるか否かは)、現在位置検出部304によって検出される自車の現在位置(緯度、経度)、通信部308が受信する他の移動体(他の車両)の現在位置(緯度、経度)、地図情報に基づいて特定することができる。すなわち、自車及び他の移動体(他の車両)の現在位置から、自車及び他の移動体(他の車両)が走行している車線及びその車線における進行方向を特定し、自車の現在位置と他の移動体(他の車両)の現在位置とを比較することにより、他の移動体(他の車両)が前方車両か否かを判定することができる。また、自車の現在位置と他の移動体(他の車両)の現在位置及び自車又は他の移動体(他の車両)の車両の進行方向に基づいて他の移動体(他の車両)が前方車両であるか否かを判定することも可能である、すなわち、進行方向から進んでいる方向がわかるため、進行方向を考慮して、自車の現在位置と他の移動体(他の車両)の現在位置とを比較することにより、他の移動体(他の車両)が前方車両か否かを判定することができる。
Whether or not the other moving body (other vehicle) is a forward vehicle (whether the current position of the other moving body (other vehicle) is ahead of the current position of the own vehicle or not) A), the current position (latitude, longitude) of the host vehicle detected by the current position detection unit 304, the current position (latitude, longitude) of the other mobile body (other vehicle) received by the communication unit 308, and the map information Can be identified based on. That is, from the current positions of the host vehicle and other moving bodies (other vehicles), the lane in which the host vehicle and other moving bodies (other vehicles) are traveling and the traveling direction in the lane are identified, and By comparing the current position with the current position of another moving body (other vehicle), it can be determined whether or not the other moving body (other vehicle) is a forward vehicle. Further, the other vehicle (other vehicle) based on the current position of the own vehicle, the current position of the other vehicle (other vehicle) and the traveling direction of the vehicle of the own vehicle or other vehicle (other vehicle). It is also possible to determine whether the vehicle is a forward vehicle, that is, since the direction from the traveling direction is known, the current position of the host vehicle and other moving bodies (other By comparing the current position of the vehicle), it can be determined whether or not the other moving body (other vehicle) is a forward vehicle.
他の移動体(他の車両)の現在位置が自車の現在位置よりも自車の進行方向前方であれば(ステップS26のY)ステップS27に進み、他の移動体(他の車両)の現在位置が自車の現在位置よりも自車の進行方向前方でなければ(ステップS26のN)ステップS28に進む。すなわち、進行方向が同一である他の移動体(他の車両)の現在位置が自車の現在位置よりも自車の進行方向前方でなければ、自車は当該車線において先頭を走行しており、進行方向が異なる別の他の移動体(例えば対向車線を走る車両や道路を横断する歩行者)と自車との間で交通事故等が発生する可能性があるので、自車の移動体情報の送信について通常制御状態で行う。
If the current position of the other moving body (other vehicle) is ahead of the current position of the own vehicle (Y in step S26), the process proceeds to step S27, and the other moving body (other vehicle) If the current position is not ahead of the current position of the host vehicle (N in step S26), the process proceeds to step S28. That is, if the current position of another moving body (other vehicle) having the same traveling direction is not ahead of the traveling direction of the own vehicle from the current position of the own vehicle, the own vehicle is traveling at the head in the lane. Since there is a possibility that a traffic accident may occur between another vehicle (for example, a vehicle running on the opposite lane or a pedestrian crossing the road) with a different traveling direction and the own vehicle, Information transmission is performed in a normal control state.
本実施形態によれば、第2実施形態と同様の効果を奏する。加えて、他の移動体の現在位置が自車の現在位置よりも自車の進行方向(他の移動体(他の車両))前方でないときに、自車の移動体情報の送信について通常制御状態で行うので、出会いがしらの衝突事故を回避する等の安全運転支援(渋滞判定や交通事故判定)を妨げることがない。
According to this embodiment, the same effects as those of the second embodiment are obtained. In addition, when the current position of the other vehicle is not ahead of the current position of the vehicle (the other vehicle (other vehicle)), the normal control is performed for transmitting the vehicle information of the vehicle. Since it is performed in a state, it does not interfere with safe driving support (congestion judgment or traffic accident judgment) such as avoiding collision accidents where encounters occur.
なお、ステップ24は、必ずしも行なわなくてもよい。すなわち、自車の移動種別と他の移動体の移動種別とが同一であるか否かを判定したが、移動種別が同一であるか否かを判定しなくてもよい。
Note that step 24 is not necessarily performed. That is, it is determined whether or not the movement type of the own vehicle is the same as the movement type of another moving body, but it is not necessary to determine whether or not the movement type is the same.
[第5実施形態]
本発明のナビゲーション装置300の第5実施形態について図19を用いて説明する。図19は本発明のナビゲーション装置300の制御部301が実行する処理の流れを示す第4のフローチャートである。なお、本実施形態のステップS31~ステップS36、ステップS38~ステップS39は、それぞれ第4実施形態のステップS21~ステップS26、ステップS27~ステップS28と同一であるため説明を省略する。 [Fifth Embodiment]
A fifth embodiment of thenavigation device 300 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a fourth flowchart showing the flow of processing executed by the control unit 301 of the navigation device 300 of the present invention. Note that Steps S31 to S36 and Steps S38 to S39 of the present embodiment are the same as Steps S21 to S26 and Steps S27 to S28 of the fourth embodiment, respectively, and thus description thereof is omitted.
本発明のナビゲーション装置300の第5実施形態について図19を用いて説明する。図19は本発明のナビゲーション装置300の制御部301が実行する処理の流れを示す第4のフローチャートである。なお、本実施形態のステップS31~ステップS36、ステップS38~ステップS39は、それぞれ第4実施形態のステップS21~ステップS26、ステップS27~ステップS28と同一であるため説明を省略する。 [Fifth Embodiment]
A fifth embodiment of the
ステップS37において制御部301は、自車の現在位置よりも自車の進行方向(他の移動体(他の車両)の進行方向)後方であると判定された第3の移動体(第3の車両)が存在するか否かを判定する。自車の現在位置よりも自車の進行方向(他の移動体(他の車両)の進行方向)後方であると判定された第3の移動体(第3の車両)が存在するときは(ステップS37のY)ステップS39に進み、自車の現在位置よりも自車の進行方向(他の移動体(他の車両)の進行方向)後方であると判定された第3の移動体(第3の車両)が存在しないとき(ステップS37のN)はステップS38に進む。
In step S37, the control unit 301 determines that the third moving body (the third moving body) determined to be behind the traveling direction of the own vehicle (the traveling direction of the other moving body (other vehicle)) from the current position of the own vehicle. It is determined whether or not a vehicle exists. When there is a third moving body (third vehicle) that is determined to be behind the traveling direction of the own vehicle (the traveling direction of the other moving body (other vehicle)) from the current position of the own vehicle ( Y of step S37) The process proceeds to step S39, and the third moving body (the first moving body) determined to be behind the traveling direction of the own vehicle (the traveling direction of the other moving body (other vehicle)) from the current position of the own vehicle. If there is no vehicle (No. 3 vehicle) (N in step S37), the process proceeds to step S38.
すなわち、上述の通り、受信部8が複数の他の移動体の移動体情報を受信した場合には、他の移動体の移動体情報毎に各判定がなされる。従って、ステップS36において、一の他の移動体の移動体情報に基づいて判定した結果、当該一の他の移動体が前方車両である(自車が後方車両である)と判定された場合(ステップS36のY)であっても、別の他の移動体(第3の移動体)の移動体情報に基づいて判定した結果、当該別の他の移動体(第3の移動体)が後方車両である(自車が前方車両である)と判定されている場合には、自車は2つの車両に挟まれている状態であり、後方車両である別の他の移動体(第3の移動体)が自車に衝突することにより、玉突き事故が発生する可能性があるため、このような場合には自車の移動体情報の送信について通常制御状態で行う。
That is, as described above, when the receiving unit 8 receives moving body information of a plurality of other moving bodies, each determination is made for each moving body information of the other moving bodies. Accordingly, when it is determined in step S36 based on the moving body information of one other moving body, it is determined that the one other moving body is a front vehicle (the own vehicle is a rear vehicle) ( Even in step S36), as a result of determination based on the moving body information of another other moving body (third moving body), the other moving body (third moving body) is rearward. When it is determined that the vehicle is a vehicle (the vehicle is a front vehicle), the vehicle is sandwiched between two vehicles, and another moving body (third Since there is a possibility that a ball hitting accident may occur when the moving body) collides with the own vehicle, in such a case, transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle is performed in the normal control state.
但し、自車が2つの車両に挟まれている状態であっても、別の他の移動体(第3の移動体)が停止している場合や、自車と別の他の移動体(第3の移動体)が同等(例えば、移動速度の誤差が時速1キロまでを「同等」という。)の移動速度で走行(移動)している場合には、別の他の移動体(第3の移動体)が自車に衝突する可能性が低いため、自車の移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行うこととしてもよい。言い換えれば、別の他の移動体(第3の移動体)の移動速度が、自車の移動速度よりも速い場合に限り、自車の移動体情報の送信について通常制御状態で行うこととしてもよい。
However, even when the host vehicle is sandwiched between two vehicles, when another moving body (third moving body) is stopped or another moving body ( If the third moving body is traveling (moving) at the same moving speed (for example, an error in moving speed up to 1 km / h is referred to as “equivalent”), another moving body (the first moving body) 3), the transmission of the mobile body information of the own vehicle may be performed in a special control state. In other words, only when the moving speed of another moving body (third moving body) is faster than the moving speed of the own vehicle, the transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle may be performed in the normal control state. Good.
本実施形態によれば、第2実施形態と同様の効果を奏する。加えて、自車の現在位置が他の移動体の現在位置と第3の移動体の現在位置の間であるときに、自車の移動体情報の送信について通常制御状態で行うので、玉突き事故を回避する等の安全運転支援(渋滞判定や交通事故判定)を妨げることがない。
According to this embodiment, the same effects as those of the second embodiment are obtained. In addition, when the current position of the own vehicle is between the current position of the other moving body and the current position of the third moving body, transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle is performed in a normal control state. Safe driving support such as avoiding traffic (judgment judgment and traffic accident judgment) is not disturbed.
なお、ステップ34は、必ずしも行なわなくてもよい。すなわち、自車の移動種別と他の移動体(第3の移動体も含む)の移動種別とが同一であるか否かを判定したが、移動種別が同一であるか否かを判定しなくてもよい。
Note that step 34 is not necessarily performed. That is, it is determined whether or not the movement type of the host vehicle is the same as the movement type of another moving body (including the third moving body), but it is not determined whether or not the movement type is the same. May be.
[第6実施形態]
本発明のナビゲーション装置300の第6実施形態について図20を用いて説明する。図20は本発明のナビゲーション装置300の制御部301が実行する処理の流れを示す第5のフローチャートである。 [Sixth Embodiment]
A sixth embodiment of thenavigation device 300 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a fifth flowchart showing the flow of processing executed by the control unit 301 of the navigation device 300 of the present invention.
本発明のナビゲーション装置300の第6実施形態について図20を用いて説明する。図20は本発明のナビゲーション装置300の制御部301が実行する処理の流れを示す第5のフローチャートである。 [Sixth Embodiment]
A sixth embodiment of the
本実施形態は、路側器や通信装置(例えば路側器から送信された他の移動体の移動体情報を受信した通信装置)から送信される他の移動体の移動体情報が、観測エリアを示す情報と、該観測エリア上(観測エリア内)に存在する他の移動体の移動種別及び移動種別毎の数を示す情報からなる場合における実施形態である(以下の説明では路側器が他の移動体の移動体情報を送信する場合について説明を行なう)。
In the present embodiment, the moving body information of another moving body transmitted from a roadside device or a communication device (for example, a communication device that has received the moving body information of another moving body transmitted from the roadside device) indicates an observation area. It is an embodiment in the case of comprising information and information indicating the movement type of other mobile objects existing in the observation area (in the observation area) and the number of each movement type (in the following description, the roadside unit is another type of movement) The case of transmitting the moving body information of the body will be described).
路側器は、例えば交差点付近に設置され、交差点付近に設置されたセンサの出力に基づく他の移動体の移動体情報(観測エリアを示す情報など)を送信する。
The roadside device is installed near an intersection, for example, and transmits moving body information (information indicating an observation area, etc.) of another moving body based on the output of a sensor installed near the intersection.
ここで、交差点付近に設置されたセンサとは、少なくとも観測エリアにおける他の移動体の有無が判別できるものであり、従来から知られている種々のセンサを用いることが可能である。例えば、カメラであってもよいし、道路に埋め込まれた重量センサ、通信装置(ナビゲーション装置300など)から送信される移動体情報を受信する受信機や、感知式信号機などに用いられる感知器であってもよい。なお、観測エリアにおける他の移動体の移動種別及び移動種別毎の数がわかるセンサ(例えばカメラであり、撮影画像の画像認識により移動種別や数を判定)であることが好ましい。以下の説明では、観測エリアにおける他の移動体の移動種別及び移動種別毎の数がわかる場合を例示して説明を行なう。
Here, the sensor installed in the vicinity of the intersection can distinguish at least the presence or absence of other moving bodies in the observation area, and various conventionally known sensors can be used. For example, it may be a camera, a weight sensor embedded in a road, a receiver for receiving moving body information transmitted from a communication device (such as the navigation device 300), or a sensor used for a sensing signal device. There may be. Note that it is preferable that the sensor is a sensor (for example, a camera that determines the type of movement and the number of movements by recognizing a captured image) that can know the type of movement of the other moving objects in the observation area and the number of each movement type. In the following description, the case where the movement types of other mobile bodies in the observation area and the number of each movement type are known will be described as an example.
そして、路側器から送信される他の移動体の移動体情報をナビゲーション装置300(通信部308)が受信した場合に、受信した他の移動体の移動体情報(受信した他の移動体には自車も含まれる可能性がある)に含まれる何れかの観測エリア内に自車が存在する(自車の現在位置が観測エリア内である)場合、該観測エリアに1以上の他の移動体が存在すれば、自車の移動体情報を送信する必要性は低くなる。
And when the navigation apparatus 300 (communication part 308) receives the moving body information of the other moving body transmitted from the roadside device, the received moving body information of the other moving body (the received other moving body includes If the vehicle is in one of the observation areas included (the vehicle may also be included) (the current position of the vehicle is within the observation area), one or more other movements in the observation area If the body exists, the necessity of transmitting the moving body information of the own vehicle is reduced.
すなわち、交差点付近に設置されたセンサなどにより自車の存在が検出(観測エリア、移動種別など)され、路側器により自車の存在(ある観測エリアに車両がいること)が周囲に送信されていると推測できる(或いは、自車の存在がセンサにより検出されていなくとも、自車の現在位置が含まれる観測エリアに移動体が存在することは周囲に送信されている)ため、通信部308を介して行われる自車の移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行うと決定する。
That is, the presence of the vehicle is detected (observation area, movement type, etc.) by sensors installed near the intersection, and the presence of the vehicle (the vehicle is in a certain observation area) is transmitted to the surroundings by the roadside device. (Or even if the presence of the vehicle is not detected by the sensor, the presence of a moving body in the observation area including the current position of the vehicle is transmitted to the surroundings), so the communication unit 308 It is determined that transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle to be performed through the special control state.
まず、ステップS41において制御部301は、第2実施形態のステップS01と同様に、現在位置検出部304によって検出される自車の現在位置と、現在位置検出部304(ナビゲーション装置300が進行方向検出部を備えるときは進行方向検出部でもよい)により検出される自車の進行方向、速度検出部305により検出される自車の移動速度などの自車に関する情報を取得する。
First, in step S41, as in step S01 of the second embodiment, the control unit 301 detects the current position of the host vehicle detected by the current position detection unit 304 and the current position detection unit 304 (the navigation device 300 detects the traveling direction). When the unit is provided, the traveling direction detection unit may be used to acquire information related to the own vehicle such as the traveling direction of the own vehicle detected by the traveling direction detection unit and the moving speed of the own vehicle detected by the speed detection unit 305.
また、ステップS42において制御部301は、通信部308が受信した1又は複数の他の移動体(他の車両、歩行者等)の移動体情報を取得する。本実施形態において1又は複数の他の移動体の移動体情報とは、通信部308が路側機(例えば、路側機から当該情報を受信した他の車両に備えられた車載通信装置等であってもよい)から受信する情報であって、観測エリアを示す情報と、該観測エリア上に存在する他の移動体の移動種別及び移動種別毎の数を示す情報からなる。これにより、とある観測エリア上に移動種別「車両」が何台存在し、移動種別「歩行者等」が何人存在するが特定される。すなわち、「観測エリア」とは、「該観測エリア上に存在する他の移動体の現在位置」であり、「観測エリアを示す情報」とは、「該観測エリア上に存在する他の移動体の現在位置を示す情報」である。
In step S42, the control unit 301 acquires the moving body information of one or more other moving bodies (other vehicles, pedestrians, etc.) received by the communication unit 308. In the present embodiment, the mobile body information of one or more other mobile bodies is a roadside device (for example, an in-vehicle communication device or the like provided in another vehicle that has received the information from the roadside device). Information that indicates the observation area, and information indicating the movement types of the other mobile objects existing in the observation area and the number of each movement type. As a result, the number of movement types “vehicles” and the number of movement types “pedestrians” exist in a certain observation area. That is, the “observation area” is “the current position of another mobile object existing on the observation area”, and the “information indicating the observation area” is “another mobile object existing on the observation area”. Is information indicating the current position of ".
なお、路側機から受信する1又は複数の他の移動体の移動体情報には、厳密には、自車の移動体情報が含まれていると考えられるが、路側機から受信する情報に車両のIDを示す情報が含まれていない場合には、制御部301は自車の移動体情報が含まれているか否かを判断することができない。よって、本実施形態においては路側機から受信した情報について全て他の移動体の移動体情報であるものとして以降の判定を行うこととする。路側機から受信する情報に車両IDを示す情報が含まれているときには、観測エリア上に自車のIDと同一のIDを有する他の移動体が存在していれば以降のステップに進むことなく自車の移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行う(ステップS46に進む)こととすればよい。これは、センサなどにより自車の存在が検出(観測エリア、移動種別など)され、路側器により自車の存在(ある観測エリアに車両がいること)が周囲に送信されているためである。
Strictly speaking, it is considered that the moving body information of one or more other moving bodies received from the roadside machine includes the moving body information of the own vehicle, but the information received from the roadside machine includes the vehicle. If the information indicating the ID of the vehicle is not included, the control unit 301 cannot determine whether the moving body information of the own vehicle is included. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the subsequent determination is performed on the assumption that all the information received from the roadside device is moving body information of other moving bodies. When the information received from the roadside machine includes information indicating the vehicle ID, if there is another moving body having the same ID as the own vehicle ID in the observation area, the process does not proceed to the subsequent steps. What is necessary is just to carry out in the special control state about transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle (go to step S46). This is because the presence of the own vehicle is detected by the sensor or the like (observation area, movement type, etc.), and the presence of the own vehicle (the vehicle is in a certain observation area) is transmitted to the surroundings by the roadside device.
以下、観測エリア上に存在する他の移動体の移動種別及び移動種別毎の数を示す情報を路側機から受信した場合について説明する。なお、本実施形態において観測エリアとは、路側機が他の移動体の移動種別や移動種別毎の数を観測する際の単位となる個々の領域であり、路側機は観測エリア毎に、各観測エリア上に存在する他の移動体の移動種別を特定し、且つ、移動種別毎の数を計測する。観測エリアは2つのノード(道路の始点/終点ノード、歩道の終点/始点ノード、横断歩道の始点/終点ノード等)とエリア幅(道路幅、歩道幅、横断歩道幅等)によって特定され、例えば図21が示すように交差点付近において、車両や歩行者等の移動体が密集すると考えられる車両待機エリア(エリア(A)~エリア(D))、歩行者等待機エリア(エリア(E)~エリア(H))、横断歩道エリア(エリア(I)~エリア(L))が観測エリアとして設定されている。
Hereinafter, a case will be described in which information indicating the movement type of other mobile objects existing in the observation area and the number of each movement type is received from the roadside device. In this embodiment, the observation area is an individual area that is a unit when the roadside device observes the movement type of the other mobile object and the number of each movement type. The movement types of other moving objects existing in the observation area are specified, and the number of each movement type is measured. The observation area is specified by two nodes (road start / end nodes, sidewalk end / start nodes, crosswalk start / end nodes, etc.) and area width (road width, sidewalk width, crosswalk width, etc.) As shown in FIG. 21, in the vicinity of an intersection, a vehicle standby area (area (A) to area (D)), a pedestrian standby area (area (E) to area) that is considered to be densely populated with moving objects such as vehicles and pedestrians. (H)), a pedestrian crossing area (area (I) to area (L)) is set as an observation area.
ステップS43において制御部301は観測エリアを示す情報及び自車の現在位置に基づいて自車の現在位置が属する観測エリア(観測エリア内に自車の現在位置がある観測エリア)を特定する。すなわち図21が示すように交差点に複数の観測エリアが存在する場合において、自車は観測エリア(A)にいることが特定される。
In step S43, the control unit 301 specifies the observation area to which the current position of the own vehicle belongs (the observation area where the current position of the own vehicle is in the observation area) based on the information indicating the observation area and the current position of the own vehicle. That is, as shown in FIG. 21, when there are a plurality of observation areas at the intersection, it is specified that the vehicle is in the observation area (A).
ステップS44において制御部301は、自車が属する観測エリア(観測エリア(A))上に1以上の他の移動体が存在するか否かを判定する。自車が属する観測エリア上に1以上の他の移動体が存在するとき(移動種別毎の数のうち何れかが1以上であるとき)は(ステップS44のY)ステップS45に進み、自車が属する観測エリア上に1以上の他の移動体が存在しないときは(ステップS44のN)ステップS47に進んで自車の移動体情報の送信について通常制御状態で行う。
In step S44, the control unit 301 determines whether one or more other moving objects exist on the observation area (observation area (A)) to which the vehicle belongs. When one or more other moving objects are present in the observation area to which the own vehicle belongs (when any of the number of movement types is one or more) (Y in step S44), the process proceeds to step S45. When one or more other moving bodies do not exist in the observation area to which the vehicle belongs (N in step S44), the process proceeds to step S47, and transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle is performed in the normal control state.
ステップS45において制御部301は、自車が属する観測エリア上に存在する他の移動体の移動種別が自車の移動種別と同一であるか(すなわち、車両であるか)否かを判定する。
In step S45, the control unit 301 determines whether or not the movement type of another moving body existing on the observation area to which the own vehicle belongs is the same as the movement type of the own vehicle (that is, whether the vehicle is a vehicle).
自車が属する観測エリア上に存在した他の移動体の移動種別が自車の移動種別と同一であれば(ステップS45のY)ステップS46に進んで自車の移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行い、自車が属する観測エリア上に存在した他の移動体の移動種別が自車の移動種別と同一でないときは(ステップS45のN)路側機が自車に関する情報を送信していないことになるためステップS47に進んで自車の移動体情報の送信について通常制御状態で行う。特別制御状態、通常制御状態はいずれも第2実施形態における特別制御状態、通常制御状態と同様とすればよい。
If the movement type of the other moving body existing on the observation area to which the own vehicle belongs is the same as the moving type of the own vehicle (Y in step S45), the process proceeds to step S46 and special control is performed for transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle. If the movement type of the other moving body existing on the observation area to which the vehicle belongs is not the same as the movement type of the own vehicle (N in step S45), the roadside device does not transmit information about the own vehicle. Therefore, it progresses to step S47 and it performs in the normal control state about transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle. The special control state and the normal control state may be the same as the special control state and the normal control state in the second embodiment.
本実施形態によれば、第2実施形態と同様の効果を奏する。加えて、交差点などナビゲーション装置等の車載通信装置や携帯電話等の移動通信端末等が密集し、回線が混雑すると考えられる場所で、自車の移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行うので、安全運転支援(渋滞判定や交通事故判定)を妨げることなく、ITS通信における回線の混雑を未然に防ぐことができる。
According to this embodiment, the same effects as those of the second embodiment are obtained. In addition, in-vehicle communication devices such as navigation devices such as intersections and mobile communication terminals such as mobile phones are crowded and transmission of mobile body information of the vehicle is performed in a special control state in a place where the line is thought to be congested. Line congestion in ITS communication can be prevented without obstructing safe driving support (congestion judgment or traffic accident judgment).
なお、本実施形態では、路側器が送信する他の移動体の移動体情報には、観測エリアを示す情報(現在位置を示す情報)が含まれると説明を行なったが、全ての観測エリアを示す情報(図21におけるエリア(A)~エリア(L)を示す情報)を送信せずとも、観測エリア上に他の移動体が存在する観測エリアを示す情報(図21において自車しか存在しない場合、エリア(A)を示す情報)のみを送信してもよい。
In the present embodiment, it has been described that the mobile body information of other mobile bodies transmitted by the roadside device includes information indicating the observation area (information indicating the current position). Even without transmitting the information shown (information indicating the areas (A) to (L) in FIG. 21), the information indicating the observation area in which another mobile object exists on the observation area (only the vehicle in FIG. 21 exists). In this case, only the information indicating the area (A) may be transmitted.
この場合、自車の現在位置が観測エリアに属すれば(受信した観測エリア内であれば)、該観測エリアには1以上の移動体が存在するため、ステップS44の判定は不要となる。
In this case, if the current position of the vehicle belongs to the observation area (if it is within the received observation area), since there is one or more moving bodies in the observation area, the determination in step S44 is unnecessary.
なお、自車の現在位置が観測エリアに属さない場合(受信した観測エリア外であれば)、ステップS47に進んで自車の移動体情報の送信について通常制御状態で行うことが好ましい。
In addition, when the current position of the own vehicle does not belong to the observation area (if it is outside the received observation area), it is preferable to proceed to step S47 and perform transmission of the moving body information of the own vehicle in the normal control state.
また、ステップ45は、必ずしも行なわなくてもよい。すなわち、自車の移動種別が、受信した移動種別毎の数(自車の現在位置が属する観測エリアに対応付けられた移動種別毎の数)が1以上である移動種別の何れかと同一であるか否かを判定したが、移動種別が同一であるか否かを判定しなくてもよい。
Further, step 45 is not necessarily performed. That is, the movement type of the own vehicle is the same as any one of the movement types in which the number of the received movement types (the number of movement types associated with the observation area to which the current position of the own vehicle belongs) is 1 or more. It is not necessary to determine whether or not the movement types are the same.
<変形例>
上記実施形態(第2実施形態~第6実施形態)において判定する順番はフローチャートに示した順序でなくてもよく、例えば第2実施形態においてはステップS03において自車の移動種別と他の移動体の移動種別が同一であるか否かを判定し、ステップS04において自車と同一の移動種別である他の移動体の現在位置が自車の現在位置から所定範囲内であるか否かを判定するものであってもよい。 <Modification>
The order of determination in the above-described embodiments (second to sixth embodiments) may not be the order shown in the flowchart. For example, in the second embodiment, in step S03, the movement type of the own vehicle and other moving bodies are determined. In step S04, it is determined whether or not the current position of another moving body having the same movement type as the own vehicle is within a predetermined range from the current position of the own vehicle. You may do.
上記実施形態(第2実施形態~第6実施形態)において判定する順番はフローチャートに示した順序でなくてもよく、例えば第2実施形態においてはステップS03において自車の移動種別と他の移動体の移動種別が同一であるか否かを判定し、ステップS04において自車と同一の移動種別である他の移動体の現在位置が自車の現在位置から所定範囲内であるか否かを判定するものであってもよい。 <Modification>
The order of determination in the above-described embodiments (second to sixth embodiments) may not be the order shown in the flowchart. For example, in the second embodiment, in step S03, the movement type of the own vehicle and other moving bodies are determined. In step S04, it is determined whether or not the current position of another moving body having the same movement type as the own vehicle is within a predetermined range from the current position of the own vehicle. You may do.
また、上記実施形態(第2実施形態~第6実施形態)において、歩行者等に自転車等の二輪車が含まれることとしているが、二輪車を別の移動種別としてもよい。さらに、二輪車においても自動二輪車(バイク)と自転車とを別の移動種別として取り扱うこととしてもよい。
In the above-described embodiments (second to sixth embodiments), pedestrians and the like include two-wheeled vehicles such as bicycles, but two-wheeled vehicles may be used as another type of movement. Further, in a motorcycle, a motorcycle (bike) and a bicycle may be handled as different types of movement.
なお、上記実施形態(第2実施形態~第6実施形態)においては、現在位置を検出する現在位置検出部304や表示部302などの構成をナビゲーション装置300が備える構成として説明を行なったが、これに限ることはなく、例えば、ナビゲーション装置300が搭載された車両に搭載された現在位置検出部304を備える通信装置と無線又は有線通信を行うことで現在位置を取得してもよいし、同様に、表示部302を備える通信装置と無線又は有線通信を介して表示指示を行うことで表示部302に画像が表示されてもよい。
In the above-described embodiments (second to sixth embodiments), the description has been made assuming that the navigation device 300 includes the current position detection unit 304 and the display unit 302 that detect the current position. For example, the current position may be acquired by performing wireless or wired communication with a communication device including a current position detection unit 304 mounted on a vehicle on which the navigation device 300 is mounted. In addition, an image may be displayed on the display unit 302 by giving a display instruction via a wireless or wired communication with a communication device including the display unit 302.
また、上記実施例では、通信部308が他の移動体(他の車両)に備えられた他の通信装置(車載通信装置)などと無線通信(移動体情報の送受信)を行なう場合を記載したが、例えば、第3の通信装置が他の通信装置から他の車両の移動体情報を受信し、第3の通信装置から無線又は有線通信を介して通信部308が他の車両の移動体情報を受信してもよい。送信についても同様に通信部308から無線又は有線通信を介して第3の通信装置へ自車の移動体情報を送信し、第3の通信装置から他の通信装置へ自車の移動体情報が送信されてもよい。
In the above-described embodiment, the case where the communication unit 308 performs wireless communication (transmission / reception of mobile body information) with other communication devices (vehicle communication devices) provided in other mobile bodies (other vehicles) is described. However, for example, the third communication device receives the moving body information of the other vehicle from the other communication device, and the communication unit 308 transmits the moving body information of the other vehicle from the third communication device via wireless or wired communication. May be received. Similarly for transmission, the mobile unit information of the own vehicle is transmitted from the communication unit 308 to the third communication device via wireless or wired communication, and the mobile unit information of the own vehicle is transmitted from the third communication device to another communication device. May be sent.
また、上記の実施形態(第2実施形態~第6実施形態)において、制御部301は、自車の移動体情報の送信について通常制御状態で行なうか特別制御状態で行なうかを決定したが、これに限ることはなく、例えば、受信した他の移動体の移動体情報など(自車の移動体情報以外の移動体情報)を周囲に送信する場合も同様に、受信した他の移動体(送信元)の現在位置と自車の現在位置に基づいて通常制御状態で行なうか特別制御状態で行なうかを決定することが好ましい。
In the above embodiment (second embodiment to sixth embodiment), the control unit 301 determines whether to transmit the moving body information of the own vehicle in the normal control state or the special control state. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the mobile body information of other mobile bodies received (mobile body information other than the mobile body information of the own vehicle) is transmitted to the surroundings, It is preferable to determine whether to perform in the normal control state or the special control state based on the current position of the transmission source) and the current position of the host vehicle.
本発明の第3の課題について以下説明する。車両の現在位置又は歩行者の現在位置の検出精度は、外的要因(ビル街のマルチパスなど)により一時的に低下することが想定されるので、実際には降車していないのにも関わらず降車判定がなされ、その後、車両の現在位置又は歩行者の現在位置の検出精度の精度が高くなった際には改めて乗車判定がなされるというように、乗車中であるとの判定及び降車したとの判定が頻繁に行われることが考えられる。
The third problem of the present invention will be described below. The detection accuracy of the current position of the vehicle or the current position of the pedestrian is assumed to temporarily decrease due to external factors (such as multipath in a building street), so even though the vehicle is not actually getting off. After getting off, it was decided that it was getting on and got off, so that when the accuracy of detection of the current position of the vehicle or the current position of the pedestrian becomes high, the boarding decision is made again. It can be considered that the determination is frequently performed.
そして乗車中であるとの判定及び降車したとの判定が頻繁に繰り返されると、それに伴って歩行者の移動体情報の送信開始と送信停止が繰り返されることになり、その度に他の通信装置は安全運転支援を行うことになるという問題があった。
And if the determination that it is getting on and the determination that it got off are repeated frequently, the transmission start and stop of transmission of the pedestrian's moving body information will be repeated accordingly, each time another communication device Had the problem of providing safe driving assistance.
本発明の第7実施形態~第10実施形態は、上述した問題点に鑑み、近距離無線通信を行っているときには、移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行うための制御を行うことによって他の通信装置の安全運転支援を妨げることを防ぐ移動体通信装置及び通信制御方法を提供することを目的とするものである。以下、本発明の実施形態について記載する。
In view of the above-described problems, the seventh to tenth embodiments of the present invention perform other control by performing control for performing transmission of mobile object information in a special control state when performing short-range wireless communication. It is an object of the present invention to provide a mobile communication device and a communication control method that prevent hindering safe driving support of the communication device. Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described.
まず、本発明の概要を簡単に説明する。
First, the outline of the present invention will be briefly described.
本発明では、移動通信端末(移動体通信装置)と車載通信装置(移動体通信装置)の間で近距離無線通信を行っているときには、車載通信装置又は移動通信端末による移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行なうための制御を行う。
In the present invention, when short-range wireless communication is performed between a mobile communication terminal (mobile communication device) and an in-vehicle communication device (mobile communication device), transmission of mobile information by the in-vehicle communication device or the mobile communication terminal Control for performing in the special control state.
すなわち、近距離無線通信を行うためには、移動通信端末及び車載通信装置が近接している必要がある。移動通信端末及び車載通信装置が近接している場合、(且つ、互いにペアリング登録(後述)が行なわれている場合)であれば、車載通信装置が搭載されている車両に移動通信端末を保持する歩行者が搭乗していると判定できる。
That is, in order to perform near field communication, the mobile communication terminal and the in-vehicle communication device need to be close to each other. If the mobile communication terminal and the in-vehicle communication device are close to each other (and if pairing registration (described later) is performed), the mobile communication terminal is held in the vehicle in which the in-vehicle communication device is mounted. It can be determined that a pedestrian is on board.
そして、車載通信装置が搭載されている車両に移動通信端末を保持する歩行者が搭乗している場合、例えば、移動通信端末から移動体情報(現在位置など)を送信しないようにすることで、他の通信装置が車両へ搭乗した歩行者への安全運転支援(衝突判定など)を行なうことを防止することができる。
And when a pedestrian holding a mobile communication terminal is on board a vehicle equipped with an in-vehicle communication device, for example, by not transmitting mobile body information (such as the current position) from the mobile communication terminal, It is possible to prevent other communication devices from providing safe driving assistance (such as collision determination) to pedestrians who have boarded the vehicle.
そのため、本発明では、移動通信端末と車載通信装置の間で近距離無線通信を行っているときには、車載通信装置又は移動通信端末による移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行なうための制御を行う。
Therefore, in the present invention, when short-range wireless communication is performed between the mobile communication terminal and the in-vehicle communication device, control for performing transmission of mobile body information by the in-vehicle communication device or the mobile communication terminal in a special control state is performed. .
本発明の実施形態について説明する前に近距離無線通信の一例であるブルートゥースについて、ハンズフリー機能を有する(ブルートゥース通信対応機器である)ナビゲーション装置等の車載通信装置とハンズフリー機能を有する(ブルートゥース通信対応機器である)携帯電話等の移動通信端末を用いて説明する。カーナビゲーションシステムにおいてブルートゥースは主としてハンズフリー通話などの機能を利用するために用いられる。
Before explaining embodiments of the present invention, Bluetooth, which is an example of short-range wireless communication, has a hands-free function and a vehicle-mounted communication device such as a navigation device (which is a device compatible with Bluetooth communication) and a hands-free function (Bluetooth communication). A description will be given using a mobile communication terminal such as a mobile phone (which is a compatible device). In a car navigation system, Bluetooth is mainly used to use functions such as hands-free calling.
ブルートゥースでは、接続可能なブルートゥース通信対応機器をアドレス応答要求パケットにて呼び出す(呼び出しモード)側をマスターと称し、アドレス応答要求パケットに応答することで接続される(スタンバイモードにて)側をスレーブと称す。そして、スレーブ側が応答に答えると接続状態となる(通信が可能な状態になる)。また、マスターとスレーブ間に形成されるネットワークをピコネットといい、本実施例では、車載通信装置がマスターに、移動通信端末がスレーブであるものとして説明するが、移動通信端末がマスターであってもよい。
In Bluetooth, the side that calls a compatible Bluetooth communication compatible device with an address response request packet (call mode) is called the master, and the side that is connected by responding to the address response request packet (in standby mode) is the slave. Call it. Then, when the slave side answers the response, it is in a connected state (communication is possible). In addition, the network formed between the master and the slave is called a piconet, and in this embodiment, the in-vehicle communication device is described as the master and the mobile communication terminal is the slave, but the mobile communication terminal is the master. Good.
上記のように車載通信装置と移動通信端末との間でブルートゥース通信を行うためには互いに相手の機器の識別情報(例えばブルートゥースデバイスアドレス(BD_ADDR))を事前に登録しておく必要がある。互いの機器の識別情報を事前に登録し、ペアリング登録が完了していればそれ以後は、車載通信装置又は移動通信端末がピコネットに進入するだけで両者の接続が確立されブルートゥース通信を行うことが可能になる。
As described above, in order to perform Bluetooth communication between the in-vehicle communication device and the mobile communication terminal, it is necessary to register the identification information (for example, Bluetooth device address (BD_ADDR)) of the other device in advance. Register each other's device identification information in advance, and if pairing registration is complete, then the in-vehicle communication device or mobile communication terminal will enter the piconet and the connection between them will be established and Bluetooth communication will be performed Is possible.
以下に本発明の実施形態について図面を参照して説明する。但し、以下に示す実施形態は、本発明の技術的思想を具体化するために本発明の移動体通信装置の例である車載通信装置としてナビゲーション装置を、また、移動体通信装置の例である移動通信端末として携帯電話を示すものであって、本発明をこのナビゲーション装置及び携帯電話に特定することを意図するものではなく、特許請求の範囲に含まれるその他の実施形態の装置にも等しく適応し得るものである。例えば、ナビゲーション機能を有しない装置であってもよい。また、以下の説明では、ナビゲーション装置が移動体の一例である自動車に取付けられた場合を例示するが、バイク等がナビゲーション装置を備えていてもよい。
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, the embodiment shown below is a navigation device as an in-vehicle communication device which is an example of the mobile communication device of the present invention and an example of the mobile communication device in order to embody the technical idea of the present invention. A mobile phone is shown as a mobile communication terminal, and the present invention is not intended to be specific to this navigation device and mobile phone, and is equally applicable to the devices of other embodiments within the scope of the claims. It is possible. For example, a device that does not have a navigation function may be used. Moreover, although the case where a navigation apparatus is attached to the motor vehicle which is an example of a mobile body is illustrated in the following description, a motorcycle etc. may be provided with the navigation apparatus.
図22は本発明のナビゲーション装置500の構成を示すブロック図である。ナビゲーション装置500は制御部501と、表示部502と、操作部503と、現在位置検出部504と、速度検出部505と、地図情報記憶部506と、バッテリ507と、第1通信部508と、第2通信部509を備えている。
FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the navigation device 500 of the present invention. The navigation device 500 includes a control unit 501, a display unit 502, an operation unit 503, a current position detection unit 504, a speed detection unit 505, a map information storage unit 506, a battery 507, a first communication unit 508, A second communication unit 509 is provided.
制御部501はナビゲーション装置500全体を総括的に制御する制御手段である。制御部501はCPUとROMとRAM(いずれも不図示)とを含んでいる。ROMには制御部501が実行するプログラム、プログラムの実行に必要なパラメータやデータが記憶されている。CPUはROMに記憶されている各種プログラムを実行する。RAMは各種処理の過程で得られるデータや各種処理の結果得られるデータを一時的に格納する。これらCPU、RAM、ROM等は、バスを介して接続されている。なお、CPU、ROM及びRAMはこれらの一部または全部を1チップに集積化しても構わない。
The control unit 501 is a control unit that comprehensively controls the entire navigation device 500. The control unit 501 includes a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM (all not shown). The ROM stores a program executed by the control unit 501 and parameters and data necessary for executing the program. The CPU executes various programs stored in the ROM. The RAM temporarily stores data obtained during various processes and data obtained as a result of various processes. These CPU, RAM, ROM and the like are connected via a bus. Note that the CPU, ROM, and RAM may be partially or fully integrated on one chip.
制御部501はナビゲーション装置500とブルートゥース接続を行っている他の通信装置がある場合に、互いに共通のプロファイルを持つことでプロファイルに対応する所定の機能を実現することができる。なお、以降の説明においてナビゲーション装置500と応答済機器(後述)は共通のプロファイルを持っているものとして説明を行なう。すなわち、ナビゲーション装置500と応答済機器が共通プロファイルを持つことで制御部501がブルートゥース通信を用いて他の通信装置の制御部に指示して他の通信装置が有する各種機能を実行することができる。
The control unit 501 can realize a predetermined function corresponding to a profile by having a common profile when there is another communication device that performs Bluetooth connection with the navigation device 500. In the following description, it is assumed that the navigation device 500 and the responded device (described later) have a common profile. That is, since the navigation device 500 and the responded device have a common profile, the control unit 501 can instruct the control unit of another communication device using Bluetooth communication to execute various functions of the other communication device. .
表示部502は地図画面(目的地への経路、ナビゲーション装置500が搭載された車両(以下、「ナビゲーション装置500が搭載された車両」を「自車」ということもある。)の現在位置を示すマークなどを含む地図画像を表示する画面)やメニュー画面を表示するための表示手段である。
The display unit 502 indicates the current position of the map screen (the route to the destination, the vehicle on which the navigation device 500 is mounted (hereinafter, “the vehicle on which the navigation device 500 is mounted” may be referred to as “the own vehicle”)). Display screen for displaying a map image including a mark or the like) and a menu screen.
操作部503はユーザが目的地を入力したり、メニューを操作したりするための入力操作手段である。なお、操作部503としては、ナビゲーション装置本体に各種のキーやボタンを設けてもよいし、表示部502にタッチパネル機能を付加してもよい。また、操作部503としてナビゲーション装置500本体を遠隔操作するためのリモートコントローラを操作部503として用いても構わない。
The operation unit 503 is an input operation means for the user to input a destination or operate a menu. As the operation unit 503, various keys and buttons may be provided on the navigation device body, or a touch panel function may be added to the display unit 502. Further, a remote controller for remotely operating the navigation device 500 main body as the operation unit 503 may be used as the operation unit 503.
現在位置検出部504は自車の現在位置を検出するものであり、GPS受信機、自立航法手段、位置計算用CPU等を含んで構成される。自立航法手段は操角センサ、加速度センサ、距離センサや方位センサなどからなり、自車の走行距離と進行方向とをそれぞれ検出し、これらの値に基づいて現在位置を求める。また、GPS受信機は複数のGPS衛星から送られてくる電波をGPSアンテナで受信して3次元測位処理又は2次元測位処理を行って自車の絶対位置及び進行方向を計算する。ここで進行方向は現時点の自車位置と直前の自車位置とに基づいて計算される。なお、進行方向の検出方法は特に限定されず、例えば方位センサを用いて検出してもよいし、車両であればタイヤの回転方向から検出することとしてもよい。また、現在位置検出部504とは別に進行方向検出部を設けて自車の進行方向を検出するものとしてもよい。
The current position detection unit 504 detects the current position of the host vehicle, and includes a GPS receiver, self-contained navigation means, a position calculation CPU, and the like. The self-contained navigation means includes a steering angle sensor, an acceleration sensor, a distance sensor, a direction sensor, and the like, detects the travel distance and the traveling direction of the own vehicle, and obtains the current position based on these values. The GPS receiver receives radio waves transmitted from a plurality of GPS satellites with a GPS antenna and performs a three-dimensional positioning process or a two-dimensional positioning process to calculate the absolute position and traveling direction of the own vehicle. Here, the traveling direction is calculated based on the current vehicle position and the previous vehicle position. In addition, the detection method of the advancing direction is not specifically limited, For example, you may detect using a direction sensor, and it is good also as detecting from the rotation direction of a tire, if it is a vehicle. Further, a traveling direction detection unit may be provided separately from the current position detection unit 504 to detect the traveling direction of the host vehicle.
速度検出部505は自車の移動速度を検出する。移動速度は速度センサや加速度センサの出力から算出してもよいし、GPS履歴間の移動距離とGPS受信時刻の差から算出してもよい。なお、自車の移動速度は現在位置検出部504が検出することとしてもよい。現在位置検出部504が自車の現在位置に加えて移動速度を検出することができる場合には速度検出部505を別途設けない構成とすることができる。その場合、現在位置検出部504に速度検出部505が含まれる構成となる。
Speed detector 505 detects the moving speed of the vehicle. The moving speed may be calculated from the output of the speed sensor or acceleration sensor, or may be calculated from the difference between the moving distance between GPS histories and the GPS reception time. Note that the current position detection unit 504 may detect the moving speed of the own vehicle. If the current position detection unit 504 can detect the moving speed in addition to the current position of the host vehicle, the speed detection unit 505 can be omitted. In this case, the current position detection unit 504 includes a speed detection unit 505.
なお、操角センサ、加速度センサ、速度センサや方位センサなどは、ナビゲーション装置500が備えていてもよいし、車両(自車)が上記各種センサを備えており、ナビゲーション装置500は、上記各種センサの出力を取得するインターフェースを備える構成としてもよい。
In addition, the navigation device 500 may include the steering angle sensor, the acceleration sensor, the speed sensor, the azimuth sensor, and the vehicle (own vehicle) includes the various sensors. The navigation device 500 includes the various sensors. It is good also as a structure provided with the interface which acquires these outputs.
地図情報記憶部506は目的地への経路探索や誘導を行う際に参照される地図情報や、当該地図情報上の特定の地点がユーザの自宅の位置や会社の位置等であることなどが記憶されている。地図情報には、ネットワークデータ(ノードデータ、リンクデータ)が含まれる。地図情報記憶部506としてはNANDフラッシュやSDメモリカードなどを好適に用いることができる。地図情報記憶部506はナビゲーション装置500に内蔵しても構わないし、ナビゲーション装置500に着脱可能な構成としても構わない。なお、地図情報には、地図画像が含まれていてもよいし、地図情報に含まれるネットワークデータ(ノードデータ、リンクデータ)に基づき地図画像を表示部502に描画してもよい。また、地図情報は予め地図情報記憶部506に記憶される以外にも、後述する第2通信部509が路側機などから地図情報を受信し、受信された地図情報が地図情報記憶部506に記憶されてもよい。
The map information storage unit 506 stores map information that is referred to when performing route search or guidance to a destination, or that a specific point on the map information is a user's home position, company position, or the like. Has been. The map information includes network data (node data, link data). As the map information storage unit 506, a NAND flash, an SD memory card, or the like can be suitably used. The map information storage unit 506 may be built in the navigation device 500, or may be configured to be detachable from the navigation device 500. The map information may include a map image, or a map image may be drawn on the display unit 502 based on network data (node data, link data) included in the map information. In addition to storing map information in advance in the map information storage unit 506, a second communication unit 509 described later receives map information from a roadside machine or the like, and the received map information is stored in the map information storage unit 506. May be.
ここで、地図情報はネットワークデータを含み、ネットワークデータは、道路をその屈曲点、分岐点等の結節点をノードとするノードデータと、それぞれのノード間を結ぶ経路をリンクとしたリンクデータから構成される。ノードデータは、ノード番号、ノードの位置座標(緯度・経度)、道路種別、交差点情報や交差点名称などを示す情報等のノード属性、さらに接続リンク本数、接続リンク番号のデータを含んで構成される。
Here, the map information includes network data, and the network data is composed of node data whose nodes are nodes such as roads at their inflection points and branch points, and link data whose links are links between the nodes. Is done. The node data includes node attributes such as node number, node position coordinates (latitude / longitude), road type, information indicating intersection information, intersection name, and the like, and the number of connection links and connection link number data. .
また、リンクデータは、リンクの始点及び終点となるノード番号、道路種別(一般道路、高速道路)、距離及び/又は所要時間等を含むリンクコスト、道路の幅を示す情報、国道○号線のような道路名称、進行方向のデータを含んで構成される。リンクデータは上記に加えて、リンク属性として橋、トンネル、踏切、料金所等のデータが付与される。
In addition, the link data includes the node numbers that are the start and end points of the link, the road type (general road, expressway), link cost including distance and / or required time, information indicating the width of the road, and the national road ○ Road name and travel direction data. In addition to the above, link data includes data such as bridges, tunnels, railroad crossings, and tollgates as link attributes.
本発明においては、ネットワークデータに、道路のノードデータ・リンクデータが含まれる。自車の現在位置を特定する際には、制御部501が現在位置検出部504によって検出される自車の現在位置(進行方向や移動速度も加えてもよい)と地図情報とに基づき、マップマッチング処理を行うことで特定することができる。
In the present invention, the network data includes road node data and link data. When specifying the current position of the host vehicle, the control unit 501 determines the map based on the current position of the host vehicle (which may include a traveling direction or a moving speed) detected by the current position detection unit 504 and map information. It can be specified by performing matching processing.
なお、マップマッチング処理については、制御部501が行なってもよいが、現在位置検出部504が行なってもよい。すなわち、GPS受信機及び/又は自律航法手段を用いて検出した現在位置と地図情報とに基づき、マップマッチング処理を行い、マップマッチング処理を行なった現在位置を現在位置として制御部501へ出力してもよい。或いは、制御部501のマップマッチング処理までを含めて現在位置検出部504としてもよい。
Note that the map matching process may be performed by the control unit 501 or may be performed by the current position detection unit 504. That is, based on the current position detected using a GPS receiver and / or autonomous navigation means and map information, map matching processing is performed, and the current position where map matching processing has been performed is output to the control unit 501 as the current position. Also good. Alternatively, the current position detection unit 504 including the map matching process of the control unit 501 may be used.
バッテリ507はナビゲーション装置500の携帯使用時における電源供給手段であり、リチウムイオン電池やニッケル水素電池などの二次電池を好適に用いることが可能である。もちろん、バッテリ507として、アルカリマンガン乾電池やマンガン乾電池などの一次電池を用いても構わないし、燃料電池を用いても構わない。
The battery 507 is a power supply means when the navigation device 500 is used in a portable manner, and a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery or a nickel metal hydride battery can be suitably used. Of course, as the battery 507, a primary battery such as an alkaline manganese battery or a manganese battery may be used, or a fuel cell may be used.
第1通信部508は、近距離無線通信によってナビゲーション装置500と通信可能な他の通信装置(以下、「他の通信装置」という。)に情報を送信する送信部(図示せず)と他の通信装置から送信される情報を受信する受信部(図示せず)とを有する。近距離無線通信として以降ブルートゥースを例に説明しているが、これに限られるものではなく赤外線通信等であってもよい。
The first communication unit 508 includes a transmission unit (not shown) that transmits information to another communication device (hereinafter, referred to as “another communication device”) that can communicate with the navigation device 500 by short-range wireless communication. A receiving unit (not shown) that receives information transmitted from the communication device. Although Bluetooth has been described below as an example of short-range wireless communication, it is not limited to this, and infrared communication or the like may be used.
例えばナビゲーション装置500と携帯電話の間でブルートゥース接続が確立すると、携帯電話での通話を、車両に搭載されナビゲーション装置500に接続されたマイク、スピーカー等を用いることでハンズフリーで行うことができる。ブルートゥースにおいて他の通信装置としては、事前に登録されたブルートゥース通信対応機器であり、歩行者が所持する携帯電話等の移動通信端末(例えば携帯電話)を挙げることができる。
For example, when a Bluetooth connection is established between the navigation device 500 and a mobile phone, a call on the mobile phone can be performed hands-free by using a microphone, a speaker, etc. that are mounted on the vehicle and connected to the navigation device 500. As another communication device in Bluetooth, a Bluetooth communication-compatible device registered in advance and a mobile communication terminal (for example, a mobile phone) such as a mobile phone possessed by a pedestrian can be cited.
第2通信部509は、第1通信部508が行う近距離無線通信とは異なり、近距離無線通信よりも無線通信可能範囲が広い無線通信方式(例えばITSによる通信)によりナビゲーション装置500と通信可能な他の通信装置(以下、「他の通信装置」という。)に情報を送信する送信部(図示せず)と他の通信装置から送信される情報を受信する受信部(図示せず)とを有する。広範囲無線通信方式として以降ITSを例に説明しているが、これに限られるものではなくWiMAX(登録商標)等であってもよい。ITSにおいて他の通信装置としては他の車両に搭載されたナビゲーション装置等の車載通信装置、路側機、歩行者が所持する携帯電話等の移動通信端末などを挙げることができる。
Unlike the short-range wireless communication performed by the first communication unit 508, the second communication unit 509 can communicate with the navigation device 500 by a wireless communication method (for example, communication by ITS) having a wider wireless communication range than the short-range wireless communication. A transmission unit (not shown) that transmits information to other communication devices (hereinafter referred to as “other communication devices”), and a reception unit (not shown) that receives information transmitted from other communication devices. Have Hereinafter, ITS is described as an example of the wide-range wireless communication method, but is not limited thereto, and WiMAX (registered trademark) or the like may be used. Examples of other communication devices in ITS include in-vehicle communication devices such as navigation devices mounted on other vehicles, roadside devices, and mobile communication terminals such as mobile phones possessed by pedestrians.
第2通信部509が他の車両に搭載されたナビゲーション装置等の車載通信装置から受信する情報には他の車両の移動体情報が含まれ、歩行者が所持する移動通信端末から受信する情報には歩行者の移動体情報が含まれる。
The information received from the in-vehicle communication device such as a navigation device mounted on another vehicle by the second communication unit 509 includes the moving body information of the other vehicle, and the information received from the mobile communication terminal possessed by the pedestrian. Includes the pedestrian moving body information.
ここで第2通信部509が受信する歩行者の移動体情報について説明を行う。歩行者の移動体情報には、移動通信端末を所持する歩行者(以下、「移動通信端末を所持する歩行者」を「歩行者」ということもある。)の現在位置、進行方向、移動速度を示す情報が含まれる。
Here, the pedestrian moving body information received by the second communication unit 509 will be described. The pedestrian's moving body information includes the current position, traveling direction, and moving speed of the pedestrian who possesses the mobile communication terminal (hereinafter, “pedestrian who possesses the mobile communication terminal” may be referred to as “pedestrian”). Is included.
歩行者の現在位置は、マップマッチング処理後の現在位置であってもよいし、マップマッチング処理前の現在位置(GPS受信機等により測位された現在位置)であってもよい。マップマッチング処理前の現在位置であれば、制御部501(現在位置検出部504)がマップマッチング処理を行なってもよい。
The current position of the pedestrian may be the current position after the map matching process or the current position before the map matching process (current position measured by a GPS receiver or the like). If the current position is before the map matching process, the control unit 501 (current position detection unit 504) may perform the map matching process.
なお、上記において第2通信部509は、車載通信装置から他の車両の移動体情報を受信し、移動通信端末から歩行者の移動体情報を受信しているが、例えば歩行者の移動体情報は携帯電話等の移動通信端末以外にも他の車両に搭載されたナビゲーション装置等の車載通信装置や、路側機などから受信してもよい。また、他の車両の移動体情報についても同様である。
In the above, the second communication unit 509 receives the moving body information of another vehicle from the in-vehicle communication device and receives the moving body information of the pedestrian from the mobile communication terminal. May be received from an in-vehicle communication device such as a navigation device mounted on another vehicle, a roadside device, or the like in addition to a mobile communication terminal such as a mobile phone. The same applies to the moving body information of other vehicles.
なお、ナビゲーション装置500が備える第1通信部508を介したブルートゥース接続がなされていない場合、ナビゲーション装置500が備える第2通信部509を介して定期的又は不定期に自車の移動体情報(現在位置、進行方向、移動速度など)が送信される。
In addition, when the Bluetooth connection via the first communication unit 508 included in the navigation device 500 is not made, the mobile body information of the vehicle (currently, regularly or irregularly via the second communication unit 509 included in the navigation device 500) Position, direction of travel, speed of movement, etc.).
図27は本発明の携帯電話700の構成を示すブロック図である。携帯電話700は制御部701と、表示部702と、操作部703と、現在位置検出部704と、速度検出部705と、地図情報記憶部706と、バッテリ707と、第1通信部708と、第2通信部709を備えている。制御部701~バッテリ707は上述のナビゲーション装置500の構成と共通しているため説明を省略する。なお、上述のナビゲーション装置500の構成を携帯電話700の構成に適用する際には、上記説明中「ナビゲーション装置」を「携帯電話」に変更し、「自車」を「歩行者」に変更するなど適宜変更すればよい。
FIG. 27 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the mobile phone 700 of the present invention. The mobile phone 700 includes a control unit 701, a display unit 702, an operation unit 703, a current position detection unit 704, a speed detection unit 705, a map information storage unit 706, a battery 707, a first communication unit 708, A second communication unit 709 is provided. Since the control unit 701 to the battery 707 are common to the configuration of the navigation device 500 described above, description thereof is omitted. When the configuration of the navigation device 500 described above is applied to the configuration of the mobile phone 700, “navigation device” is changed to “mobile phone” and “own vehicle” is changed to “pedestrian” in the above description. And so on.
なお、携帯電話700の現在位置検出部704は自立航法手段を備えていなくてもよく、また、携帯電話700は地図情報記憶部706を備えない構成であってもよい。
Note that the current position detection unit 704 of the mobile phone 700 may not include the self-contained navigation means, and the mobile phone 700 may not include the map information storage unit 706.
第1通信部708は、近距離無線通信によって携帯電話700と通信可能な他の通信装置(以下、「他の通信装置」という。)に情報を送信する送信部(図示せず)と他の通信装置から送信される情報を受信する受信部(図示せず)とを有する。ブルートゥースにおいて他の通信装置としては、事前に登録されたブルートゥース通信対応機器であり、車両に搭載されたナビゲーション装置等の車載通信装置を挙げることができる。
The first communication unit 708 includes a transmission unit (not shown) that transmits information to another communication device that can communicate with the mobile phone 700 by short-range wireless communication (hereinafter referred to as “another communication device”). A receiving unit (not shown) that receives information transmitted from the communication device. Examples of other communication devices in Bluetooth include Bluetooth communication-compatible devices registered in advance, and examples include in-vehicle communication devices such as a navigation device mounted on a vehicle.
第2通信部709は第1通信部708が行う近距離無線通信とは異なり、近距離無線通信よりも無線通信可能範囲が広い無線通信方式(例えばITSによる通信)により携帯電話700と通信可能な他の通信装置(以下、「他の通信装置」という。)に情報を送信する送信部(図示せず)と他の通信装置から送信される情報を受信する受信部(図示せず)とを有する。ITSにおいて他の通信装置としては車両に搭載されたナビゲーション装置等の車載通信装置、路側機、他の歩行者が所持する携帯電話等の移動通信端末などを挙げることができる。
Unlike the short-range wireless communication performed by the first communication unit 708, the second communication unit 709 can communicate with the mobile phone 700 by a wireless communication method (for example, communication by ITS) having a wider wireless communication range than the short-range wireless communication. A transmission unit (not shown) that transmits information to another communication device (hereinafter referred to as “another communication device”) and a reception unit (not shown) that receives information transmitted from the other communication device. Have. Examples of other communication devices in ITS include in-vehicle communication devices such as navigation devices mounted on vehicles, roadside devices, and mobile communication terminals such as mobile phones possessed by other pedestrians.
第2通信部709が車両に搭載されたナビゲーション装置等の車載通信装置から受信する情報には車両の移動体情報が含まれ、他の歩行者が所持する移動通信端末から受信する情報には他の歩行者の移動体情報が含まれる。
The information received from the in-vehicle communication device such as a navigation device mounted on the vehicle by the second communication unit 709 includes vehicle moving body information, and the information received from the mobile communication terminal possessed by another pedestrian The pedestrian's moving body information is included.
ここで第2通信部709が受信する車両の移動体情報について説明を行う。車両の移動体情報には、ナビゲーション装置等の車載通信装置が搭載された車両(以下、「ナビゲーション装置等の車載通信装置が搭載された車両」を「車両」ということもある。)の現在位置、進行方向、移動速度を示す情報などが含まれる。
Here, the vehicle moving body information received by the second communication unit 709 will be described. In the vehicle moving body information, the current position of a vehicle equipped with an in-vehicle communication device such as a navigation device (hereinafter, “a vehicle equipped with an in-vehicle communication device such as a navigation device” may be referred to as “vehicle”). , Information indicating the traveling direction, moving speed, and the like are included.
なお、車両の現在位置は、マップマッチング処理後の現在位置であってもよいし、マップマッチング処理前の現在位置(GPS受信機等により測位された現在位置)であってもよい。マップマッチング処理前の現在位置であれば、制御部701(現在位置検出部704)がマップマッチング処理を行なってもよい。
The current position of the vehicle may be the current position after the map matching process or the current position before the map matching process (current position measured by a GPS receiver or the like). If the current position is before the map matching process, the control unit 701 (current position detection unit 704) may perform the map matching process.
なお、上記において第2通信部709は、車載通信装置から車両の移動体情報を受信し、移動通信端末から他の歩行者の移動体情報を受信しているが、例えば他の歩行者の移動体情報は携帯電話等の移動通信端末以外にも車両に搭載されたナビゲーション装置等の車載通信装置や、路側機などから受信してもよい。また、車両の移動体情報についても同様である。
In the above, the second communication unit 709 receives vehicle moving body information from the in-vehicle communication device and receives moving body information of other pedestrians from the mobile communication terminal. Body information may be received from an in-vehicle communication device such as a navigation device mounted on a vehicle, a roadside device, or the like in addition to a mobile communication terminal such as a mobile phone. The same applies to the moving body information of the vehicle.
なお、携帯電話700が備える第1通信部708を介したブルートゥース接続がなされていない場合、第2通信部709を介して定期的又は不定期に自己(歩行者)の移動体情報が送信される。
In addition, when the Bluetooth connection via the first communication unit 708 included in the mobile phone 700 is not made, the mobile body information of the self (pedestrian) is transmitted regularly or irregularly via the second communication unit 709. .
[第7実施形態]
本発明の移動体通信装置の第7実施形態について図23を用いて説明する。図23は本発明のナビゲーション装置500の制御部501が実行する処理の流れを示す第1のフローチャートである。 [Seventh embodiment]
A seventh embodiment of the mobile communication device of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a first flowchart showing a flow of processing executed by thecontrol unit 501 of the navigation apparatus 500 of the present invention.
本発明の移動体通信装置の第7実施形態について図23を用いて説明する。図23は本発明のナビゲーション装置500の制御部501が実行する処理の流れを示す第1のフローチャートである。 [Seventh embodiment]
A seventh embodiment of the mobile communication device of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a first flowchart showing a flow of processing executed by the
ステップS01において制御部501は事前にペアリング登録されたブルートゥース対応機器(以下、本実施形態において「事前にペアリング登録されたブルートゥース対応機器」を「ペアリング登録済機器」とする。)に応答要求を開始するタイミングであるか否かを判定する。例えば、自車のドアが開いたときや、エンジンが始動したときに応答要求を開始するタイミングであると判定する。
In step S01, the control unit 501 responds to a Bluetooth-compatible device registered in advance (hereinafter, “a Bluetooth-compatible device previously registered as a pair” is referred to as “paired registered device” in this embodiment). It is determined whether it is time to start the request. For example, it is determined that it is time to start a response request when the door of the host vehicle is opened or when the engine is started.
ステップS02において制御部501は登録されたアドレス応答要求パケットを、第1通信部508を介して、無線電波の形態で自車の周囲(通信可能領域)に存在する全ての携帯電話に送信する。応答要求はステップS01において応答要求を開始するタイミングであると判定されたときに自動的に行うこととしてもよいし、応答要求を開始するタイミングであることを知ったユーザが操作部503を操作することによって行うこととしてもよい。なお、応答要求はタイミングに関係なく常時(定期的に)行うこととしてもよく、その場合ステップS01を省略して本ステップから開始することとしてもよい。
In step S02, the control unit 501 transmits the registered address response request packet via the first communication unit 508 to all mobile phones existing around the vehicle (communication area) in the form of radio waves. The response request may be automatically issued when it is determined in step S01 that it is the timing to start the response request, or the user who knows that it is the timing to start the response request operates the operation unit 503. It is good also to do by. Note that the response request may be made constantly (regularly) regardless of the timing, and in this case, step S01 may be omitted and the response request may be started from this step.
ステップS03において制御部501はステップS02におけるアドレス応答要求パケットに対する応答パケットをペアリング登録済機器から受信したか否かを判定する。ペアリング登録済機器から応答パケットを受信したときは(ステップS03のY)ステップS04に進み、ペアリング登録済機器から応答パケットを受信していないときは(ステップS03のN)ステップS01に戻る。ペアリング登録済機器から応答パケットを受信したときにはナビゲーション装置500とペアリング登録済機器の間で接続が確立し、通信可能な状態となる。本発明においてはこのように通信可能な状態(接続が確立された状態)も近距離無線通信を行っている状態に含むものとする。
In step S03, the control unit 501 determines whether or not a response packet for the address response request packet in step S02 has been received from the pairing registered device. When a response packet is received from the pairing registered device (Y in step S03), the process proceeds to step S04. When a response packet is not received from the pairing registered device (N in step S03), the process returns to step S01. When a response packet is received from a pairing registered device, a connection is established between the navigation device 500 and the pairing registered device, and communication is possible. In the present invention, such a communicable state (a state where connection is established) is also included in the state in which short-range wireless communication is performed.
なお、ステップS02において送信されるアドレス応答要求パケット及びステップS03において受信する(ステップS03のYのとき)応答パケットにはデータ番号が付加されている。そしてアドレス応答要求パケットと応答パケットが対応するものであれば(受信した応答パケットが送信した応答要求パケットに応答するものであれば)同一のデータ番号が付加されているので当該データ番号を参照することによってステップS03で受信した応答パケットがどのアドレス応答要求パケットに対応するものであるかを特定することができる。よって本実施形態において受信パケットを受信したとき(ステップS03のY)とはステップS02で送信したアドレス応答要求パケットに付加されたデータ番号と同一のデータ番号が付加された受信パケットを受信したことを意味するものとする。また、受信した応答パケットに付加されている送信元のブルートゥースアドレスが、登録されているペアリング登録済機器のブルートゥースアドレスと同一であれば、ペアリング登録済機器から応答パケットを受信した(ステップS03のY)と判定してもよい。
Note that a data number is added to the address response request packet transmitted in step S02 and the response packet received in step S03 (in the case of Y in step S03). If the address response request packet and the response packet correspond to each other (if the received response packet is a response to the transmitted response request packet), the same data number is added, so the data number is referred to. Thus, it is possible to specify which address response request packet corresponds to the response packet received in step S03. Therefore, when a received packet is received in this embodiment (Y in step S03), it means that a received packet with the same data number as the data number added to the address response request packet transmitted in step S02 is received. Shall mean. Also, if the source Bluetooth address added to the received response packet is the same as the Bluetooth address of the registered pairing registered device, the response packet is received from the paired registered device (step S03). Y).
ステップS04において制御部501は応答があったペアリング登録済機器(以下、「応答があったペアリング登録済機器」を「応答済機器」という。)がITS通信機能を有するか否かを判定する。応答済機器がITS通信機能を有するか否かは、応答済機器の機種名から特定することとしてもよいし、ITS通信を行うためのプロファイルを有しているか否かで特定することとしてもよいし、個々の応答済機器に対してITS通信機能を有しているか否か問い合わせその応答によって特定することとしてもよい。機種名から特定する場合には、例えば図25に示すように機種名と各機種がITS通信機能を有しているかのリストを参照して応答済機器がITS通信機能を有するか否かを特定する。
In step S04, the control unit 501 determines whether the paired registered device that has responded (hereinafter, “the paired registered device that has responded” is referred to as “responded device”) has an ITS communication function. To do. Whether or not the responded device has the ITS communication function may be specified from the model name of the responded device, or may be specified based on whether or not the device has a profile for performing ITS communication. Then, it is possible to specify whether or not each responded device has an ITS communication function by inquiring the response. When specifying from the model name, for example, as shown in FIG. 25, it is specified whether or not the responded device has the ITS communication function by referring to the model name and a list of whether each model has the ITS communication function. To do.
すなわち、応答済機器からの応答、あるいは、ナビゲーション装置500に登録(記憶)されている応答済機器の情報には、機種名が含まれており、この機種名と図25のリストを参照することで応答済機器がITS通信機能を有するか否かを特定する。
That is, the response from the responded device or the information of the responded device registered (stored) in the navigation device 500 includes the model name. Refer to the model name and the list in FIG. To specify whether the responded device has the ITS communication function.
なお、応答済機器がITS通信機能を有する場合、該応答済機器は、移動体情報を(例えば定期的に)送信しているものとして説明を行なう。つまり、ステップS04では、応答済機器が、移動体情報をITS通信で送信している機器か否かの判定である。
In the case where the responded device has an ITS communication function, the responded device will be described as transmitting mobile body information (for example, periodically). That is, in step S04, it is determined whether or not the responded device is a device that transmits mobile body information by ITS communication.
応答済機器がITS通信機能を有するときは(ステップS04のY)ステップS05に進み、応答済機器がITS通信機能を有しないときは(ステップS04のN)ステップS01に戻る。
When the responded device has the ITS communication function (Y in step S04), the process proceeds to step S05, and when the responded device does not have the ITS communication function (N in step S04), the process returns to step S01.
ステップS05において制御部501は応答済機器によるITS通信について制限するための制御を行う。なお、以下の説明において「応答済機器によるITS通信」は「応答済機器が行うITS通信による応答済機器の移動体情報の送信」を意味し、応答済機器によるITS通信について制限するための制御とは、応答済機器によるITS通信について特別制御状態で行うための制御であり、すなわち、制御部501が応答済機器によるITS通信について特別制御状態で行うように応答済機器に指示することである。
In step S05, the control unit 501 performs control for restricting ITS communication by the responded device. In the following description, “ITS communication by responded device” means “transmission of mobile body information of responded device by ITS communication performed by responded device”, and control for limiting ITS communication by responded device. Is control for performing the ITS communication by the responded device in the special control state, that is, the control unit 501 instructs the responded device to perform the ITS communication by the responded device in the special control state. .
制御部501が応答済機器によるITS通信について特別制御状態で行うように応答済機器に指示する場合において、通常制御状態から特別制御状態への変更指示はブルートゥース通信により行う場合と、ITS通信により行う場合がある。ブルートゥース通信により行う場合には、変更指示に応答済機器のブルートゥースアドレスを付加して送信するか、プロファイルを利用して応答済機器の制御部に対して変更指示を行う。一方、ITS通信により行う場合には、変更指示に応答済機器のブルートゥースアドレス又はITSアドレスを付加して送信する。これにより、ブルートゥースアドレス又はITSアドレスに合致する応答済機器が当該指示に従ってITS通信を通常制御状態から特別制御状態に変更する。
When the control unit 501 instructs the responded device to perform the ITS communication by the responded device in the special control state, the instruction to change from the normal control state to the special control state is performed by the Bluetooth communication or by the ITS communication. There is a case. When the communication is performed by Bluetooth communication, the Bluetooth address of the responded device is added to the change instruction and transmitted, or the change instruction is issued to the control unit of the responded device using the profile. On the other hand, in the case of performing by ITS communication, the Bluetooth address or ITS address of the responded device is added to the change instruction and transmitted. As a result, the responded device that matches the Bluetooth address or the ITS address changes the ITS communication from the normal control state to the special control state in accordance with the instruction.
なお、ITSアドレスはユーザが操作部503を操作して入力することとしてもよいし、ブルートゥースアドレスから特定することとしてもよいし、ブルートゥース通信により応答済機器からITSアドレスを取得することとしてもよい。ブルートゥースアドレスから特定する場合には、例えば図26に示すようにブルートゥースアドレスに対応付けられたITSアドレスを示すリストを参照して応答済機器のITSアドレスを特定する。
The ITS address may be input by the user by operating the operation unit 503, may be specified from the Bluetooth address, or may be acquired from the responded device by Bluetooth communication. When specifying from the Bluetooth address, for example, as shown in FIG. 26, the ITS address of the responded device is specified by referring to a list indicating the ITS address associated with the Bluetooth address.
なお、特別制御状態によるITS通信とは通常制御状態によるITS通信とは異なる制御であることを意味し、通常制御状態によるITS通信とは、ITSにおいてITS通信機能を有する機器から他の通信装置に対して送信するものとして予め定められている情報であり、例えば本実施形態において、ITS通信機能を有する応答済機器が携帯電話であるとすると、歩行者の移動体情報が送信される。歩行者の移動体情報には歩行者に関する情報が含まれており、通常制御状態時においては例えば歩行者の移動体情報には歩行者のID(移動通信端末(携帯電話)の端末ID)を示す情報、歩行者の現在位置を示す情報、歩行者の進行方向を示す情報、歩行者の移動速度などが含まれる。
Note that the ITS communication in the special control state means control different from the ITS communication in the normal control state, and the ITS communication in the normal control state refers to a device having an ITS communication function in ITS from another communication device. For example, in this embodiment, when the responded device having the ITS communication function is a mobile phone, the pedestrian moving body information is transmitted. The pedestrian moving body information includes information about the pedestrian, and in the normal control state, for example, the pedestrian moving body information includes the pedestrian ID (terminal ID of the mobile communication terminal (mobile phone)). Information indicating information indicating the current position of the pedestrian, information indicating the traveling direction of the pedestrian, and the moving speed of the pedestrian.
一方、特別制御状態でITS通信を行う場合には、歩行者の移動体情報の送信について、通常制御状態とは異なる制御が行われ、例えば、歩行者の移動体情報として送信される歩行者に関する情報を変更する制御、歩行者の移動体情報の送信範囲を変更する制御、歩行者の移動体情報の送信を停止する制御などが考えられる。
On the other hand, when performing ITS communication in the special control state, the transmission of the pedestrian moving body information is controlled differently from the normal control state. For example, the pedestrian is transmitted as the pedestrian moving body information. Control for changing information, control for changing the transmission range of pedestrian moving body information, control for stopping transmission of pedestrian moving body information, and the like can be considered.
本実施形態において、歩行者の移動体情報として送信される歩行者に関する情報を変更する場合には、例えば、通常制御状態時には上述した歩行者に関する情報(端末ID、現在位置、進行方向、移動速度)が歩行者の移動体情報として送信されるが、特別制御状態時には、端末IDを示す情報のみが歩行者の移動体情報として送信されることとする。つまり、特別制御状態時においては通常制御状態時に比べて、歩行者の移動体情報として送信される歩行者に関する情報が少ない。また、歩行者の移動体情報に移動種別(歩行者であることを)示す情報が含まれる場合、この移動種別を乗車中又は車両としてもよい。
In this embodiment, when changing the information about the pedestrian transmitted as the moving body information of the pedestrian, for example, in the normal control state, the information about the pedestrian described above (terminal ID, current position, traveling direction, moving speed) ) Is transmitted as pedestrian moving body information, but only information indicating the terminal ID is transmitted as pedestrian moving body information in the special control state. That is, in the special control state, there is less information regarding the pedestrian transmitted as the pedestrian moving body information than in the normal control state. Moreover, when the information which shows a movement type (it is a pedestrian) is contained in the mobile body information of a pedestrian, it is good also considering this movement type as boarding or a vehicle.
また、歩行者の移動体情報の送信範囲を変更する場合には、例えば通常制御状態時には歩行者の移動体情報を送信する範囲を制限しないこととし、特別制御状態時には乗車している車両に搭載された車載通信装置が受信できる程度の狭い範囲に歩行者の移動体情報を送信することとする。(特別制御状態時には通常制御状態に比べ送信電力を低下させる。)また、歩行者の移動体情報の送信を停止する場合には、通常制御状態時には歩行者の移動体情報の送信を行い、特別制御状態時には歩行者の移動体情報の送信を行わないこととする。さらに、これらを組み合わせて特別制御状態とすることも可能である。
In addition, when changing the transmission range of pedestrian moving body information, for example, the range for transmitting pedestrian moving body information is not limited in the normal control state, and is mounted on the vehicle in which the pedestrian is traveling in the special control state. The mobile body information of the pedestrian is transmitted to a narrow range that can be received by the in-vehicle communication device. (Transmission power is reduced in the special control state compared to the normal control state.) In addition, when the transmission of the pedestrian's mobile body information is stopped, the pedestrian's mobile body information is transmitted in the normal control state. In the control state, pedestrian moving body information is not transmitted. Furthermore, it is possible to combine them into a special control state.
本実施形態によれば、ナビゲーション装置500と、ITS通信機能を有する他の通信機器とが近距離無線方式による接続を確立しているときに、他の通信機器のITS通信について特別制御状態で行うので、第3の通信機器(ナビゲーション装置500と他の通信機器以外の通信機器)が他の通信機器に対して安全運転支援を行うことを防ぐことができる。また、外的要因によって通常制御状態によるITS通信と特別制御状態によるITS通信が繰り返されることによって第3の通信装置が行う安全運転支援を妨げることがない。
According to the present embodiment, when the navigation device 500 and another communication device having an ITS communication function establish a connection by the short-range wireless method, the ITS communication of the other communication device is performed in a special control state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the third communication device (communication device other than the navigation device 500 and other communication devices) from providing safe driving support to the other communication devices. Further, the ITS communication in the normal control state and the ITS communication in the special control state are repeated due to external factors, thereby preventing the safe driving support performed by the third communication device.
[第8実施形態]
本発明の移動体通信装置の第8実施形態について図24を用いて説明する。図24は本発明のナビゲーション装置500の制御部501が実行する処理の流れを示す第2のフローチャートである。 [Eighth embodiment]
An eighth embodiment of the mobile communication device of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a second flowchart showing the flow of processing executed by thecontrol unit 501 of the navigation apparatus 500 of the present invention.
本発明の移動体通信装置の第8実施形態について図24を用いて説明する。図24は本発明のナビゲーション装置500の制御部501が実行する処理の流れを示す第2のフローチャートである。 [Eighth embodiment]
An eighth embodiment of the mobile communication device of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a second flowchart showing the flow of processing executed by the
本実施形態は第7実施形態において応答済機器のITS通信について特別制御状態にした後に、ITS通信を通常制御状態に戻すか否かの処理を示すものである。
This embodiment shows a process of whether or not to return the ITS communication to the normal control state after setting the ITS communication of the responded device to the special control state in the seventh embodiment.
ステップS11において制御部501は応答済機器とのブルートゥース接続が維持されているか否か(切断されていないか否か)を判定する。
In step S11, the control unit 501 determines whether or not the Bluetooth connection with the responded device is maintained (whether or not disconnected).
応答済機器とのブルートゥース接続が維持されていれば(ステップS11のY)ステップS11に戻り、応答済機器とのブルートゥース接続が維持されていなければ(応答済機器からの応答が途絶えると)(ステップS11のN)ステップS12に進み、ブルートゥース接続が切断されたペアリング登録済機器に対してITS通信を通常制御状態で行うように指示する。
If the Bluetooth connection with the responded device is maintained (Y in step S11), the process returns to step S11, and if the Bluetooth connection with the responded device is not maintained (when the response from the responded device is interrupted) (step In step S11, the process proceeds to step S12, and instructs the paired registered device whose Bluetooth connection is disconnected to perform ITS communication in the normal control state.
なお、ステップS12においてはブルートゥース接続が切断されているので、制御部501はブルートゥース通信を利用して指示を行うことや、直接制御を行うことはできない。従って、ITS通信を利用して、ITS通信の制御を変更するように指示する。すなわち、変更指示にブルートゥースアドレス又はITSアドレスを付加して送信することにより、当該アドレスに合致する機器(ペアリング登録済機器)が当該指示に従ってITS通信について特別制御状態から通常制御状態に変更する。
In step S12, since the Bluetooth connection is disconnected, the control unit 501 cannot make an instruction using the Bluetooth communication or directly control the Bluetooth connection. Therefore, an instruction is given to change the control of the ITS communication using the ITS communication. That is, by transmitting a change instruction with a Bluetooth address or an ITS address added, a device that matches the address (paired registered device) changes from the special control state to the normal control state for ITS communication according to the instruction.
本実施形態によれば、ナビゲーション装置500と、ITS通信機能を有する他の通信機器との近距離無線方式による接続が切断されたときに、他の通信機器のITS通信を通常制御状態で行うので、第3の通信機器(ナビゲーション装置500と他の通信機器以外の通信機器)による安全運転支援を妨げることがない。
According to the present embodiment, when the short distance wireless connection between the navigation device 500 and another communication device having the ITS communication function is disconnected, the ITS communication of the other communication device is performed in the normal control state. The safe driving support by the third communication device (communication device other than the navigation device 500 and other communication devices) is not hindered.
[第9実施形態]
本発明の移動体通信装置の第9実施形態について図28を用いて説明する。図28は本発明の携帯電話700の制御部701が実行する処理の流れを示す第1のフローチャートである。 [Ninth Embodiment]
A ninth embodiment of the mobile communication device of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a first flowchart showing a flow of processing executed by thecontrol unit 701 of the mobile phone 700 of the present invention.
本発明の移動体通信装置の第9実施形態について図28を用いて説明する。図28は本発明の携帯電話700の制御部701が実行する処理の流れを示す第1のフローチャートである。 [Ninth Embodiment]
A ninth embodiment of the mobile communication device of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a first flowchart showing a flow of processing executed by the
ステップS21において制御部701はペアリング登録済機器から応答要求があるか否かを判定する。応答要求があれば(ステップS21のY)ステップS22に進んで応答し(応答パケットを送信し)、応答要求がなければ(ステップS22のN)ステップS21に戻る。
In step S21, the control unit 701 determines whether there is a response request from the pairing registered device. If there is a response request (Y in step S21), the process proceeds to step S22 to respond (transmits a response packet), and if there is no response request (N in step S22), the process returns to step S21.
ステップS23において制御部701は応答要求を行ったペアリング登録済機器がITS通信機能を有するか否かを判定する。応答要求を行ったペアリング登録済機器がITS通信機能を有するか否かは、応答要求を行ったペアリング登録済機器の機種名から特定することとしてもよいし、ITS通信を行うためのプロファイルを有しているか否かで特定することとしてもよいし、個々の応答要求を行ったペアリング登録済機器に対してITS通信機能を有しているか否か問い合わせその応答によって特定することとしてもよい。機種名から特定する場合には、例えば図25に示すように機種名と各機種がITS通信機能を有しているかのリストを参照して応答要求を行ったペアリング登録済機器がITS通信機能を有するか否かを特定する。
In step S23, the control unit 701 determines whether the pairing registered device that has made the response request has an ITS communication function. Whether the pairing registered device that has made the response request has the ITS communication function may be specified from the model name of the pairing registered device that has made the response request, or a profile for performing ITS communication. It may be specified based on whether or not the device has an ITS communication function, or it may be specified by inquiring whether or not it has an ITS communication function with respect to a paired registered device that has made an individual response request. Good. When specifying from the model name, for example, as shown in FIG. 25, the paired registered device that has made a response request with reference to the model name and a list of whether each model has the ITS communication function is the ITS communication function. It is specified whether or not it has.
応答要求を行ったペアリング登録済機器がITS通信機能を有するときは(ステップS23のY)ステップS24に進み、応答要求を行ったペアリング登録済機器がITS通信機能を有しないときは(ステップS23のN)ステップS21に戻る。
When the pairing registered device that has made the response request has an ITS communication function (Y in step S23), the process proceeds to step S24, and when the pairing registered device that has made the response request does not have the ITS communication function (step N of S23) Return to step S21.
ステップS24において制御部701は第2通信部709によるITS通信について特別制御状態で行う。すなわち、例えば応答要求を行ったペアリング登録済機器がナビゲーション装置であるときに、当該ナビゲーション装置がITS通信機能を有するときは携帯電話700の第2通信部709を介して行われるITS通信について特別制御状態で行うことにより、例えば、携帯電話700を保持する歩行者の移動体情報が送信されなくなり、他の通信機器が携帯電話700に対して安全運転支援を行うこと(車両と共に移動する歩行者がいるとして安全運転支援(衝突判定など)を行なうこと)を防ぐことができる。
In step S24, the control unit 701 performs ITS communication by the second communication unit 709 in a special control state. That is, for example, when the paired registered device that has made a response request is a navigation device, and the navigation device has an ITS communication function, special ITS communication performed via the second communication unit 709 of the mobile phone 700 is performed. By performing in the control state, for example, the mobile body information of the pedestrian holding the mobile phone 700 is not transmitted, and other communication devices provide safe driving support to the mobile phone 700 (the pedestrian moving with the vehicle). It is possible to prevent safe driving assistance (such as collision determination).
なお、応答要求を行ったペアリング登録済機器がITS通信機能を有しないときは(ステップS23のN)、携帯電話700の第2通信部709を介して行われるITS通信を通常制御状態で行うことにより、当該ナビゲーション装置が搭載された車両の位置を周囲に知らせることができる。その際、携帯電話700は自己が車両であることを示す情報や、自己が車両に乗車中の歩行者であることを示す情報を送信することにより、携帯電話700から情報を受信した通信機器が、携帯電話700が歩行者であるものとして安全運転支援を行うことを防ぐことが望ましい。
When the pairing registered device that has made the response request does not have the ITS communication function (N in step S23), the ITS communication performed via the second communication unit 709 of the mobile phone 700 is performed in the normal control state. Thus, the position of the vehicle on which the navigation device is mounted can be notified to the surroundings. At that time, the mobile phone 700 transmits information indicating that the mobile phone 700 is a vehicle or information indicating that the mobile phone 700 is a pedestrian riding in the vehicle, so that the communication device that has received the information from the mobile phone 700 can transmit information. It is desirable to prevent the mobile phone 700 from providing safe driving assistance as a pedestrian.
本実施形態によれば、携帯電話700と、ITS通信機能を有する他の通信機器とが近距離無線方式による接続を確立しているときに、携帯電話700のITS通信について特別制御状態で行うので、第3の通信機器(携帯電話700と他の通信機器以外の通信機器)が携帯電話700に対して安全運転支援を行うことを防ぐことができる。また、外的要因によって通信制御によるITS通信と特別制御状態によるITS通信が繰り返されることによって第3の通信装置が行う安全運転支援を妨げることがない。
According to this embodiment, when the mobile phone 700 and another communication device having an ITS communication function establish a connection by the short-range wireless method, the ITS communication of the mobile phone 700 is performed in a special control state. The third communication device (the communication device other than the mobile phone 700 and other communication devices) can be prevented from providing safe driving support to the mobile phone 700. Further, the ITS communication based on the communication control and the ITS communication based on the special control state are repeated due to external factors, thereby preventing the safe driving support performed by the third communication device.
[第10実施形態]
本発明の移動体通信装置の第10実施形態について図29を用いて説明する。図29は本発明の携帯電話700の制御部701が実行する処理の流れを示す第2のフローチャートである。 [Tenth embodiment]
A tenth embodiment of the mobile communication device of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a second flowchart showing the flow of processing executed by thecontrol unit 701 of the mobile phone 700 of the present invention.
本発明の移動体通信装置の第10実施形態について図29を用いて説明する。図29は本発明の携帯電話700の制御部701が実行する処理の流れを示す第2のフローチャートである。 [Tenth embodiment]
A tenth embodiment of the mobile communication device of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a second flowchart showing the flow of processing executed by the
本実施形態は第9実施形態において携帯電話700のITS通信について特別制御状態にした後に、ITS通信を通常制御状態に戻すか否かの処理を示すものである。
This embodiment shows a process for determining whether or not to return the ITS communication to the normal control state after setting the ITS communication of the mobile phone 700 to the special control state in the ninth embodiment.
ステップS31において制御部701は応答要求を行ったペアリング登録済機器とのブルートゥース接続が維持されているか否か(切断されていないか否か)を判定する。
In step S31, the control unit 701 determines whether or not the Bluetooth connection with the paired registered device that has made the response request is maintained (whether or not disconnected).
応答要求を行ったペアリング登録済機器とのブルートゥース接続が維持されていれば(ステップS31のY)ステップS31に戻り、応答要求を行ったペアリング登録済機器とのブルートゥース接続が維持されていなければ(ステップS31のN)ステップS32に進み第2通信部709によるITS通信を通常制御状態で行う。
If the Bluetooth connection with the pairing registered device that has made the response request is maintained (Y in step S31), the process returns to step S31, and the Bluetooth connection with the pairing registered device that has made the response request must be maintained. If (N in Step S31), the process proceeds to Step S32, and the ITS communication by the second communication unit 709 is performed in the normal control state.
本実施形態によれば、携帯電話700と、ITS通信機能を有する他の通信機器との近距離無線方式による接続が切断されたときに、携帯電話700のITS通信を通常制御状態で行うので、第3の通信機器(携帯電話700と他の通信機器以外の通信機器)による安全運転支援を妨げることがない。
According to the present embodiment, when the connection by the short-range wireless method between the mobile phone 700 and another communication device having an ITS communication function is disconnected, the mobile phone 700 performs ITS communication in the normal control state. The safe driving support by the third communication device (communication device other than the mobile phone 700 and other communication devices) is not hindered.
[その他の実施形態]
上記実施形態(第7実施形態~第10実施形態)では車載通信装置と移動通信端末が近距離無線通信を行っているときに、移動通信端末による広範囲無線通信について特別制御状態で行うように車載通信装置の制御部501が指示し、又は移動通信端末の制御部701が第2通信部709を介して特別制御状態で広範囲無線通信を行うこととしているが、車載通信装置による広範囲無線通信について特別制御状態で行うものであってもよい。 [Other embodiments]
In the above embodiments (seventh to tenth embodiments), when the in-vehicle communication device and the mobile communication terminal are performing short-range wireless communication, the in-vehicle communication is performed so that wide-range wireless communication by the mobile communication terminal is performed in a special control state. Thecontrol unit 501 of the communication device instructs or the control unit 701 of the mobile communication terminal performs wide-range wireless communication in a special control state via the second communication unit 709. It may be performed in a controlled state.
上記実施形態(第7実施形態~第10実施形態)では車載通信装置と移動通信端末が近距離無線通信を行っているときに、移動通信端末による広範囲無線通信について特別制御状態で行うように車載通信装置の制御部501が指示し、又は移動通信端末の制御部701が第2通信部709を介して特別制御状態で広範囲無線通信を行うこととしているが、車載通信装置による広範囲無線通信について特別制御状態で行うものであってもよい。 [Other embodiments]
In the above embodiments (seventh to tenth embodiments), when the in-vehicle communication device and the mobile communication terminal are performing short-range wireless communication, the in-vehicle communication is performed so that wide-range wireless communication by the mobile communication terminal is performed in a special control state. The
すなわち、車載通信装置と移動通信端末が近距離無線通信を行っているときに、車載通信装置による広範囲無線通信について特別制御状態で行うように移動通信端末の制御部701が指示し、又は車載通信装置の制御部501が第2通信部509を介して特別制御状態で広範囲無線通信を行うこととしてもよい。
That is, when the in-vehicle communication device and the mobile communication terminal are performing short-range wireless communication, the control unit 701 of the mobile communication terminal instructs to perform wide-range wireless communication by the in-vehicle communication device in a special control state, or in-vehicle communication. The control unit 501 of the apparatus may perform wide-range wireless communication in the special control state via the second communication unit 509.
車載通信装置と移動通信端末の近距離無線通信が切断されたときも同様であり、車載通信装置と移動通信端末が近距離無線通信を行っているときに車載通信装置による広範囲無線通信について特別制御状態で行うこととする場合には、車載通信装置と移動通信端末の近距離無線通信が切断されたときには車載通信装置による広範囲無線通信を通常制御状態で行う(通常制御状態に戻す)こととする。
The same applies when the short-range wireless communication between the in-vehicle communication device and the mobile communication terminal is disconnected, and special control is performed for wide-range wireless communication by the in-vehicle communication device when the in-vehicle communication device and the mobile communication terminal perform short-range wireless communication If the short-range wireless communication between the in-vehicle communication device and the mobile communication terminal is disconnected, the wide-range wireless communication by the in-vehicle communication device is performed in the normal control state (returns to the normal control state). .
なお、上記実施形態(第7実施形態~第10実施形態)においては、現在位置を検出する現在位置検出部504や表示部502などの構成をナビゲーション装置500が備える構成として説明を行なったが、これに限ることはなく、例えば、ナビゲーション装置500が搭載された車両に搭載された現在位置検出部504を備える通信装置と無線又は有線通信を行うことで現在位置を取得してもよいし、同様に、表示部502を備える通信装置と無線又は有線通信を介して表示指示を行うことで表示部502に画像が表示されてもよい(携帯電話700についても同様である)。
In the above-described embodiments (seventh to tenth embodiments), the description has been made assuming that the navigation apparatus 500 includes the current position detection unit 504 and the display unit 502 that detect the current position. For example, the current position may be acquired by performing wireless or wired communication with a communication device including a current position detection unit 504 mounted on a vehicle on which the navigation device 500 is mounted. In addition, an image may be displayed on the display unit 502 by performing a display instruction via a wireless or wired communication with a communication device including the display unit 502 (the same applies to the mobile phone 700).
また、同様にナビゲーション装置500が第2通信部509を備えることなく、例えば、自車に搭載された第2通信部509を備える通信装置に無線又は有線通信でナビゲーション装置500から移動体情報を送信し、第2通信部509を備える通信装置から広範囲無線通信方式による移動体情報の送信がなされてもよい。受信についても同様に、第2通信部509を備える通信装置が受信した移動体情報を無線又は有線通信を介してナビゲーション装置500が受信してもよい。
Similarly, the navigation apparatus 500 does not include the second communication unit 509. For example, mobile body information is transmitted from the navigation apparatus 500 to the communication apparatus including the second communication unit 509 mounted on the host vehicle by wireless or wired communication. Then, the mobile device information may be transmitted from the communication device including the second communication unit 509 by the wide range wireless communication method. Similarly, the navigation apparatus 500 may receive the mobile body information received by the communication apparatus including the second communication unit 509 via wireless or wired communication.
さらに、ナビゲーション装置500が第1通信部508を備えることなく、例えば、自車に搭載された第1通信部508を備える通信装置と移動通信端末とが近距離無線通信接続(ブルートゥース接続)している場合、第1通信部508を備える通信装置から、ブルートゥース接続していること示す情報が無線又は有線通信でナビゲーション装置500へ送信され、ナビゲーション装置500(制御部501)が該情報に基づいて、第1通信部508と移動通信端末とが近距離無線通信を行っているか否かが判定されてもよい。(第1通信部508を備える通信装置から送信される情報には、ブルートゥース接続している移動通信端末がITS通信機能を有するか否かを特定可能な情報が含まれることが好ましい。)第1通信部508と移動通信端末とが近距離無線通信を行っている場合、ナビゲーション装置500から第1通信部508を備える通信装置を介して移動通信端末の広範囲無線通信(例えばITS通信)について制御する。
Furthermore, the navigation device 500 does not include the first communication unit 508, and, for example, a communication device including the first communication unit 508 mounted on the host vehicle and a mobile communication terminal make a short-range wireless communication connection (Bluetooth connection). If the communication device includes the first communication unit 508, information indicating that the Bluetooth connection is established is transmitted to the navigation device 500 by wireless or wired communication, and the navigation device 500 (the control unit 501), based on the information, It may be determined whether the first communication unit 508 and the mobile communication terminal are performing near field communication. (The information transmitted from the communication device including the first communication unit 508 preferably includes information that can specify whether or not the mobile communication terminal connected via Bluetooth has an ITS communication function.) When the communication unit 508 and the mobile communication terminal perform short-range wireless communication, control is performed for wide-range wireless communication (for example, ITS communication) of the mobile communication terminal from the navigation device 500 via the communication device including the first communication unit 508. .
なお、「車両に備えられる移動体通信装置」とは、車両に固定されるものに限ることはなく、車両から取り外して持ち出せる装置(例えばポータブルナビゲーション装置)であってもよい。この場合、例えば、車両のバッテリなどから電源供給(12V)を受けると、車両に備えられたと判定することができる。なお、車両に備えられたか否かは公知の種々の方法を用いることが可能である。
The “mobile communication device provided in the vehicle” is not limited to a device fixed to the vehicle, and may be a device that can be removed from the vehicle (for example, a portable navigation device). In this case, for example, when a power supply (12 V) is received from a vehicle battery or the like, it can be determined that the vehicle is equipped. Various known methods can be used to determine whether the vehicle is equipped.
さらに、車載通信装置(ナビゲーション装置)と移動通信端末(携帯電話)とが近距離無線通信を行なう場合を例示したが、車載通信装置同士又は移動通信端末同士が近距離無線通信を行なう場合においても、何れか一方の移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行なうように制御する(例えば送信停止)ことが好ましい。
Furthermore, although the case where the in-vehicle communication device (navigation device) and the mobile communication terminal (mobile phone) perform short-range wireless communication is illustrated, the in-vehicle communication device or the mobile communication terminals also perform short-range wireless communication. It is preferable to control the transmission of any one of the mobile body information so as to be performed in a special control state (for example, stop transmission).
これにより、近接している2つの移動体(例えば歩行者)の何れか一方からしか移動体情報が送信されないため、通信回線(ITS通信)を圧迫することがなくなる(通信衝突などが少なくなる)。すなわち、通信回線(ITS通信)の安定化が図られ、第3の通信装置が行う安全運転支援を妨げることがない。
Thereby, since moving body information is transmitted only from any one of two adjacent mobile bodies (for example, pedestrians), the communication line (ITS communication) is not compressed (communication collision or the like is reduced). . That is, the communication line (ITS communication) is stabilized, and the safe driving support performed by the third communication device is not hindered.
なお、一方から移動体情報が送信されていれば、第3の通信機器(近距離無線通信を行なっている機器ではない通信機器)は、何れか一方の現在位置などは特定できるため、当該現在位置付近に人(通信機器)が存在することを判定できる。
Note that if the mobile body information is transmitted from one side, the third communication device (a communication device that is not a device that performs short-range wireless communication) can identify the current position of one of the third communication devices. It can be determined that there is a person (communication device) near the position.
そのため、他の通信装置と近接している状態(近距離無線通信を行なっている状態)では、他の通信装置と近接していない状態(近距離無線通信を行なっていない状態)ときよりも、移動体情報の送信する必要性は低くなる。
Therefore, in a state close to another communication device (a state in which short-range wireless communication is performed), a state not close to another communication device (a state in which short-range wireless communication is not performed), The need for transmitting mobile information is reduced.
本発明は、通信技術に関し、所定の情報が含まれる情報を他の通信装置に送信する通信装置及び送信制御方法、通信制御方法に利用することができる。
The present invention relates to a communication technique, and can be used for a communication apparatus, a transmission control method, and a communication control method for transmitting information including predetermined information to another communication apparatus.
10 基地局装置、
12 車両、
14 端末装置、
16 信号機、
18 リーダライタ、
80 第1無線通信部、
82 第2無線通信部、
100 通信システム、
300,500 ナビゲーション装置、
308 通信部、
507,707 第1通信部、
508,708 第2通信部、
700 携帯電話 10 base station equipment,
12 vehicles,
14 terminal device,
16 traffic lights,
18 Reader / writer,
80 first wireless communication unit,
82 second wireless communication unit,
100 communication system,
300,500 navigation device,
308 communication unit,
507, 707 first communication unit,
508, 708 second communication unit,
700 mobile phone
12 車両、
14 端末装置、
16 信号機、
18 リーダライタ、
80 第1無線通信部、
82 第2無線通信部、
100 通信システム、
300,500 ナビゲーション装置、
308 通信部、
507,707 第1通信部、
508,708 第2通信部、
700 携帯電話 10 base station equipment,
12 vehicles,
14 terminal device,
16 traffic lights,
18 Reader / writer,
80 first wireless communication unit,
82 second wireless communication unit,
100 communication system,
300,500 navigation device,
308 communication unit,
507, 707 first communication unit,
508, 708 second communication unit,
700 mobile phone
Claims (20)
- 第1の無線通信にてパケット信号を報知する第1通信部と、
第1の無線通信よりも通信可能領域が狭い第2の無線通信にて所定の情報を通信する第2通信部と、
前記第1通信部の動作と前記第2通信部の動作とを制御する制御部とを備え、
前記制御部は、前記第2通信部による通信が終了してから所定の期間が経過するまでの間、前記第1通信部の動作を停止させることを特徴とする端末装置。 A first communication unit for reporting a packet signal in the first wireless communication;
A second communication unit that communicates predetermined information in the second wireless communication having a communication area narrower than that of the first wireless communication;
A control unit for controlling the operation of the first communication unit and the operation of the second communication unit;
The control unit stops the operation of the first communication unit from the end of communication by the second communication unit until a predetermined period elapses. - 前記第2通信部を介して外部の通信装置との間で通信を実行することによって、サービスの利用料金を決済する決済部をさらに備え、
前記第2通信部は、サービス提供エリアに進入する場合と、サービス提供エリアから退出する場合とにおいて通信を実行し、
前記制御部は、サービス提供エリアに進入する場合に前記第2通信部が通信してから、サービス提供エリアから退出する場合に前記第2通信部が通信するまでの間、前記第1通信部の動作を停止させることを特徴とする請求項1に記載の端末装置。 A settlement unit that settles a service usage fee by performing communication with an external communication device via the second communication unit;
The second communication unit performs communication when entering the service providing area and when leaving the service providing area,
The control unit is configured such that when the second communication unit communicates when entering the service providing area and until the second communication unit communicates when leaving the service providing area, the control unit The terminal device according to claim 1, wherein the operation is stopped. - 前記第2通信部は、横断歩道に進入する場合に通信を実行し、
前記制御部は、横断歩道に進入する場合に前記第2通信部が通信してから、予め定められた期間が経過するまでの間、前記第1通信部の動作を停止させることを特徴とする請求項1に記載の端末装置。 The second communication unit performs communication when entering a pedestrian crossing,
The control unit stops the operation of the first communication unit from when the second communication unit communicates until a predetermined period elapses when entering the pedestrian crossing. The terminal device according to claim 1. - 前記第2通信部は、横断歩道から退出する場合にも通信を実行し、
前記制御部は、横断歩道から退出する場合に前記第2通信部が通信した場合、予め定められた期間が経過していなくても、前記第1通信部の動作を再開させることを特徴とする請求項3に記載の端末装置。 The second communication unit performs communication even when leaving the pedestrian crossing,
When the second communication unit communicates when leaving the pedestrian crossing, the control unit resumes the operation of the first communication unit even if a predetermined period has not elapsed. The terminal device according to claim 3. - パケット信号を生成する生成部と、
前記生成部において生成したパケット信号を報知する報知部とを備え、
前記生成部は、第1種の端末装置を対象にした送信禁止期間であって、かつ第2種の端末装置を対象から除外した送信禁止期間に関する情報をパケット信号に含めることを特徴とする基地局装置。 A generator for generating a packet signal;
A notification unit for reporting the packet signal generated in the generation unit,
The generation unit includes a packet signal that includes a transmission prohibition period for the first type terminal apparatus and includes information on a transmission prohibition period for which the second type terminal apparatus is excluded from the target. Station equipment. - 車両に搭載された端末装置であって、
基地局装置からのパケット信号を受信する受信部と、
前記受信部において受信したパケット信号に含まれた情報をもとに、パケット信号の送信可能期間を決定する決定部と、
前記決定部において決定した送信可能期間にて、パケット信号を報知する報知部とを備え、
前記決定部は、前記受信部において受信したパケット信号に含まれた情報が、歩行者に携帯された端末装置に対する送信禁止期間である場合、当該情報を無視して、パケット信号の送信可能期間を決定することを特徴とする端末装置。 A terminal device mounted on a vehicle,
A receiving unit for receiving a packet signal from the base station device;
Based on information included in the packet signal received by the reception unit, a determination unit that determines a transmittable period of the packet signal;
A notification unit for reporting a packet signal in the transmittable period determined by the determination unit;
If the information included in the packet signal received by the receiving unit is a transmission prohibition period for a terminal device carried by a pedestrian, the determining unit ignores the information and sets a packet signal transmission possible period. A terminal device characterized by determining. - 移動体に備えられ、
他の移動体の現在位置を示す情報を含む情報を受信する通信部と、
現在位置検出部により検出された移動体の現在位置を取得し、前記移動体の現在位置と前記通信部により受信された前記他の移動体の現在位置とに基づいて、前記通信部を介して行われる移動体情報の送信について通常制御状態で行うか特別制御状態で行うかを決定する制御部と、を備えることを特徴とする移動体通信装置。 Provided in the moving body,
A communication unit that receives information including information indicating the current position of another mobile unit;
The current position of the moving body detected by the current position detection unit is acquired, and based on the current position of the moving body and the current position of the other moving body received by the communication unit, via the communication unit A mobile communication device comprising: a control unit that determines whether transmission of mobile information to be performed is performed in a normal control state or a special control state. - 前記制御部は、前記通信部により受信された他の移動体の現在位置が前記現在位置検出部により検出された前記移動体の現在位置から所定範囲内であるときには、前記移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行うと決定することを特徴とする請求項7に記載の移動体通信装置。 When the current position of the other mobile body received by the communication section is within a predetermined range from the current position of the mobile body detected by the current position detection section, the control section transmits the mobile body information. 8. The mobile communication device according to claim 7, wherein the mobile communication device is determined to perform in a special control state.
- 前記制御部は、前記通信部により受信された他の移動体の現在位置が前記現在位置検出部により検出された前記移動体の現在位置から所定範囲内であって、且つ、前記移動体と前記他の移動体の移動種別が同一であるときには、前記移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行うと決定することを特徴とする請求項7に記載の移動体通信装置。 The control unit is configured such that a current position of another moving body received by the communication unit is within a predetermined range from a current position of the moving body detected by the current position detecting unit, and the moving body and the 8. The mobile communication apparatus according to claim 7, wherein when the movement types of the other mobile bodies are the same, it is determined that transmission of the mobile body information is performed in a special control state.
- 前記制御部は、さらに前記移動体の現在位置が前記他の移動体の現在位置よりも前記移動体の進行方向前方でない場合には、前記移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行うと決定することを特徴とする請求項8又は請求項9のいずれか1項に記載の移動体通信装置。 The control unit further determines that transmission of the mobile object information is performed in a special control state when the current position of the mobile object is not ahead of the current movement position of the other mobile object. The mobile communication device according to claim 8, wherein the mobile communication device is a mobile communication device.
- 前記他の移動体の現在位置を示す情報は、観測エリアを示す情報であり、前記通信部は、前記観測エリア内における他の移動体の有無を示す情報を受信し、
前記制御部は、前記現在位置検出部によって検出された前記移動体の現在位置が前記観測エリア内であって、且つ、該観測エリア内に他の移動体が存在するときに、前記移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行うことを特徴とする請求項7に記載の移動体通信装置。 The information indicating the current position of the other mobile object is information indicating an observation area, and the communication unit receives information indicating the presence or absence of another mobile object in the observation area,
When the current position of the moving object detected by the current position detecting unit is in the observation area and another moving object exists in the observation area, the control unit The mobile communication apparatus according to claim 7, wherein the transmission is performed in a special control state. - 前記特別制御状態は、前記移動体情報を送信しないこと、又は送信周期を遅らせること、又は前記移動体情報として送信される情報を減らすこと、のうち少なくとも1つを含むことを特徴とする請求項7~請求項11のいずれか1項に記載の移動体通信装置。 The special control state includes at least one of not transmitting the mobile body information, delaying a transmission cycle, or reducing information transmitted as the mobile body information. The mobile communication device according to any one of claims 7 to 11.
- 移動体に備えられた移動体通信装置が行う送信制御方法であって、
前記移動体の現在位置を取得するステップと、
他の移動体の現在位置を示す情報を含む情報を取得するステップと、
前記移動体の現在位置と、前記他の移動体の現在位置との比較結果に基づいて、移動体情報の送信について通常制御状態で行うか特別制御状態で行うかを決定するステップと、
を有することを特徴とする送信制御方法。 A transmission control method performed by a mobile communication device provided in a mobile body,
Obtaining a current position of the moving body;
Obtaining information including information indicating a current position of another mobile unit;
Determining whether to perform transmission of mobile body information in a normal control state or a special control state based on a comparison result between the current position of the mobile body and the current position of the other mobile body;
A transmission control method comprising: - 第1通信部と他の通信装置とが近距離無線通信を行っているときに、第2通信部を介した移動体情報の送信又は前記他の通信装置による移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行なうための制御を行う制御部を備えることを特徴とする移動体通信装置。 When the first communication unit and another communication device are performing short-range wireless communication, a special control state is set for transmission of mobile object information via the second communication unit or transmission of mobile object information by the other communication device A mobile communication device comprising a control unit that performs control for performing the above.
- 前記第2通信部を介した移動体情報の送信及び前記他の通信装置による移動体情報の送信は、前記近距離無線通信よりも無線通信可能範囲が広い広範囲無線通信方式により行なわれることを特徴とする請求項14に記載の移動体通信装置。 Transmission of mobile object information via the second communication unit and transmission of mobile object information by the other communication device are performed by a wide-range wireless communication system having a wider wireless communication range than the short-range wireless communication. The mobile communication device according to claim 14.
- 前記制御部は、前記他の通信装置が前記広範囲無線通信方式による移動体情報の送信を行なうことが可能か否かを判定し、前記他の通信装置が前記広範囲無線通信方式による移動体情報の送信を行なうことが可能である場合に、前記第2通信部を介した移動体情報の送信又は前記他の通信装置による移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行なうための制御を行うことを特徴とする請求項15に記載の移動体通信装置。 The control unit determines whether or not the other communication device can transmit mobile body information using the wide-range wireless communication method, and the other communication device transmits mobile information based on the wide-area wireless communication method. When it is possible to perform transmission, control is performed to perform transmission of mobile body information via the second communication unit or transmission of mobile body information by the other communication device in a special control state. The mobile communication device according to claim 15.
- 前記制御部は、前記第1通信部と前記他の通信装置との近距離無線通信が切断されたときに、前記第2通信部を介した移動体情報の送信又は前記移動通信端末による移動体情報の送信について通常制御状態で行なうための制御を行うことを特徴とする請求項14~請求項16のいずれか1項に記載の移動体通信装置。 When the short-range wireless communication between the first communication unit and the other communication device is disconnected, the control unit transmits mobile body information via the second communication unit or a mobile unit by the mobile communication terminal The mobile communication device according to any one of claims 14 to 16, wherein control for performing transmission of information in a normal control state is performed.
- 前記移動体通信装置は車両に備えられ、前記他の通信装置は移動通信端末であることを特徴とする請求項14~請求項17のいずれか1項に記載の移動体通信装置。 The mobile communication device according to any one of claims 14 to 17, wherein the mobile communication device is provided in a vehicle, and the other communication device is a mobile communication terminal.
- 前記移動体通信装置は歩行者に携行され、前記他の通信装置は車載通信装置であることを特徴とする請求項14~請求項17のいずれか1項に記載の移動体通信装置。 The mobile communication device according to any one of claims 14 to 17, wherein the mobile communication device is carried by a pedestrian and the other communication device is an in-vehicle communication device.
- 第1通信部と他の通信装置とが近距離無線通信を行うステップと、
第1通信部と他の通信装置とが近距離無線通信を行っているときに、第2通信部を介した移動体情報の送信又は前記他の通信装置による移動体情報の送信について特別制御状態で行なうための制御を行うステップと、
を有することを特徴とする通信制御方法。 The first communication unit and another communication device performing near field communication;
When the first communication unit and another communication device are performing short-range wireless communication, a special control state is set for transmission of mobile object information via the second communication unit or transmission of mobile object information by the other communication device A step of performing control for performing in
A communication control method characterized by comprising:
Applications Claiming Priority (6)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2011038721A JP5814563B2 (en) | 2011-02-24 | 2011-02-24 | Terminal apparatus and base station apparatus |
JP2011-038721 | 2011-02-24 | ||
JP2011049783A JP5745295B2 (en) | 2011-03-08 | 2011-03-08 | Mobile communication apparatus and mobile information transmission control method |
JP2011-049783 | 2011-03-08 | ||
JP2011-062656 | 2011-03-22 | ||
JP2011062656A JP5754997B2 (en) | 2011-03-22 | 2011-03-22 | Mobile communication device and communication control method |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2012114568A1 true WO2012114568A1 (en) | 2012-08-30 |
Family
ID=46720372
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2011/070703 WO2012114568A1 (en) | 2011-02-24 | 2011-09-12 | Moving-body communication device, terminal device, base station apparatus, transmission control method, and communication control method |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
WO (1) | WO2012114568A1 (en) |
Cited By (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN110956850A (en) * | 2018-09-27 | 2020-04-03 | 株式会社斯巴鲁 | Moving body monitoring device, vehicle control system using same, and traffic system |
CN110958585A (en) * | 2018-09-27 | 2020-04-03 | 株式会社斯巴鲁 | Moving body monitoring device, vehicle control system using same, and traffic system |
JP2020510813A (en) * | 2017-01-24 | 2020-04-09 | ホアウェイ・テクノロジーズ・カンパニー・リミテッド | Positioning method and positioning device |
CN112334959A (en) * | 2018-07-04 | 2021-02-05 | 三菱电机株式会社 | Information transmission control device, server, information transmission control system, and information transmission control method |
CN113301588A (en) * | 2020-02-21 | 2021-08-24 | 松下知识产权经营株式会社 | Wiring tool, wiring tool system, non-transitory recording medium, and method of controlling wiring tool |
JP7101836B1 (en) | 2021-03-05 | 2022-07-15 | 三菱電機株式会社 | In-vehicle communication device |
Citations (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2009037462A (en) * | 2007-08-02 | 2009-02-19 | Toshiba Corp | Traffic information providing system and method |
JP2009141447A (en) * | 2007-12-04 | 2009-06-25 | Casio Hitachi Mobile Communications Co Ltd | Portable terminal and program |
-
2011
- 2011-09-12 WO PCT/JP2011/070703 patent/WO2012114568A1/en active Application Filing
Patent Citations (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2009037462A (en) * | 2007-08-02 | 2009-02-19 | Toshiba Corp | Traffic information providing system and method |
JP2009141447A (en) * | 2007-12-04 | 2009-06-25 | Casio Hitachi Mobile Communications Co Ltd | Portable terminal and program |
Cited By (10)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2020510813A (en) * | 2017-01-24 | 2020-04-09 | ホアウェイ・テクノロジーズ・カンパニー・リミテッド | Positioning method and positioning device |
CN112334959A (en) * | 2018-07-04 | 2021-02-05 | 三菱电机株式会社 | Information transmission control device, server, information transmission control system, and information transmission control method |
CN112334959B (en) * | 2018-07-04 | 2022-03-25 | 三菱电机株式会社 | Information transmission control device, server, information transmission control system, and information transmission control method |
CN110956850A (en) * | 2018-09-27 | 2020-04-03 | 株式会社斯巴鲁 | Moving body monitoring device, vehicle control system using same, and traffic system |
CN110958585A (en) * | 2018-09-27 | 2020-04-03 | 株式会社斯巴鲁 | Moving body monitoring device, vehicle control system using same, and traffic system |
CN110956850B (en) * | 2018-09-27 | 2022-12-13 | 株式会社斯巴鲁 | Moving body monitoring device, vehicle control system using same, and traffic system |
CN113301588A (en) * | 2020-02-21 | 2021-08-24 | 松下知识产权经营株式会社 | Wiring tool, wiring tool system, non-transitory recording medium, and method of controlling wiring tool |
CN113301588B (en) * | 2020-02-21 | 2024-03-26 | 松下知识产权经营株式会社 | Wiring device, control method thereof, wiring device system, and non-transitory recording medium |
JP7101836B1 (en) | 2021-03-05 | 2022-07-15 | 三菱電機株式会社 | In-vehicle communication device |
JP2022135301A (en) * | 2021-03-05 | 2022-09-15 | 三菱電機株式会社 | On-vehicle communication device |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
WO2013094302A1 (en) | Mobile communication device and communication control method | |
JP5919541B2 (en) | Terminal device and communication system | |
WO2012114568A1 (en) | Moving-body communication device, terminal device, base station apparatus, transmission control method, and communication control method | |
JP5874020B2 (en) | Wireless device | |
CN107615735B (en) | Pedestrian terminal device, vehicle-mounted terminal device, inter-step communication system, and inter-step communication method | |
US9626870B2 (en) | Method for communicating within an ad hoc-type motor vehicle communication system | |
JP2012015714A (en) | Terminal device | |
JP5754998B2 (en) | Terminal device | |
JP5814563B2 (en) | Terminal apparatus and base station apparatus | |
JP6124218B2 (en) | Wireless device | |
JP6367755B2 (en) | In-vehicle terminal device, inter-pedal communication system including the same, and stop method for inter-pedal communication | |
JP5745295B2 (en) | Mobile communication apparatus and mobile information transmission control method | |
JP2012174216A (en) | Base station device | |
JP2013029899A (en) | Movable body communication device and driving support method | |
JP5723559B2 (en) | Mobile communication device | |
JP5754997B2 (en) | Mobile communication device and communication control method | |
WO2014002485A1 (en) | Radio device | |
JP6028978B2 (en) | Terminal device | |
JP2012088983A (en) | Moving object communication device | |
JP5720928B2 (en) | Mobile communication device | |
JP2012118726A (en) | Wireless device | |
JP5619504B2 (en) | Mobile communication device | |
WO2013094195A1 (en) | Wireless device | |
JP2022164498A (en) | Roadside machine, vehicle merging support system, and vehicle merging support method | |
JP5799403B2 (en) | Mobile communication device and power supply control method |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 11859506 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 11859506 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |